Skip to main content

Full text of "Worlds of IF (July 1953)"

See other formats


JULY  1953  • 35  CENTS 


MERCURY — the  smallest,  hottest  and  innermost  planet  in  our  system — is 
probable  completely  airless.  Jagged  cliffs  rise  thousands  of  feet  above  a 
surface  pockmarked  with  volcanic  craters.  The  men  pictured  are  scaling 
one  of  the  less  formidable  peaks,  while  their  ship  lies  in  the  valley  far  be- 
low, A Mercurian  day  is  of  the  same  duration  as  its  year — 88  Earth  days. 


1 


JULY  1953 


WORLDS  of  SCIENCE  FICTION 


Ail  Stories  New  and  Complete 

Editor:  JAMES  L.  QUINN 

Associate  Editor:  LARRY  T.  SHAW 

Staff  Artist:  ED  VALIGURSKY 

Cover  by  Ken  Fagg:  A Volcanic  Eruption 
on  Titan,  Sixth  Moon  of  Saturn 

I NOVELETTES 

I SMMBAK  by  Jock  Vance 

I BRINK  OF  MADNESS  by  Walt  Sheldon 

I SHORT  STORIES 

I IRRESISTIBLE  WEAPON  by  H.  B.  Fyfe 
I A BOTTLE  OF  OLD  WINE  by  Richard  O.  Lewis 
I CELEBRITY  by  James  McKimmey,  Jr. 

I ONE  MARTIAN  AFTERNOON  by  Tom  Leahy 
I WEAK  ON  SQUARE  ROOTS  by  Russell  Burton 
I THE  LONELY  ONES  by  Edward  W.  Ludwig 
I PROGRESS  REPORT  by  Mark  Clifton  and  Alex 
I Apostolides 

I THE  GUINEA  PIGS  by  S.  A.  Lombino 
s 

I FEATURES 

I A CHAT  WITH  THE  EDITOR 

I PERSONALITIES  IN  SCIENCE 

I SCIENCE  BRIEFS 
I THE  POSTMAN  COMETH 

I COVER  PICTORIAL:  Venus  and  Mercury 

fliiminiiiuiiiiiiiiuiiiiiiiiiiituiiiiiiMUHmmmiiiiuiimiitiiiMmiininiiimimmiimumiiimiiiiimmiMiimimiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiimiMMitiiitii^. 

IF  is  published  bi-monthly  by  Quinn  Publishing  Company,  Inc.  Volume  2,  No.  3. 
Copyright  1953  by  Quinn  Publishing  Co.,  Inc.  Office  of  publication,  8 Lord  Street, 
Buffalo,  New  York.  Entered  as  Second  Class  Matter  at  Post  Office,  Buffalo,  New 
York.  Subscription  $3.50  for  12  issues  in  U.S.  and  Possessions;  Canada  $4  for  12 
issues;  elsewhere  $4.50.  Allow  four  weeks  for  change  of  address.  All  stories  appear- 
ing in  this  magazine  are  fiction;  any  similarity  to  actual  persons  is  coincidental. 
Not  responsible  for  unsolicited  artwork  or  manuscripts.  35c  a copy.  Printed  in  U.S. A. 

EDITORIAL  AND  BUSINESS  OFFICES,  KINGSTON,  NEW  YORK 

Next  issue  on  sale  July  10th 


4 I 
44  I 


26  I 

32  I 
41  I 
75  I 

82  I 

91  I 

102  I 

115  I 


2 I 
80  I 

89  I 
119  I 


A CHAT  WITH 
THE  EDITOR 

Sometimes  a body  gets  to  won- 
dering just  what  progress  really 
is.  In  this  case,  my  confusion  is 
about  one  of  those  new,  super-duper 
fountain  pens,  made  by  one  of 
America’s  oldest  pen  and  pencil 
makers.  The  one  I have  in  mind  is 
right  on  the  desk  before  me.  It’s  a 
desk  pen — a pretty  thing,  black, 
onyx-like  base,  magnetic  marble, 
which  holds  the  penholder  in  any 
position,  and  a slim,  sleek,  black  pen 
with  a chrome  band  around  the 
middle.  It  has  a truly  graceful,  fu- 
turistic, pace-setting  feel  and  ap- 
pearance. But,  boy-oh-boy-oh-boy! 
That  pretty  thing  is  more  trouble  to 
fill  than  an  old-fashioned  Saturday- 
night-bath  tub  with  an  old  oaken 
bucket  from  an  old  time,  pulley- 
working dug-well. 

You’ve  no  doubt  had  experiences 
with  one  like  it.  If  you  haven’t, 
here’s  how  it  works:  First,  you  gotta 


have  special  ink  for  it — made  by  the 
maker  of  the  pen.  Then,  you  un- 
screw the  top  of  the  pen  and  find 
a plunger.  This  plunger  is  special. 
No  once-down-and-release  like  the 
good  old-time  pens  of  fifteen,  twen- 
ty or  twenty-five  years  ago.  This 
special,  super  plunger  requires  nine 
plunges,  holding  the  point  sub- 
merged all  the  while.  And  each  time 
you  “plunge”,  you  gotta  allow  a 
couple  seconds  on  the  release  for  it 
to  suck  in  ink.  The  ninth  time,  you 
remove  it  from  the  ink  and  then 
release  the  plunger.  No  variations, 
now,  and  no  short  cuts ! Should  you 
lose  count  because  your  phone  rings 
or  something,  you  have  to  start  all 
over  from  scratch.  You  can’t  fool 
that  pen! 

Oh,  you  get  used  to  it  after  a 
while.  All  you  gotta  do  is  practice. 
Like  on  Saturdays  and  Sundays  and 
during  your  lunch  hour.  You  grad- 
ually become  quite  proficient.  I’ve 
had  mine  for  two  years  and  I’m 
pretty  good.  I average  a penful  of 
ink  three  out  of  every  five  times  I 
perform  the  operation. 

And  yet,  no  matter  how  assinine 
I think  it  is,  I reckon  it  is  probably 
better  than  the  old  fashioned  type 
that  had  a little  lever  or  plunger, 
which  you  worked  once — with  your 
eyes  shut  and  without  mumbling  a 
count  and  using  anybody’s  ink — and 
you  had  a penful  that  would  write  a 
long  time.  After  all,  that  was  much 
too  simple.  Oh,  yes,  I’ve  also  got  a 
pocket  job,  with  a super,  trick-re- 
verse vacuum  method  of  filling,  that 
doesn’t  take  in  as  much  ink  as  any 
self-respecting  wreck  you  use  to  fill 
out  money  order  forms  in  post  of- 
fices around  the  country.  But  it 
looks  nice  when  I take  it  out  of  my 


pocket  and  let  it  rest  on  the  table 
while  I borrow  somebody  else’s 
equipment  to  write  with. 

IT  WAS  Mark  Twain  who  once 
said,  “Everybody  complains  about 
the  weather,  but  nobody  does  any- 
thing about  it”.  That  pretty  much 
applies  to  this  thing  we  call  “time”. 
You’ve  heard  that  familiar  gripe: 
“Where  the  heck  does  the  time  go?” 
Or,  “How  time  flies!”  Or,  “There 
ought  to  be  more  than  24  hours  in 
a day!”  Anyhow,  you  get  the  idea. 
But  did  you  ever  stop  to  think  that 
we’re  putting  the  cart  before  the 
horse.  Time  ain’t  flying  at  all.  We’re 
flying.  “Time”  is  an  invention  of 
our  civilization.  It  is  relative  to  ac- 
tion, movement,  music,  geology, 
mathematics,  life,  etc.,  etc.  Out  in 
space,  out  in  the  infinite,  there  is  no 
time — as  we  know  it.  Let  the  earth 
change  its  rotation  and  we’d  have 
a heck  of  a “time”  with  our  clocks, 
calendars,  sundials,  egg  cookers,  etc. 
Anyhow,  I suppose  this  thought  was 
suggested  by  a line  I remembered 
from  a swell  movie  I saw  recently. 
The  movie  was  Breaking  Through 
the  Sound  Barrier,  and  the  scene  is 
that  of  the  test  pilot  looking  through 
a telescope,  stationed  in  the  private 
observatory  of  a manufacturer  of  jet 
planes.  After  a while  of  intense 
watching,  he  says  something  to  the 
effect  that  in  those  millions  of  light 
years  out  there,  they  are  living  in 
the  past.  The  manufacturer,  sitting 
nearby,  hears  him  and  looks  up. 
There  is  a dreamy  expression  on  his 
face.  “My  boy,”  he  said,  “out  there 
is  the  past,  the  present,  and  the  fu- 
ture." 

We  make  our  own  time.  So  It  is 
we  who  fly. 


Breaking  Through  the  Sound 
Barrier,  incidentally,  is  a picture 
anyone  interested  in  science,  factual 
or  fictional,  will  enjoy  seeing.  It  has 
all  the  basic  emotions,  plus  some 
new  ones.  I’ve  been  up  in  planes 
doing  over  300  miles  per  hour,  at 
over  20,000  feet,  but  that  was  no- 
where near  the  thrill  of  watching 
this  movie.  The  camera  takes  you 
through  phases  of  man’s  breathless 
quest  for  speed,  it  gives  you  a look- 
in  on  the  development  of  mighty 
engines,  and  it  introduces  you  to  a 
philosophical  equation  of  man,  na- 
ture and  machinery.  And  when  the 
camera  takes  you  inside  a plane 
screaming  through  space  40,000  feet 
up,  hurtling  life  and  machine 
against  the  sound  barrier— well  it’s 
the  next  best  thing  to  actually  being 
up  there.  In  fact,  it’s  better.  Per- 
sonally, you  couldn’t  get  me  up 
there  with  a million  dollar  life  in- 
surance policy.  Watching  it  from  a 
safe,  comfortable  seat  in  a movie 
house  was  enough  for  me. 

INCIDENTALLY,  the  real  fun  of 
flying  seems  to  me  to  be  in  these 
small  personal  jobs.  A friend  of 
mine  has  a small  four-seater  Stin- 
son and  the  time  he  took  me  up  I 
behaved  like  a three-year  old  on 
his  first  ride  on  a merry-go-round. 
Flying  at  90  to  100  miles  per  hour 
at  300  to  1000  feet  gives  you  the 
excitement  of  contrast.  You  follow 
roads,  rivers,  railroad  tracks,  pick 
out  familiar  landmarks;  you  see  life 
below  with  a fascinating  perspective 
which  is  never  possible  in  the  big, 
fast  planes.  Besides,  to  reiterate,  I 
never  am  in  600-miles-per-hour 
worth  of  hurry.  — jlq 

3 


Wilbur  Murphy  sought  romance,  excitement,  and  an  impossi- 
ble Horseman  of  Space.  With  polite  smiles,  the  planet  frus- 
trated him  at  every  turn — until  he  found  them  all  the  hard  way! 


SJAMBAK 

By  Jack  Vance 

Illustrate^  by  VIRGIL  FINLAY 


Howard  FRAYBERG,  Pro- 
duction Director  of  Know  Your 
Universe!,  was  a man  of  sudden  un- 
predictable moods;  and  Sam  Gat- 
lin, the  show’s  Continuity  Editor, 
had  learned  to  expect  the  worst. 

“Sam,”  said  Frayberg,  “regarding 
the  show  last  night.  . .”  He  paused 
to  seek  the  proper  words,  and  Gat- 
lin relaxed.  Frayberg’s  frame  of 
mind  was  merely  critical.  “Sam, 
we’re  in  a rut.  What’s  worse,  the 
show’s  dull!” 

Sam  Gatlin  shrugged,  not  com- 
mitting himself. 

‘‘Seaweed  Processors  of  Alphard 
IX — who  cares  about  seaweed?” 
“It’s  factual  stuff,”  said  Sam,  de- 
fensive but  not  wanting  to  go  too 
far  out  on  a limb.  “We  bring  ’em 
everything — color,  fact,  romance, 
sight,  sound,  smell.  . . . Next  week, 
it’s  the  Ball  Expedition  to  the  Mix- 
tup  Mountains  on  Gropus.” 

Frayberg  leaned  forward.  “Sam, 
we’re  working  the  wrong  slant  on 
this  stuff.  . , . We’ve  got  to  loosen 


up,  sock  ’em!  Shift  our  ground! 
Give  ’em  the  old  human  angle — 
glamor,  mystery,  thrills!” 

Sam  Gatlin  curled  his  lips.  “I  got 
just  what  you  want.” 

“Yeah?  Show  me.” 

Gatlin  reached  into  his  waste 
basket.  “I  filed  this  just  ten  minutes 
ago.  . . .”  He  smoothed  out  the 
pages.  “ ‘Sequence  idea,  by  Wilbur 
Murphy.  Investigate  “Horseman  of 
Space,”  the  man  who  rides  up  to 
meet  incoming  spaceships’.” 

Frayberg  tilted  his  head  to  the 
side.  “Rides  up  on  a horse?” 
“That’s  what  Wilbur  Murphy 
says.” 

“How  far  up?” 

“Does  it  make  any  difference?” 
“Nev — I guess  not.” 

“Well,  for  your  information,  it’s 
up  ten  thousand,  twenty  thousand 
miles.  He  waves  to  the  pilot,  takes 
off  his  hat  to  the  passengers,  then 
rides  back  down.” 

“And  where  does  all  this  take 
place?” 


6 


JACK  VANCE 


“On — on — ” Gatlin  frowned.  “I 
can  write  it,  but  I can’t  pronounce 
it.”  He  printed  on  his  scratch- 
screen:  CIRGAMESg. 

“Sirgamesk,”  read  Frayberg. 
Gatlin  shook  his  head.  “That’s 
what  it  looks  like — but  those  con- 
sonants are  all  aspirated  gutturals. 
It’s  more  like  ‘Hrrghameshgrrh’.” 
“Where  did  Murphy  get  this 
tip?” 

“I  didn’t  bother  to  ask.” 

“Well,”  mused  Frayberg,  “we 
could  always  do  a show  on  strange 
superstitions.  Is  Murphy  around?” 
“He’s  explaining  his  expense  ac- 
count to  Shifkin.” 

“Get  him  in  here;  let’s  talk  to 
him.” 


WILBUR  MURPHY  had  a 
blond  crew-cut,  a broad 
freckled  nose,  and  a serious  side- 
long squint.  He  looked  from  his 
crumpled  sequence  idea  to  Gatlin 
and  Frayberg.  “Didn’t  like  it,  eh?” 
“We  thought  the  emphasis  should 
be  a little  different,”  explained  Gat- 
lin. “Instead  of  ‘The  Space  Horse- 
man,’ we’d  give  it  the  working  title, 
‘Odd  Superstitions  of  Hrrghame- 
shgrrh’.” 

“Oh,  hell!”  said  Frayberg.  “Gall 
it  Sirgamesk.” 

“Anyway,”  said  Gatlin,  “that’s 
the  angle.” 

“But  it’s  not  superstition,”  said 
Murphy. 

“Oh,  come,  Wilbur.  . .” 

“I  got  this  for  sheer  sober-sided 
fact.  A man  rides  a horse  up  to 
meet  the  incoming  ships!” 

“Where  did  you  get  this  wild 
fable?” 

“My  brother-in-law  is  purser 


on  the  Celestial  Traveller.  At  Rik- 
er’s  Planet  they  make  connection 
with  the  feeder  line  out  of  Girga- 
mesg.” 

“Wait  a minute,”  said  Gatlin. 
“How  did  you  pronounce  that?” 
“Girgamesg.  The  steward  on  the 
shuttle-ship  gave  out  this  story,  and 
my  brother-in-law  passed  it  along  to 
me.” 

“Somebody’s  pulling  somebody’s 
leg.” 

“My  brother-in-law  wasn’t,  and 
the  steward  was  cold  sober.” 
“They’ve  been  eating  bhang. 
Sirgamesk  is  a Javanese  planet, 
isn’t  it?” 

“Javanese,  Arab,  Malay.” 

“Then  they  took  a bhang  supply 
with  them,  and  hashish,  chat,  and 
a few  other  sociable  herbs.” 

“Well,  this  horseman  isn’t  any 
drug-dream.” 

“No?  What  is  it?” 

“So  far  as  I know  it’s  a man  on 
a horse.” 

“Ten  thousand  miles  up?  In  a 
vacuum?” 

“Exactly.” 

“No  space-suit?” 

“That’s  the  story.” 

Gatlin  and  Frayberg  looked  at 
each  other. 

“Well,  Wilbur,”  Gatlin  began. 
Frayberg  interrupted.  “What  we 
can  use,  Wilbur,  is  a sequence  on 
Sirgamesk  superstition.  Emphasis 
on  voodoo  or  witchcraft — naked 
girls  dancing — stuff  with  roots  in 
Earth,  but  now  typically  Sirgamesk. 
Lots  of  color.  Secret  rite  stuff.  . .” 
“Not  much  room  on  Girgamesc 
for  secret  rites.” 

“It’s  a big  planet,  isn’t  it?” 

“Not  quite  as  big  as  Mars. 
There’s  no  atmosphere.  The  settlers 


SJAMBAK 

live  in  mountain  valleys,  with  air- 
tight lids  over  ’em.” 

Gatlin  flipped  the  pages  of 
Thumbnail  Sketches  of  the  Inhabit- 
ed Worlds.  “Says  here  there’s 
ancient  ruins  millions  of  years  old. 
When  the  atmosphere  went,  the 
population  went  with  it.” 

Frayberg  became  animated. 
“There’s  lots  of  material  out  there! 
Go  get  it,  Wilbur!  Life!  Sex!  Ex- 
citement! Mystery!” 

“Okay,”  said  Wilbur  Murphy. 
“But  lay  off  this  horseman-in- 
space. There  b a limit  to  public 
credulity,  and  don’t  you  let  any- 
one tell  you  different.” 


CIRGAMESC  hung  outside  the 
port,  twenty  thousand  miles 
ahead.  The  steward  leaned  over 
Wilbur  Murphy’s  shoulder  and 
pointed  a long  brown  finger.  “It 
was  right  out  there,  sir.  He  came 
riding  up — ” 

“What  kind  of  a man  was  it? 
Strange  looking?” 

“No.  He  was  Cirgameski.” 

“Oh.  You  saw  him  with  your 
own  eyes,  eh?” 

The  steward  bowed,  and  his  loose 
white  mantle  fell  forward.  “Exact- 
ly, sir.” 

“No  helmet,  no  space-suit?” 
“He  wore  a short  Singhalut  vest 
and  pantaloons  and  a yellow  Had- 
rasi  hat.  No  more.” 

“And  the  horse?” 

“Ah,  the  horse!  There’s  a dif- 
ferent matter.” 

“Different  how?” 

“I  can’t  describe  the  horse.  I was 
intent  on  the  man.” 

“Did  you  recognize  him?” 

“By  the  brow  of  Lord  Allah,  it’s 


7 

well  not  to  look  too  closely  when 
such  matters  occur.” 

“Then- — you  did  recognize  him!” 

“I  must  .be  at  my  task,  sir.” 

Murphy  frowned  in  vexation  at 
the  steward’s  retreating  back,  then 
bent  over  his  camera  to  check  the 
tape-feed.  If  anything  appeared 
now,  and  his  eyes  could  see  it,  the 
two-hundred  million  audience  of 
Know  Your  Universe!  could  see  it 
with  him. 

When  he  looked  up,  Murphy 
made  a frantic  grab  for  the  stan- 
chion, then  relaxed.  Cirgamesg  had 
taken  the  Great  Twitch.  It  was  an 
illusion,  a psychological  quirk.  One 
instant  the  planet  lay  ahead;  then 
a man  winked  or  turned  away,  and 
when  he  looked  back,  “ahead”  had 
become  “below”;  the  planet  had 
swung  an  astonishing  ninety  degrees 
across  the  sky,  and  they  were  fall- 
ing! 

Murphy  leaned  against  the  stan- 
chion. “ ‘The  Great  Twitch’ ,”  he 
muttered  to  himself,  “I’d  like  to 
get  that  on  two  hundred  million 
screens!” 

Several  hours  passed.  CirgamesQ 
grew.  The  Sampan  Range  rose  up 
like  a dark  scab;  the  valley  sultan- 
ates of  Singhalut,  Hadra,  New 
Batavia,  and  Boeng-Bohot  showed 
like  glistening  chicken- tracks ; the 
Great  Rift  Colony  of  Sundeman 
stretched  down  through  the  foot- 
hills like  the  trail  of  a slug. 

A loudspeaker  voice  rattled  the 
ship.  “Attention  passengers  for 
Singhalut  and  other  points  on  Cir- 
gamesg!  Kindly  prepare  your  lug- 
gage for  disembarkation.  Customs 
at  Singhalut  are  extremely  thor- 
ough. Passengers  are  warned  to  take 


8 


JACK  VANCE 


no  weapons,  drugs  or  explosives 
ashore.  This  is  important!” 


The  warning  turned  out  to 

be  an  understatement.  Murphy 
was  plied  with  questions.  He  suf- 
fered search  of  an  intimate  nature. 
He  was  three-dimensionally  X- 
rayed  with  a range  of  frequencies 
calculated  to  excite  fluorescence  in 
whatever  object  he  might  have 
secreted  in  his  stomach,  in  a hollow 
bone,  or  under  a layer  of  flesh. 

His  luggage  was  explored  with 
similar  minute  attention,  and 
Murphy  rescued  his  cameras  with 
difficulty.  “What’re  you  so  damn 
anxious  about?  I don’t  have  drugs; 
I don’t  have  contraband.  . .” 

“It’s  guns,  your  excellency.  Guns, 
weapons,  explosives.  . .” 

“I  don’t  have  any  guns.” 

“But  these  objects  here?” 
“They’re  cameras.  They  record 
pictures  and  sounds  and  smells.” 
The  inspector  seized  the  cases 
with  a glittering  smile  of  triumph. 
“They  resemble  no  cameras  of  my 
experience;  I fear  I shall  have  to 
impound.  . .” 

A young  man  in  loose  white 
pantaloons,  a pink  vest,  pale  green 
cravat  and  a complex  black  turban 
strolled  up.  The  inspector  made  a 
swift  obeisance,  with  arms  spread 
wide.  “Excellency,” 

The  young  man  raised  two  fin- 
gers. “You  may  find  it  possible  to 
spare  Mr.  Murphy  any  unnecessary 
formality.” 

“As  your  Excellency  recom- 
mends. . .”  The  inspector  nimbly 
repacked  Murphy’s  belongings, 
while  the  young  man  looked  on  be- 
nignly. 


Murphy  covertly  inspected  his 
face.  The  skin  was  smooth,  the  color 
of  the  rising  moon;  the  eyes  were 
narrow,  dark,  superficially  placid. 
The  effect  was  of  silken  punctilio 
with  hot  ruby  blood  close  beneath. 

Satisfied  with  the  inspector’s 
zeal,  he  turned  to  Murphy.  “Allow 
me  to  introduce  myself,  Tuan 
Murphy.  I am  Ali-Tomas,  of  the 
House  of  Singhalut,  and  my  father 
the  Sultan  begs  you  to  accept  our 
poor  hospitality.” 

“Why,  thank  you,”  said  Murphy. 
“This  is  a very  pleasant  surprise.” 
“If  you  will  allow  me  to  conduct 
you. . .”  He  turned  to  the  inspector. 
“Mr.  Murphy’s  luggage  to  the 
palace.” 

Murphy  accompanied  Ali- 
Tomas  into  the  outside  light, 
fitting  his  own  quick  step  to  the 
prince’s  feline  saunter.  This  is  com- 
ing it  pretty  soft,  he  said  to  himself. 
I’ll  have  a magnificent  suite,  with 
bowls  of  fruit  and  gin  pahits,  not 
to  mention  two  or  three  silken  girls 
with  skin  like  rich  cream  bringing 
me  towels  in  the  shower.  . . Well, 
well,  well,  it’s  not  so  bad  working 
for  Know  Your  Universe!  aiter  all! 
I suppose  I ought  to  unlimber  my 
camera.  . . . 

Prince  Ali-Tomas  watched  him 
with  interest.  “And  what  is  the 
audience  of  Know  Your  Uni- 
verse IT’ 

“We  call  ’em  ‘participants’.” 
“Expressive.  And  how  many 
participants  do  you  serve?” 

“Oh,  the  Bowdler  Index  rises  and 
falls.  We’ve  got  about  two  hundred 
million  screens,  with  five  hundred 
million  participants.” 


SJAMBAK 


9 


“Fascinating!  And  tell  me — how 
do  you  record  smells?” 

Murphy  displayed  the  odor  re- 
corder on  the  side  of  the  camera, 
with  its  gelatinous  track  which  fixed 
the  molecular  design. 

“And  the  odors  recreated — they 
are  like  the  originals?” 

“Pretty  close.  Never  exact,  but 
none  of  the  participants  knows  the 
difference.  Sometimes  the  synthetic 
odor  is  an  improvement.” 

“Astounding!”  murmured  the 
prince. 

“And  sometimes.  . . Well,  Carson 
Tenlake  went  out  to  get  the  myrrh- 
blossoms  on  Venus.  It  was  a hot 
day — as  days  usually  are  on  Venus 
— and  a long  climb.  When  the  show 
was  run  off,  there  was  more  smell 
of  Carson  than  of  flowers.” 

Prince  Ali-Tomas  laughed  polite- 
ly. “We  turn  through  here.” 

They  came  out  into  a compound 
paved  with  red,  green  and  white 
tiles.  Beneath  the  valley  roof  was  a 
sinuous  trough,  full  of  haze  and 
warmth  and  golden  light.  As  far  in 
either  direction  as  the  eye  could 
reach,  the  hillsides  were  terraced, 
barred  in  various  shades  of  green. 
Spattering  the  valley  floor  were  tall 
canvas  pavilions,  tents,  booths,  shel- 
ters. 

“Naturally,”  said  Prince  Ali- 
Tomas,  “we  hope  that  you  and  your 
participants  will  enjoy  Singhalut. 
It  is  a truism  that,  in  order  to  im- 
port, we  must  export;  we  wish  to 
encourage  a pleasurable  response 
to  the  ‘Made  in  Singhalut’  tag  on 
our  batiks,  carvings,  lacquers.” 
They  rolled  quietly  across  the 
square  in  a surface-car  displaying 
the  House  emblem.  Murphy  rested 
against  deep,  cool  cushions.  “Your 


inspectors  are  pretty  careful  about 
weapons.” 

Ali-Tomas  smiled  complacently. 
“Our  existence  is  ordered  and 
peaceful.  You  may  be  familiar  with 
the  concept  of  adak?” 

“I  don’t  think  so.” 

“A  word,  an  idea  from  old  Earth. 
Every  living  act  is  ordered  by  ritu- 
al. But  our  heritage  is  passionate — 
and  when  unyielding  adak  stands 
in  the  way  of  an  irresistible  emo- 
tion, there  is  turbulence,  sometimes 
even  killing.” 

“An  amok.” 

“Exactly.  It  is  as  well  that  the 
amok  has  no  weapons  other  than 
his  knife.  Otherwise  he  would  kill 
twenty  where  now  he  kills  one.” 
The  car  rolled  along  a narrow 
avenue,  scattering  pedestrians  to 
either  side  like  the  bow  of  a boat 
spreading  foam.  The  men  wore 
loose  white  pantaloons  and  a short 
open  vest;  the  women  wore  only 
the  pantaloons. 

“Handsome  set  of  people,”  re- 
marked Murphy. 

Ali-Tomas  again  smiled  compla- 
cently. “I’m  sure  Singhalut  will 
present  an  inspiring  and  beautiful 
spectacle  for  your  program.” 
Murphy  remembered  the  keynote 
to  Howard  Frayberg’s  instructions: 
“Excitement!  Sex!  Mystery!”  Fray- 
berg  cared  little  for  inspiration  or 
beauty.  “I  imagine,”  he  said  casual- 
ly, “that  you  celebrate  a number  of 
interesting  festivals?  Colorful  danc- 
ing? Unique  customs?” 

Ali-Tomas  shook  his  head.  “To 
the  contrary.  We  left  our  super- 
stitions and  ancestor-worship  back 
on  Earth.  We  are  quiet  Moham- 
medans and  indulge  in  very  little 
festivity.  Perhaps  here  is  the  reason 


10 


JACK  VANCE 


for  amoks  and  sjambaks.’^ 

“Sjambaks?” 

“We  are  not  proud  of  them.  You 
will  hear  sly  rumor,  and  it  is  better 
that  I arm  you  beforehand  with 
truth.” 

“What  is  a sjambak?” 

“They  are  bandits,  flouters  of 
authority.  I will  show  you  one  pres- 
cntly.” 

“I  heard,”  said  Murphy,  "of  a 
man  riding  a horse  up  to  meet  the 
spaceships.  What  would  account 
for  a story  like  that?” 

“It  can  have  no  possible  basis,” 
said  Prince  Ali-Tomas.  “We  have 
no  horses  on  Cirgames^.  None 
whatever.” 

“But.  . .” 

“The  veriest  idle  talk.  Such  non- 
sense will  have  no  interest  for  your 
intelligent  participants.” 

The  car  rolled  into  a square  a 
hundreds  yards  on  a side,  lined 
with  luxuriant  banana  palms.  Op- 
posite was  an  enormous  pavilion  of 
gold  and  violet  silk,  with  a dozen 
peaked  gables  casting  various 
changing  sheens.  In  the  center  of 
the  square  a twenty-foot  pole  sup- 
ported a cage  about  two  feet  wide, 
three  feet  long,  and  four  feet  high. 

Inside  this  cage  crouched  a naked 
man. 

The  car  rolled  past.  Prince  Ali- 
Tomas  waved  an  idle  hand.  The 
caged  man  glared  down  from 
bloodshot  eyes.  “That,”  said  Ali- 
Tomas,  “is  a sjambak.  As  you  see,” 
a faint  note  of  apology  entered  his 
voice,  “we  attempt  to  discourage 
them.” 

“What’s  that  metal  object  on  his 
chest?” 

“The  mark  of  his  trade.  By  that 
you  may  know  all  sjambak.  In 


these  unsettled  times  only  we  of  the 
House  may  cover  our  chests — all 
others  must  show  themselves  and 
declare  themselves  true  Singhalusi.” 
Murphy  said  tentatively,  “I  must 
come  back  here  and  photograph 
that  cage.” 

Ali-Tomas  smilingly  shook  his 
head.  “I  will  show  you  our  farms, 
our  vines  and  orchards.  Your  par- 
ticipants will  enjoy  these;  they  have 
no  interest  in  the  dolor  of  an  ig- 
noble sjambak.” 

“Well,”  said  Murphy,  “our  aim 
is  a well-rounded  production.  We 
want  to  show  the  farmers  at  work, 
the  members  of  the  great  House  at 
their  responsibilities,  as  well  as  the 
deserved  fate  of  wrongdoers.” 
“Exactly.  For  every  sjambak 
there  are  ten  thousand  industrious 
Singhalusi.  It  follows  then  that  only 
one  ten-thousandth  part  of  your 
film  should  be  devoted  to  this  in- 
famous minority.” 

“About  three-tenths  of  a second, 
eh?” 

“No  more  than  they  deserve.” 
“You  don’t  know  my  Production 
Director.  His  name  is  Howard 
Frayberg,  and.  . 

Howard  frayberg  was 

deep  in  conference  with  Sam 
Gatlin,  under  the  influence  of  what 
Gatlin  called  his  philosophic  kick. 
It  was  the  phase  which  Gatlin 
feared  most. 

“Sam,”  said  Frayberg,  “do  you 
know  the  danger  of  this  business?” 
“Ulcers,”  Gatlin  replied  prompt- 

Jy- 

Frayberg  shook  his  head.  “We’ve 
got  an  occupational  disease  to  fight 
— progressive  mental  myopia.” 


SJAMBAK 


11 


“Speak  for  yourself,”  said  Gatlin. 
“Consider.  We  sit  in  this  office. 
We  think  we  know  what  kind  of 
show  we  want.  We  send  out  our 
staff  to  get  it.  We’re  signing  the 
checks,  so  back  it  comes  the  way 
we  asked  for  it.  We  look  at  it,  hear 
it,  smell  it — and  pretty  soon  we  be- 
lieve it ; our  version  of  the  universe, 
full-blown  from  our  brains  like 
Minerva  stepping  out  of  Zeus.  You 
see  what  I mean?” 

“I  understand  the  words.” 
“We’ve  got  our  own  picture  of 
what’s  going  on.  We  ask  for  it,  we 
get  it.  It  builds  up  and  up — and 
finally  we’re  like  mice  in  a trap 
built  of  our  own  ideas.  We  canni- 
balize our  own  brains.” 

“Nobody’ll  ever  accuse  you  of  be- 
ing stingy  with  a metaphor.” 
“Sam,  let’s  have  the  truth.  How 
many  times  have  you  been  off 
Earth?” 

“I  went  to  Mars  once.  And  I 
spent  a couple  of  weeks  at  Aristil- 
lus  Resort  on  the  Moon.” 

Frayberg  leaned  back  in  his  chair 
as  if  shocked.  “And  we’re  supposed 
to  be  a couple  of  learned  planet- 
ologists !” 

Gatlin  made  grumbling  noise  in 
his  throat.  “I  haven’t  been  around 
the  zodiac,  so  what?  You  sneezed 
a few  minutes  ago  and  I said 
gesundheit,  but  I don’t  have  any 
doctor’s  degree.” 

“There  comes  a time  in  a man’s 
life,”  said  Frayberg,  “when  he  wants 
to  take  stock,  get  a new  perspec- 
tive.” 

“Relax,  Howard,  relax.” 

“In  our  case  it  means  taking  out 
our  preconceived  ideas,  looking  at 
them,  checking  our  illusions  against 
reality.” 


“Are  you  serious  about  this?” 
“Another  thing,”  said  Frayberg, 
“I  want  to  check  up  a little,  ffiaif- 
kin  says  the  expense  accounts  are 
frightful.  But  he  can’t  fight  it. 
When  Keeler  says  he  paid  ten 
munits  for  a loaf  of  bread  on  Nek- 
kar  IV,  who’s  gonna  call  him  on 
it?” 

“Hell,  let  him  eat  bread!  That’s 
cheaper  than  making  a safari 
around  the  cluster,  spot-checking 
the  super-markets.” 

Frayberg  paid  no  heed.  He 
touched  a button;  a three  foot 
.sphere  full  of  glistening  motes  ap- 
peared. Earth  was  at  the  center, 
with  thin  red  lines,  the  scheduled 
space-ship  routes,  radiating  out  in 
all  directions. 

“Let’s  see  what  kind  of  circle 
we  can  make,”  said  Frayberg. 
“Gower’s  here  at  Canopus,  Keeler’s 
over  here  at  Blue  Moon,  Wilbur 
Murphy’s  at  Sirgamesk.  . .” 

“Don’t  forget,”  muttered  Gat- 
lin, “we  got  a show  to  put  on.” 
“We’ve  got  material  for  a year,” 
scoffed  Frayberg.  “Get  hold  of 
Space-Lines.  We’ll  start  with  Sir- 
gamesk, and  see  what  Wilbur 
Murphy’s  up  to.” 


WILBUR  MURPHY  was  be- 
ing presented  to  the  Sultan  of 
Singhalut  by  the  Prince  Ali-Tomas. 
The  Sultan,  a small  mild  man  of 
seventy,  sat  crosslegged  on  an  enor- 
mous pink  and  green  air-cushion. 
“Be  at  your  ease,  Mr.  Murphy.  We 
dispense  with  as  much  protocol  here 
as  practicable.”  The  Sultan  had  a 
dry  clipped  voice  and  the  air  of  a 
rather  harassed  corporation  execu- 
tive. “I  understand  you  represent 


12 


JACK  VANCE 


Earth-Central  Home  Screen  Net- 
work?” 

“I’m  a staff  photographer  for  the 
Know  Your  Universe!  show.” 

“We  export  a great  deal  to 
Earth,”  mused  the  Sultan,  “but  not 
as  much  as  we’d  like.  We’re  very 
pleased  with  your  interest  in  us, 
and  naturally  we  want  to  help  you 
in  every  way  possible.  Tomorrow 
the  Keeper  of  the  Archives  will 
present  a series  of  charts  analyzing 
our  economy.  Ali-Tom^s  shall  per- 
sonally conduct  you  through  the 
fish-hatcheries.  We  want  you  to 
know  we’re  doing  a great  job  out 
here  on  Singhalut.” 

“I’m  sure  you  are,”  said  Murphy 
uncomfortably.  “However,  that 
isn’t  quite  the  stuff  I want.” 

“No?  Just  where  do  your  desires 
lie?”_ 

Ali-Tomas  said  delicately.  “Mr. 
Murphy  took  a rather  profound  in- 
terest in  the  sjambak  displayed  in 
the  square.” 

“Oh.  And  you  explained  that 
these  renegades  could  hold  no  in- 
terest for  serious  students  of  our 
planet?” 

Murphy  started  to  explain  that 
clustered  around  two  hundred  mil- 
lion screens  tuned  to  Know  Your 
Universe!  were  four  or  five  hun- 
dred million  participants,  the 
greater  part  of  them  neither  serious 
nor  students.  The  Sultan  cut  in 
decisively.  “I  will  now  impart  some- 
thing truly  interesting.  We  Sing- 
halusi  are  making  preparations  to 
reclaim  four  more  valleys,  with  an 
added  area  of  six  hundred  thou- 
sand acres!  I shall  put  my  physio- 
graphic models  at  your  disposal; 
you  may  use  them  to  the  fullest  ex- 
tent!” 


“I’ll  be  pleased  for  the  oppor- 
tunity,” declared  Murphy.  “But  to- 
morrow I’d  like  to  prowl  around 
the  valley,  meet  your  people,  ob- 
serve their  customs,  religious  rites, 
courtships,  funerals.  . .” 

The  Sultan  pulled  a sour  face. 
“We  are  ditch-water  dull.  Festivals 
are  celebrated  quietly  in  the  home; 
there  is  small  religious  fervor; 
courtships  are  consummated  by 
family  contract.  I fear  you  will  find 
little  sensational  material  here  in 
Singhalut.” 

“You  have  no  temple  dances?” 
asked  Murphy.  “No  fire-walkers, 
snake-charmers — voodoo?” 

The  Sultan  smiled  patronizingly. 
“We  came  out  here  to  Cirgamesg  to 
escape  the  ancient  superstitions. 
Our  lives  are  calm,  orderly.  Even 
the  amoks  have  practically  disap- 
peared. 

“But  the  sjambaks — ” 

“Negligible.” 

“Well,”  said  Murphy,  “I’d  like 
to  visit  some  of  these  ancient 
cities.” 

“I  advise  against  it,”  declared 
the  Sultan.  “They  are  shards, 
weathered  stone.  There  are  no  in- 
scriptions, no  art.  There  is  no  stim- 
ulation in  dead  stone.  Now.  To- 
morrow I will  hear  a report  on  hy- 
brid soybean  plantings  in  the  Up- 
per Kam  District.  You  will  want  to 
be  present.” 


MURPHY’S  SUITE  matched 
or  even  excelled  his  expecta- 
tion. He  had  four  rooms  and  a pri- 
vate garden  enclosed  by  a thicket 
of  bamboo.  His  bathroom  walls 
were  slabs  of  glossy  actinolite,  in- 
laid with  cinnabar,  jade,  galena. 


SJAMBAK 


13 


pyrite  and  blue  malachite,  in  rep- 
resentations of  fantastic  birds.  His 
bedroom  was  a tent  thirty  feet  high. 
Two  walls  were  dark  green  fabric; 
a third  was  golden  rust;  the  fourth 
opened  upon  the  private  garden. 

Murphy’s  bed  was  a pink  and 
yellow  creation  ten  feet  square,  soft 
as  cobweb,  smelling  of  rose  sandal- 
wood. Carved  black  lacquer  tubs 
held  fruit;  two  dozen  wines,  liq- 
uors, syrups,  essences  flowed  at  a 
touch  from  as  many  ebony  spigots. 

The  garden  centered  on  a pool  of 
cool  water,  very  pleasant  in  the 
hothouse  climate  of  Singhalut.  The 
only  shortcoming  was  the  lack  of 
the  lovely  young  servitors  Murphy 
had  envisioned.  He  took  it  upon 
himself  to  repair  this  lack,  and  in  a 
shady  wine-house  behind  the  pal- 
ace, called  the  Barangipan,  he 
made  the  acquaintance  of  a girl- 
musician  named  Soek  Panjoebang. 
He  found  her  enticing  tones  of 
quavering  sweetness  from  the 
gamelan,  an  instrument  well-loved 
in  Old  Bali.  Soek  Panjoebang  had 
the  delicate  features  and  transpar- 
ent skin  of  Sumatra,  the  supple 
long  limbs  of  Arabia  and  in  a pair 
of  wide  and  golden  eyes  a heritage 
from  somewhere  in  Celtic  Europe. 
Murphy  bought  her  a goblet  of 
frozen  shavings,  each  a different 
perfume,  while  he  himself  drank 
white  rice-beer.  Soek  Panjoebang 
displayed  an  intense  interest  in  the 
ways  of  Earth,  and  Murphy  found 
it  hard  to  guide  the  conversation. 
“Weelbrrr,”  she  said.  “Such  a fun- 
ny name,  Weelbrrr.  Do  you  think 
I could  play  the  gamelan  in  the 
great  cities,  the  great  palaces  of 
Earth?” 


“Sure.  There’s  no  law  against 
gamelans.” 

“You  talk  so  funny,  Weelbrrr.  I 
like  to  hear  you  talk.” 

“I  suppose  you  get  kinda  bored 
here  in  Singhalut?” 

She  shrugged.  “Life  is  plea.sant, 
but  it  concerns  with  little  things. 
We  have  no  great  adventures.  We 
grow  flowers,  we  play  the  game- 
lan.” She  eyed  him  archly  sidelong. 
“We  love.  . . . We  sleep.  . . .” 
Murphy  grinned.  “You  run 
amok.” 

“No,  no,  no.  That  is  no  more.” 
“Not  since  the  sjambaks,  eh?” 
“The  sjambaks  are  bad.  But  bet- 
ter than  amok.  When  a man  feels 
the  knot  forming  around  his  chest, 
he  no  longer  takes  his  kris  and  runs 
down  the  street — he  becomes  sjam- 
bak.” 

This  was  getting  interesting. 
“Where  does  he  go?  What  does  he 
do?” 

“He  robs.” 

“Who  does  he  rob?  What  does 
he  do  with  his  loot?” 

She  leaned  toward  him.  “It  is 
not  well  to  talk  of  them.” 

“Why  not?” 

“The  Sultan  does  not  wish  it.. 
Everywhere  are  listeners.  When 
one  talks  sjambak,  the  Sultan’s 
ears  rise,  like  the  points  on  a cat.” 
“Suppose  they  do — what’s  the 
difference?  I’ve  got  a legitimate  in- 
terest. I saw  one  of  them  in  that 
cage  out  there.  That’s  torture.  I 
want  to  know  about  it.” 

“He  is  very  bad.  He  opened  the 
monorail  car  and  the  air  rushed 
out.  Forty-two  Singhalusi  and 
Hadrasi  bloated  and  blew  up.” 
“And  what  happened  to  the 
sjambak?” 


14 


JACK  VANCE 


“He  took  all  the  gold  and  money 
and  jewels  and  ran  away.” 

“Ran  where?” 

“Out  across  Great  Pharasang 
Plain.  But  he  was  a fool.  He  came 
back  to  Singhalut  for  his  wife;  he 
was  caught  and  set  up  for  all  peo- 
ple to  look  at,  so  they  might  tell 
each  other,  ‘thus  it  is  for  sjam- 
baks.’  ” 

“Where  do  the  sjambaks  hide 
out?” 

“Oh,”  she  looked  vaguely  around 
the  room,  “out  on  the  plains.  In 
the  mountains.” 

“They  must  have  some  shelter — 
an  air-dome.” 

“No.  The  Sultan  would  send  out 
his  patrol-boat  and  destroy  them. 
They  roam  quietly.  They  hide 
among  the  rocks  and  tend  their 
oxygen  stills.  Sometimes  they  visit 
the  old  cities.” 

“I  wonder,”  said  Murphy,  star- 
ing into  his  beer,  “could  it  be  sjam- 
baks who  ride  horses  up  to  meet  the 
spaceship?” 

Soek  Panjoebang  knit  her  black 
eyebrows,  as  if  preoccupied. 

“That’s  what  brought  me  out 
here,”  Murphy  went  on.  “This 
story  of  a man  riding  a horse  out 
in  space.” 

“Ridiculous;  we  have  no  horses 
in  Cirgamesg.” 

“All  right,  the  steward  won’t 
swear  to  the  horse.  Suppose  the 
man  was  up  there  on  foot  or  rid- 
ing a bicycle.  But  the  steward  recog- 
nized the  man.” 

“Who  was  this  man,  pray?” 

“The  steward  clammed  up.  . . 
The  name  would  have  been  just 
noise  to  me,  anyway.” 

“I  might  recognize  the  name.  . 

“Ask  him  yourself.  The  ship’s 


still  out  at  the  field.” 

She  shook  her  head  slowly,  hold- 
ing her  golden  eyes  on  his  face.  “I 
do  not  care  to  attract  the  attention 
of  either  steward,  sjambak — or  Sul- 
tan.” 

Murphy  said  impatiently.  “In 
any  event,  it’s  not  who — but  how. 
How  does  the  man  breathe?  Vac- 
uum sucks  a man’s  lungs  up  out  of 
his  mouth,  bursts  his  stomach,  his 
ears.  . .” 

“We  have  excellent  doctors,” 
said  Soek  Panjoebang  shuddering, 
“but  alas!  I am  not  one  of  them.” 


Murphy  looked  at  her 

sharply.  Her  voice  held  the 
plangent  sweetness  of  her  instru- 
ment, with  additional  overtones  of 
mockery.  “There  must  be  some  kind 
of  invisible  dome  around  him,  hold- 
ing in  air,”  said  Murphy. 

“And  what  if  there  is?” 

“It’s  something  new,  and  if  it  is, 
I want  to  find  out  about  it.” 

Soek  smiled  languidly.  “You  are 
so  typical  an  old-lander — worried, 
frowning,  dynamic.  You  should  re- 
lax, cultivate  napau,  enjoy  life  as 
we  do  here  in  Singhalut.” 

“What’s  napau?” 

“It’s  our  philosophy,  where  we 
find  meaning  and  life  and  beauty 
in  every  aspect  of  the  world.” 
“That  sjambak  in  the  cage 
could  do  with  a little  less  napau 
right  now.” 

“No  doubt  he  is  unhappy,”  she 
agreed. 

“Unhappy!  He’s  being  tor- 
tured!” 

“He  broke  the  Sultan’s  law.  His 
life  is  no  longer  his  own.  It  belongs 
to  Singhalut.  If  the  Sultan  wishes 


SJAMBAK 


15 


to  use  it  to  warn  other  wrong- 
doers, the  fact  that  the  man  suffers 
is  of  small  interest.” 

“If  they  all  wear  that  metal  or- 
nament, how  can  they  hope  to  hide 
out?”  He  glanced  at  her  own  bare 
bosom. 

“They  appear  by  night — slip 
through  the  streets  like  ghosts.  . 
She  looked  in  turn  at  Murphy’s 
loose  shirt.  “You  will  notice  per- 
sons brushing  up  against  you,  feel- 
ing you,”  she  laid  her  hand  along 
his  breast,  “and  when  this  happens 
you  will  know  they  are  agents  of  the 
Sultan,  because  only  strangers  and 
the  House  may  wear  shirts.  But 
now,  let  me  sing  to  you — a song 
from  the  Old  Land,  old  Java.  You 
will  not  understand  the  tongue,  but 
no  other  words  so  join  the  voice  of 
the  gamelan,” 


//THIS  IS  the  gravy-train,”  said 
■ Murphy.  “Instead  of  a .gar- 
den suite  with  a private  pool,  I 
usually  sleep  in  a bubble-tent,  with 
nothing  to  eat  but  condensed  food.” 
Soek  Panjoebang  flung  the  water 
out  of  her  sleek  black  hair.  “Per- 
haps, Weelbrrr,  you  will  regret  leav- 
ing Cirgames^?” 

“Well,”  he  looked  up  to  the  trans- 
parent roof,  barely  visible  where  the 
sunlight  collected  and  refracted,  “I 
don’t  particularly  like  being  shut  up 
like  a bird  in  an  aviary.  . . . Mildly 
claustrophobic,  I guess.” 

After  breakfast,  drinking  thick 
coffee  from  tiny  silver  cups,  Murphy 
looked  long  and  reflectively  at  Soek 
Panjoebang. 

“What  are  you  thinking,  Weel- 
brrr?” 

Murphy  drained  his  coffee.  “I’m 


thinking  that  I’d  better  be  getting 
to  work.” 

“And  what  do  you  do?” 

“First  I’m  going  to  shoot  the  pal- 
ace, and  you  sitting  here  in  the  gar- 
den playing  your  gamelan.” 

“But  Weelbrrr — not  me!” 
“You’re  a part  of  the  universe, 
rather  an  interesting  part.  Then  I’ll 
take  the  square.  . . .” 

“And  the  sjambak?” 

A quiet  voice  spoke  from  behind. 
“A  visitor,  Tuan  Murphy.” 

Murphy  turned  his  head.  “Bring 
him  in.”  He  looked  back  to  Soek 
Panjoebang.  She  was  on  her  feet. 
“It  is  necessary  that  I go.” 
“When  will  I see  you?” 

“Tonight — at  the  Barangipan.” 


HE  QUIET  VOICE  said,  “Mr. 
Rube  Trimmer,  Tuan.” 
Trimmer  was  small  and  middle- 
aged,  with  thin  shoulders  and  a 
paunch.  He  carried  himself  with  a 
hell-raising  swagger,  left  over  from 
a time  twenty  years  gone.  His  skin 
had  the  waxy  look  of  lost  floridity, 
his  tuft  of  white  hair  was  coarse 
and  thin,  his  eyelids  hung  in  the 
off-side  droop  that  amateur  physi- 
ognomists like  to  associate  with 
guile. 

“I’m  Resident  Director  of  the 
Import-Export  Bank,”  said  Trim- 
mer. “Heard  you  were  here  and 
thought  I’d  pay  my  respects.” 

“I  suppose  you  don’t  see  many 
strangers.” 

“Not  too  many— there’s  nothing 
much  to  bring  ’em.  CirgamesQ  isn’t 
a comfortable  tourist  planet.  Too 
confined,  shut  in.  A man  with  a 
sensitive  psyche  goes  nuts  pretty 
easy  here.” 


16 


4 


JACK  VANCE 


“Yeah/’  said  Murphy.  “I  was 
thinking  the  same  thing  this  naorn- 
ing.  That  dome  begins  to  give  a 
man  the  willies.  How  do  the  natives 

stand  it?  Or  do  they?” 

Trimmer  pulled  out  a cigar  case, 
Murphy  refused  the  offer. 

“Local  tobacco,”  ^aid  Trimmer. 
“Very  good.”  He  lit  up  thoughtful- 
ly. “Well,  you  might  say  that  the 
Cirgamcski  are  schizophrenic. 
They’ve  got  the  docile  Javanese 
blood,  plus  the  Arabian  elan.  The 
Javanese  part  is  on  top,  but  every 
once  in  a while  you  see  a flash  of 
arrogance.  . . . You  never  know. 
I’ve  been  out  here  nine  years  and 
Fm  still  a stranger.”  He  puffed  on 
his  cigar,  studied  Murphy  with  his 
careful  eves.  “You  work  for  Know 
Your  Universe! y I hear,” 

“Yeah.  I’m  one  of  the  leg  men,” 
“Must  be  a great  job.” 

“A  man  sees  a lot  of  the  galaxy, 
and  he  runs  into  queer  talcs,  like 
this  sjambak  stuff.” 

Trimmer  nodded  without  sur- 
prise. “My  advice  to  you,  Murphy, 
is  lay  off  the  sjambaks.  They’re  not 
healthy  around  here.” 

Murphy  was  startled  by  the 
bluntness.  “What’s  the  big  mystery 
about  these  sjambaks?” 

Trimmer  looked  around  the 
room.  “This  place  is  bugged.” 

“I  found  two  pick-ups  and 
plugged  ’em,”  said  Murphy. 

Trimmer  laughed.  “Those  were 
just  plants.  They  hide  ’em  ^vhere  a 
man  might  just  barely  spot  ’em. 
You  can’t  catch  the  real  ones. 


They’re  woven  into  the  cloth — 
pres  sure-  sensi  tive  wires .’  ’ 

Murphy  looked  critically  at  the 
cloth  walls. 


“Don’t  let  it  worry  you,”  said 


Trimmer.  “They  listen  more  out  of 
habit  than  anything  else.  If  you’re 
fussy  we’ll  go  for  a walk.” 

The  road  led  past  the  palace  into 
the  country.  Murphy  and  Trimmer 
sauntered  along  a placid  river,  over- 
grown with  lily  pads,  swarming 
with  large  wLite  ducks. 

“This  sjambak  business,”  said 
Murphy.  “Everybody  talks  around 
it.  You  can’t  pin  anybody  down.” 
“Including  me,”  said  Trimmer. 
“I’m  more  or  less  privileged  around 
here.  The  Sultan  finances  his  recla- 
mation through  the  bank,  on  the 
basis  of  my  reports.  But  there’s 
more  to  Sinahalut  than  the  Sultan.” 
“Namely?” 

Trimmer  w'aved  his  cigar  w^ag- 
gishly.  “Now  w-e’re  getting  in  where 
I don’t  like  to  talk.  I’ll  give  you  a 
hint.  Prince  Ali  thinks  roofing-in 
more  valleys  is  a waste  of  money, 
when  there’s  Hadras  and  New  Ba- 
tavia and  Sundaman  so  close,” 
“You  mean — armed  conquest?” 
Trimmer  laughed.  “You  said  it, 
not  me.” 

“They  can’t  carry  on  much  of  a 
war — unless  the  soldiers  commute 
bv  monorail.” 

j 

“Maybe  Prince  Ali  thinks  he’s 
got  the  answer.” 

“Sjambaks?” 

“I  didn’t  say  it,”  said  Trimmer 
blandly. 

Murphy  grinned.  After  a mo- 
ment he  said,  “I  picked  up  with  a 
girl  named  Soek  Panjoebang  who 
plays  the  gamelan.  I suppose  she’s 
working  for  cither  the  Sultan  or 

V J 

Pl'ince  Ali.  Do  you  know  wliich?” 
Tiimmer’s  eyes  sparkled.  He 
shook  his  head.  “Might  be  either 
one.  There’s  a w'ay  to  find  out.” 
“Yeah?” 


SJAMBAK 


17 


‘'Get  her  off  where  you’re  sure 
there’s  no  spy-cells.  Tell  her  two 
things — one  for  Ali,  the  other  for 
the  Sultan.  Whichever  one  reacts 
you  know  you’ve  got  her  tagged.” 
"For  instance?” 

"Well,  for  instance  she  learns  that 
you  can  rig  up  a hypnotic  ray  from 
a flash-light  battery,  a piece  of 
bamboo,  and  a few-  lengths  of  wire. 
That’ll  get  Ali  in  an  awful  sweat. 
He  can’t  get  weapons.  None  at  all. 
And  for  the  Sultan,”  Trimmer  was 
warming  up  to  his  intrigue,  chew- 
ing on  his  cigar  with  gusto,  "tell  her 
you’re  on  to  a catalyst  that  turns 
clay  into  aluminum  and  oxygen  in 
the  presence  of  sunlight.  The  Sul- 
tan would  sell  liis  right  leg  for 
something  like  that.  He  tries  hard 
for  Singhalut  and  Cirgamesc.” 
"And  Ali?” 

Trimmer  hesitated.  "I  never  said 
what  I’m  gonna  say.  Don’t  forget — 
I never  said  it.” 

"Okay,  you  never  said  it.” 

"Ever  hear  of  a jehad 
"Mohammedan  holy  wars.” 
"Believe  it  or  not,  Ali  wants  a 

jehad” 

"Sounds  kinda  fantastic.” 

"Sure  it’s  fantastic.  Don’t  forget, 
I never  said  anything  about  it.  But 

V 

suppose  someone — strictly  unoffi- 
cial, of  course — let  the  idea  perco- 
late around  the  Peace  Office  back 
home,” 

"Ah,”  said  Murphy.  "That’s  why 
you  came  to  see  me.” 

"TRIMMER  TURNED  a look  of 

® injured  innocence,  "No^y,  Mur- 
phy, you’re  a little  unfair.  I’m  a 
friendly  guy.  Of  course  I don’t  like 
to  see  the  bank  lose  what  we’ve  got 


tied  up  in  the  Sultan.” 

"Why  don’t  you  send  in  a report 
yourself?” 

"I  have!  But  when  they  hear  the 
same  thing  from  you,  a Kiioiv  Your 
Universe!  man,  they  might  make  a 
move.” 

Murphy  nodded. 

"Well,  we  understand  each 
other,”  said  Trimmer  heartily, 
“and  everything’s  clear.” 

“Not  entirely.  How’s  AH  going  to 
launch  a jehad  when  he  doesn’t 
have  any  weapons,  no  warships,  no 
supplies?” 

"Now,”  said  Trimmer,  "we’re 
getting  into  the  realm  of  supposi- 
tion.” He  paused,  looked  behind 
him.  A farmer  pushing  a rotary 
tiller,  bowed  politely,  trundled 
ahe^d.  Behind  was  a voung  man  in 
a black  turban,  gold  earrings,  a 
black  and  red  vest,  white  panta- 
loon.s,  black  curl-toed  slippers.  He 
bowed,  started  past.  Trimmer  held 
up  his  hand.  "Don’t  waste  your 
time  up  there  : we’re  going  back  in 
a few  minutes.” 

"Thank  you,  Tuan.” 

"Who  are  you  reporting  to?  The 
Sultan  or  Prince  Ali?” 

"The  Tuan  is  sure  to  pierce  the 
veil  of  my  evasions.  I shall  not  dis- 

•p 

semble.  I am  the  Sultan’s  mam” 
Trimmer  nodded.  "Now.  if  you’ll 
kindly  remove  to  about  a hundred 
yards,  where  your  whisper  pick-up 
won’t  work.” 

“By  your  leave,  I go.”  He  re- 
treated without  haste. 

"He’s  almost  certainly  working 
for  Ali,”  said  Trimmer, 

"Not  a very  subtle  lie.” 

"Oh  yes — third  level.  He  figured 
I’d  take  it  second  level,” 

“How’s  that  again?” 


18 


JACK  VANCE 


“Naturally  I wouldn’t  believe 
him.  He  knew  I knew  that  he  knew 
it.  So  when  he  said  ‘Sultan’,  I’d 
think  he  wouldn’t  lie  simply,  but 
that  he’d  lie  double — that  he  ac- 
tually was  working  for  the  Sultan.” 
Murphy  laughed.  “Suppose  he 
told  you  a fourth  level  lie?” 

“It  starts  to  be  a toss-up  pretty 
soon,”  Trimmer  admitted.  “I  don’t 
think  he  gives  me  credit  for  that 
much  subtlety.  . . What  are  you 
doing  the  rest  of  the  day?” 

“Taking  footage.  Do  you  know 
where  I can  find  some  picturesque 
rites?  Mystical  dances,  human  sacri- 
fice? I’ve  got  to  work  up  some 
glamor  and  exotic  lore.” 

“There’s  this  sjambak  in  the 
cage.  That’s  about  as  close  to  the 
medieval  as  you’ll  find  anywhere  in 
Earth  Commonwealth.” 

“Speaking  of  sjambaks.  . .” 

“No  time,”  said  Trimmer.  “Got 
to  get  back.  Drop  in  at  my  office — 
right  down  the  square  from  the 
palace.” 


URPHY  RETURNED  to  his 
suite.  The  shadowy  figure  of 
his  room  servant  said,  “His  High- 
ness the  Sultan  desires  the  Tuan’s 
attendance  in  the  Cascade  Gar- 
den.” 

“Thank  you,”  said  Murphy.  “As 
soon  as  I load  my  camera.” 

The  Cascade  Room  was  an  ppen 
patio  in  front  of  an  artificial  water- 
fall. The  Sultan  was  pacing  back 
and  forth,  wearing  dusty  khaki  put- 
tees, brown  plastic  boots,  a yellow 
polo  shirt.  He  carried  a twig  which 
he  used  as  a riding  crop,  slapping 
his  boots  as  he  walked.  He  turned 
his  head  as  Murphy  appeared, 


pointed  his  twig  at  a wicker  bench. 

“I  pray  you  sit  down,  Mr.  Mur- 
phy.” He  paced  once  up  and  back. 
“How  is  your  suite?  You  find  it  to 
your  liking?” 

“Very  much  so.” 

“Excellent,”  said  the  Sultan. 
“You  do  me  honor  with  your  pres- 
ence.” 

Murphy  waited  patiently. 

“I  understand  that  you  had  a 
visitor  this  morning,”  said  the  Sul- 
tan. 

“Yes.  Mr.  Trimmer.” 

“May  I inquire  the  nature  of  the 
conversation?” 

“It  was  of  a personal  nature,” 
said  Murphy,  rather  more  shortly 
than  he  meant. 

The  Sultan  nodded  wistfully.  “A 
Singhalusi  would  have  wasted  an 
hour  telling  me  half-truths — dis- 
torted enough  to  confuse,  but  not 
sufficiently  inaccurate  to  anger  me 
if  I had  a spy-cell  on  him  all  the 
time.” 

Murphy  grinned.  “A  Singhalusi 
has  to  live  here  the  rest  of  his  life.” 

A servant  wheeled  a frosted  cab- 
inet before  them,  placed  goblets 
under  two  spigots,  withdrew.  The 
Sultan  cleared  his  throat.  “Trim- 
mer is  an  excellent  fellow,  but  un- 
believably loquacious.” 

Murphy  drew  himself  two  inches 
of  chilled  rosy-pale  liquor.  The  Sul- 
tan slapped  his  boots  with  the  twig. 
“Undoubtedly  he  confided  all  my 
private  business  to  you,  or  at  least 
as  much  as  I have  allowed  him  to 
learn.” 

“Well — he  spoke  of  your  hope  to 
increase  the  compass  of  Singhalut.” 

“That,  my  friend,  is  no  hope;  it’s 
absolute  necessity.  Our  population 
density  is  fifteen  hundred  to  the 


SJAMBAK 


19 


square  mile.  We  must  expand  or 
smother.  There’ll  be  too  little  food 
to  eat,  too  little  oxygen  to  breathe.” 
Murphy  suddenly  came  to  life.  “I 
could  make  that  idea  the  theme  of 
my  feature!  Singhalut  Dilemma: 
Expand  or  Perish!” 

“No,  that  would  be  inadvisable, 
inapplicable.” 

Murphy  was  not  convinced.  “It 
sounds  like  a natural.” 

The  Sultan  smiled.  “I’ll  impart 
an  item  of  confidential  informa- 
tion— although  Trimmer  no  doubt 
has  preceded  me  with  it.”  He  gave 
his  boots  an  irritated  whack.  “To 
expand  I need  funds.  Funds  are 
best  secured  in  an  atmosphere  of 
calm  and  confidence.  The  implica- 
tion of  emergency  would  be  disas- 
trous to  my  aims.” 

“Well,”  said  Murphy,  “I  see 
your  position.” 

The  Sultan  glanced  at  Murphy 
sidelong.  “Anticipating  your  coop- 
eration, my  Minister  of  Propaganda 
has  arranged  an  hour’s  program, 
stressing  our  progressive  social  atti- 
tude, our  prosperity  and  financial 
prospects.  ...” 

“But,  Sultan.  . . 

“Well?” 

“I  can’t  allow  your  Minister  of 
Propaganda  to  use  me  and  Know 
Your  Universe!  as  a kind  of  invest- 
ment brochure.” 

The  Sultan  nodded  wearily.  “I 
expected  you  to  take  that  atti- 
tude. . . Well — what  do  you  your- 
self haye  in  mind?” 

‘Tve  been  looking  for  something 
to  tie  to,”  .said  Murphy.  “I  think 
it’s  going  to  be  the  dramatic  con- 
trast between  the  ruined  cities  and 
the  new  domed  valleys.  How  the 
Earth  settlers  succeeded  where  the 


ancient  people  failed  to  meet  the 
challenge  of  the  dissipating  atmos- 
phere.” 

“Well,”  the  Sultan  said  grudg- 
ingly, “that’s  not  too  bad.” 

“Today  I want  to  take  some 
shots  of  the  palace,  the  dome,  the 
city,  the  paddies,  groves,  orchards, 
farms.  Tomorrow  I’m  taking  a trip 
out  to  one  of  the  ruins.” 

“I  see,”  said  the  Sultan.  “Then 
you  won’t  need  my  charts  and  sta- 
tistics?” 

“Well,  Sultan,  I could  film  the 
stuff  your  Propaganda  Minister 
cooked  up,  and  I could  take  it  back 
to  Earth.  Howard  Frayberg  or  Sam 
Gatlin  would  tear  into  it,  rip  it 
apart,  lard  in  some  head-hunting,  a 
little  cannibalism  and  temple  pros- 
titution, and  you’d  never  know  you 
where  watching  Singhalut.  You’d 
scream  with  horror,  and  I’d  be 
fired.” 

“In  that  case,”  said  the  Sultan, 
“I  will  leave  you  to  the  dictates  of 
your  conscience.” 


Howard  frayberg  looked 

around  the  gray  landscape  of 
Riker’s  Planet,  gazed  out  over  the 
roaring  black  Mogador  Ocean. 
“Sam,  I think  there’s  a story  out 
there.” 

Sam  Gatlin  shivered  inside  his 
electrically  heated  glass  overcoat. 
“Out  on  that  ocean?  It’s  full  of 
man-eating  plesiosaurs  — horrible 
things  forty  feet  long.” 

“Suppose  we  worked  something 
out  on  the  line  of  Moby  Dick?  The 
White  Monster  of  the  Mogador 
Ocean.  We’d  set  sail  in  a cata- 
maran— ” 

“Us?” 


18 


JACK  VANCE 


“Naturally  I wouldn’t  believe 
him.  He  knew  I knew  that  he  knew 
it.  So  when  he  said  ‘Sultan’,  I’d 
think  he  wouldn’t  lie  simply,  but 
that  he’d  lie  double — that  he  ac- 
tually was  working  for  the  Sultan.” 
Murphy  laughed.  “Suppose  he 
told  you  a fourth  level  lie?” 

“It  starts  to  be  a toss-up  pretty 
soon,”  Trimmer  admitted.  “I  don’t 
think  he  gives  me  credit  for  that 
much  subtlety.  . . What  are  you 
doing  the  rest  of  the  day?” 

“Taking  footage.  Do  you  know 
where  I can  find  some  picturesque 
rites?  Mystical  dances,  human  sacri- 
fice? I’ve  got  to  work  up  some 
glamor  and  exotic  lore.” 

“There’s  this  sjambak  in  the 
cage.  That’s  about  as  close  to  the 
medieval  as  you’ll  find  anywhere  in 
Earth  Commonwealth.” 

“Speaking  of  sjambaks.  . .” 

“No  time,”  said  Trimmer.  “Got 
to  get  back.  Drop  in  at  my  office — 
right  down  the  square  from  the 
palace.” 


URPHY  RETURNED  to  his 
suite.  The  shadowy  figure  of 
his  room  servant  said,  “His  High- 
ness the  Sultan  desires  the  Tuan’s 
attendance  in  the  Cascade  Gar- 
den.” 

“Thank  you,”  said  Murphy.  “As 
soon  as  I load  my  camera.” 

The  Cascade  Room  was  an  ppen 
patio  in  front  of  an  artificial  water- 
fall. The  Sultan  was  pacing  back 
and  forth,  wearing  dusty  khaki  put- 
tees, brown  plastic  boots,  a yellow 
polo  shirt.  He  carried  a twig  which 
he  used  as  a riding  crop,  slapping 
his  boots  as  he  walked.  He  turned 
his  head  as  Murphy  appeared. 


pointed  his  twig  at  a wicker  bench. 

“I  pray  you  sit  down,  Mr.  Mur- 
phy.” He  paced  once  up  and  back. 
“How  is  your  suite?  You  find  it  to 
your  liking?” 

“Very  much  so.” 

“Excellent,”  said  the  Sultan. 
“You  do  me  honor  with  your  pres- 
ence.” 

Murphy  waited  patiently. 

“I  understand  that  you  had  a 
visitor  this  morning,”  said  the  Sul- 
tan. 

“Yes.  Mr.  Trimmer.” 

“May  I inquire  the  nature  of  the 
conversation?” 

“It  was  of  a personal  nature,” 
said  Murphy,  rather  more  shortly 
than  he  meant. 

The  Sultan  nodded  wistfully.  “A 
Singhalusi  would  have  wasted  an 
hour  telling  me  half-truths — dis- 
torted enough  to  confuse,  but  not 
sufficiently  inaccurate  to  anger  me 
if  I had  a spy-cell  on  him  all  the 
time.” 

Murphy  grinned.  “A  Singhalusi 
has  to  live  here  the  rest  of  his  life.” 

A servant  wheeled  a frosted  cab- 
inet before  them,  placed  goblets 
under  two  spigots,  withdrew.  The 
Sultan  cleared  his  throat.  “Trim- 
mer is  an  excellent  fellow,  but  un- 
believably loquacious.” 

Murphy  drew  himself  two  inches 
of  chilled  rosy-pale  liquor.  The  Sul- 
tan slapped  his  boots  with  the  twig. 
“Undoubtedly  he  confided  all  my 
private  business  to  you,  or  at  least 
as  much  as  I have  allowed  him  to 
learn.” 

“Well — ^he  spoke  of  your  hope  to 
increase  the  compass  of  Singhalut.” 

“That,  my  friend,  is  no  hope;  it’s 
absolute  necessity.  Our  population 
density  is  fifteen  hundred  to  the 


SJAMBAK 


19 


square  mile.  We  must  expand  or 
smother.  There’ll  be  too  little  food 
to  eat,  too  little  oxygen  to  breathe.” 
Murphy  suddenly  came  to  life.  “I 
could  make  that  idea  the  theme  of 
my  feature!  Singhalut  Dilemma: 
Expand  or  Perish!” 

“No,  that  would  be  inadvisable, 
inapplicable.” 

Murphy  was  not  convinced.  “It 
sounds  like  a natural.” 

The  Sultan  smiled.  “I’ll  impart 
an  item  of  confidential  informa- 
tion— although  Trimmer  no  doubt 
has  preceded  me  with  it.”  He  gave 
his  boots  an  irritated  whack.  “To 
expand  I need  funds.  Funds  are 
best  secured  in  an  atmosphere  of 
calm  and  confidence.  The  implica- 
tion of  emergency  would  be  disas- 
trous to  my  aims.” 

“Well,”  said  Murphy,  “I  see 
your  position.” 

The  Sultan  glanced  at  Murphy 
sidelong.  “Anticipating  your  coop- 
eration, my  Minister  of  Propaganda 
has  arranged  an  hour’s  program, 
stressing  our  progressive  social  atti- 
tude, our  prosperity  and  financial 
prospects.  ...” 

“But,  Sultan.  . . 

“Well?” 

“I  can’t  allow  your  Minister  of 
Propaganda  to  use  me  and  Know 
Your  Universe!  as  a kind  of  invest- 
ment brochure.” 

The  Sultan  nodded  wearily.  “I 
expected  you  to  take  that  atti- 
tude. . . Well — what  do  you  your- 
self have  in  mind?” 

“I’ve  been  looking  for  something 
to  tie  to,”  said  Murphy.  “I  think 
it’s  going  to  be  the  dramatic  con- 
trast between  the  ruined  cities  and 
the  new  domed  valleys.  How  the 
Earth  settlers  succeeded  where  the 


ancient  people  failed  to  meet  the 
challenge  of  the  dissipating  atmos- 
phere.” 

“Well,”  the  Sultan  said  grudg- 
ingly, “that’s  not  too  bad.” 

“Today  I want  to  take  some 
shots  of  the  palace,  the  dome,  the 
city,  the  paddies,  groves,  orchards, 
farms.  Tomorrow  I’m  taking  a trip 
out  to  one  of  the  ruins.” 

“I  see,”  said  the  Sultan.  “Then 
you  won’t  need  my  charts  and  sta-’ 
tistics?” 

“Well,  Sultan,  I could  film  the 
stuff  your  Propaganda  Minister 
cooked  up,  and  I could  take  it  back 
to  Earth.  Howard  Frayberg  or  Sam 
Gatlin  would  tear  into  it,  rip  it 
apart,  lard  in  some  head-hunting,  a 
little  cannibalism  and  temple  pros- 
titution, and  you’d  never  know  you 
where  watching  Singhalut.  You’d 
scream  with  horror,  and  I’d  be 
fired.” 

“In  that  case,”  said  the  Sultan, 
“I  will  leave  you  to  the  dictates  of 
your  conscience.” 


OWARD  FRAYBERG  looked 
around  the  gray  landscape  of 
Riker’s  Planet,  gazed  out  over  the 
roaring  black  Mogador  Ocean. 
“Sam,  I think  there’s  a story  out 
there.” 

Sam  Gatlin  shivered  inside  his 
electrically  heated  glass  overcoat. 
“Out  on  that  ocean?  It’s  full  of 
man-eating  plesiosaurs  — horrible 
things  forty  feet  long.” 

“Suppose  we  worked  somSthing 
out  on  the  line  of  Moby  Dick?  The 
White  Monster  of  the  Mogador 
Ocean.  We’d  set  sail  in  a cata- 
maran— ” 

“Us?” 


20 


JACK  VANCE 


“No,”  said  Frayberg  impatiently. 
“Of  course  not  us.  Two  or  three  of 
the  staff.  They’d  sail  out  there,  look 
over  these  gray  and  red  monsters, 
maybe  fake  a fight  or  two,  but  all 
the  time  they’re  after  the  legendary 
white  one.  How’s  it  sound?” 

“I  don’t  think  we  pay  our  men 
enough  money.” 

“Wilbur  Murphy  might  do  it. 
He’s  willing  to  look  for  a man  rid- 
ing a horse  up  to  meet  his  space- 
ships.” 

“He  might  draw  the  line  at  a 
white  plesiosaur  riding  up  to  meet 
his  catamaran.” 

Frayberg  turned  away.  “Some- 
body’s got  to  have  ideas  around 
here.  . .” 

“We’d  better  head  back  to  the 
space-port,”  said  Gatlin.  “We  got 
two  hours  to  make  the  Sirgamesk 
shuttle.” 


ILBUR  MURPHY  sat  in  the 
Barangipan,  watching  mar- 
ionettes performing  to  xylophone, 
Castanet,  gong  and  gamelan.  The 
drama  had  its  roots  in  proto-his- 
toric Mohenjo-Dar5.  It  had  filtered 
down  through  ancient  India,  medi- 
eval Burma,  Malaya,  across  the 
Straits  of  Malacca  to  Sumatra  and 
Java;  from  modern  Java  across 
space  to  CirgamesQ,  five  thousand 
years  of  time,  two  hundred  light- 
years  of  space.  Somewhere  along 
the  route  it  had  met  and  assimi- 
lated modern  technology.  Magnetic 
beams  controlled  arms,  legs  and 
bodies,  guided  the  poses  and  pos- 
turings. The  manipulator’s  face,  by 
agency  of  clip,  wire,  radio  control 
and  minuscule  selsyn,  projected  his 
scowl,  smile,  sneer  or  grimace  to 


the  peaked  little  face  he  controlled. 
The  language  was  that  of  Old  Java, 
which  perhaps  a third  of  the  spec- 
tators understood.  This  portion  did 
not  include  Murphy,  and  when 
the  performance  ended  he  was  no 
wiser  than  at  the  start. 

Soek  Panjoebang  slipped  into  the 
seat  beside  Murphy.  She  wore  mu- 
sician’s garb:  a sarong  of  brown, 
blue,  and  black  batik,  and  a fan- 
tastic headdress  of  tiny  silver  bells. 
She  greeted  him  with  enthusiasm. 

“Weelbrrr!  I saw  you  watch- 
ing. ...” 

“It  was  very  interesting.” 

“Ah,  yes.”  She  sighed.  “Weelbrrr, 
you  take  me  with  you  back  to 
Earth?  You  make  me  a great  pic- 
turama  star,  please,  Weelbrrr?” 
“Well,  I don’t  know  about  that.” 
“I  behave  very  well,  Weelbrrr.” 
She  nuzzled  his  shoulder,  looked 
soulfully  up  with  her  shiny  yellow- 
hazel  eyes.  Murphy  nearly  forgot 
the  experiment  he  intended  to  per- 
form. 

“What  did  you  do  today,  Weel- 
brrr? You  look  at  all  the  pretty 
girls?” 

“Nope.  I ran  footage.  Got  the 
palace,  climbed  the  ridge  up  to  the 
condensation  vanes.  I never  knew 
there  was  so  much  water  in  the  air 
till  I saw  the  stream  pouring  off 
thosp  vanes!  And  hot/" 

“We  have  much  sunlight;  it 
makes  the  rice  grow.” 

“The  Sultan  ought  to  put  some 
of  that  excess  light  to  work. 
There’s  a secret  process.  . . . Well, 
I’d  better  not  say.” 

“Oh  come,  Weelbrrr!  Tell  me 
your  secrets!” 

“It’s  not  much  of  a secret.  Just 
a catalyst  that  separates  clay  into 


SJAMBAK 


21 


aluminum  and  oxygen  when  sun- 
light shines  on  it.” 

Soek’s  eyebrows  rose,  poised  in 
place  like  a seagull  riding  the  wind. 
“Weelbrrr!  I did  not  know  you  for 
a man  of  learning!” 

“Oh,  you  thought  I was  just  a 
bum,  eh?  Good  enough  to  make 
picturama  stars  out  of  gamelan 
players,  but  no  special  genius.  . 
“No,  no,  Weelbrrr.” 

“I  know  lots  of  tricks.  I can  take 
a flashlight  battery,  a piece  of  cop- 
per foil,  a few  transistors  and  bam- 
boo tube  and  turn  out  a paralyzer 
gun  that’ll  stop  a man  cold  in  his 
tracks.  And  you  know  how  much  it 
costs?” 

“No,  Weelbrrr.  How  much?” 
“Ten  cents.  It  wears  out  after 
two  or  three  months,  but  what’s 
the  difference?  I make  ’em  as  a 
hobby — turn  out  two  or  three  an 
hour.” 

“Weelbrrr!  You’re  a man  of  mar- 
vels! Hello!  We  will  drink!” 

And  Murphy  settled  back  in  the 
wicker  chair,  sipping  his  rice  beer. 

//TODAY,”  said  Murphy,  “I  get 
I into  a space-suit,  and  ride 
out  to  the  ruins  in  the  plain.  Ghata- 
mipol,  I think  they’re  called.  Like 
to  come?” 

“No,  Weelbrrr.”  Soek  Panjoe- 
bang  looked  off  into  the  garden, 
her  hands  busy  tucking  a flower 
into  her  hair.  A few  minutes  later 
she  said,  “Why  must  you  waste 
your  time  among  the  rocks?  There 
are  better  things  to  do  and  see. 
And  it  might  well  be — dangerous.” 
She  murmured  the  last  word  off- 
handedly. 

“Danger?  From  the  sjambaks?” 


“Yes,  perhaps.” 

“The  Sultan’s  giving  me  a guard. 
Twenty  men  wiffi  crossbows.” 
“The  sjambaks  carry  shields.” 
“Why  should  they  risk  their  lives 
attacking  me?” 

Soek  Panjoebang  shrugged.  Aft- 
er a moment  she  rose  to  her  feet. 
“Goodbye,  Weelbrrr.” 

“Goodbye?  Isn’t  this  rather 
abrupt?  Won’t  I see  you  tonight?” 
“If  so  be  Allah’s  will.” 

Murphy  looked  after  the  lithe 
swaying  figure.  She  paused,  plucked 
a yellow  flower,  looked  over  her 
shoulder.  Her  eyes,  yellow  as  the 
flower,  lucent  as  water- jewels,  held 
his.  Her  face  was  utterly  expres- 
sionless. She  turned,  tossed  away 
the  flower  with  a jaunty  gesture, 
and  continued,  her  shoulders 
swinging. 

Murphy  breathed  deeply.  She 
might  have  made  picturama  at 
that.  . . 

One  hour  later  he  met  his  escort 
at  the  valley  gate.  They  were 
dressed  in  space-suits  for  the  plains, 
twenty  men  with  sullen  faces.  The 
trip  to  Ghatamipol  clearly  was  not 
to  their  liking.  Murphy  climbed  into 
his  own  suit,  checked  the  oxygen 
pressure  gauge,  the  seal  at  his  col- 
lar. “All  ready,  boys?” 

No  one  spoke.  The  silence  drew 
out.  The  gatekeeper,  on  hand  to 
let  the  party  out,  snickered. 
“They’re  all  ready,  Tuan.” 

“Well,”  said  Murphy,  “let’s  go 
then.” 

Outside  the  gate  Murphy  made 
a second  check  of  his  equipment. 
No  leaks  in  his  suit.  Inside  pressure : 
14.6.  Outside  pressure;  zero.  His 
twenty  guards  morosely  inspected 
their  crossbows  and  slim  swords. 


22 


JACK  VANCE 


The  white  ruins  of  Ghatamipol 
lay  five  miles  across  Pharasang 
Plain.  The  horizon  was  clear,  the 
sun  was  high,  the  sky  was  black. 

Murphy’s  radio  hummed.  Some- 
one said  sharply,  “Look!  There  it 
goes!”  He  wheeled  around;  his 
guards  had  halted,  and  were  point- 
ing. He  saw  a fleet  something  van- 
ishing into  the  distance. 

“Let’s  go,”  said  Murphy. 
“There’s  nothing  out  there.” 

“Sjambak.” 

“’Well,  there’s  only  one  of  them.” 

“Where  one  walks,  others  fol- 
low.” 

“That’s  why  the  twenty  of  you 
are  here.” 

“It  is  madness!  Challenging  the 
sjambaks!” 

“What  is  gained?”  another  ar- 
gued. 

“I’ll  be  the  judge  of  that,”  said 
Murphy,  and  set  off  along  the 
plain.  The  warriors  reluctantly  fol- 
lowed, muttering  to  each  other 
over  their  radio  intercoms. 


The  eroded  city  walls  rose 
above  them,  occupied  more 
and  more  of  the  sky.  The  platoon 
leader  said  in  an  angry  voice,  “We 
have  gone  far  enough.” 

“You’re  under  my  orders,”  said 
Murphy.  “We’re  going  through 
the  gate.”  He  punched  the  button 
on  his  camera  and  passed  under 
the  monstrous  portal. 

The  city  was  frailer  stuff  than 
the  wall,  and  had  succumbed  to  the 
thin  storms  which  had  raged  a mil- 
lion years  after  the  passing  of  life. 
Murphy  marvelled  at  the  scope  of 
the  ruins.  Virgin  archaeological 
territory!  No  telling  what  a few 


weeks  digging  might  turn  up.  Mur- 
phy considered  his  expense  ac- 
count. Shifkin  was  the  obstacle. 

There’d  be  tremendous  prestige 
and  publicity  for  Know  Your  Uni- 
verse! if  Murphy  uncovered  a 
tomb,  a library,  works  of  art.  The 
Sultan  would  gladly  provide  dig- 
gers. They  were  a sturdy  enough 
people;  they  could  make  quite  a 
showing  in  a week,  if  they  were 
able  to  put  aside  their  superstitions, 
fears  and  dreads. 

Murphy  sized  one  of  them  up 
from  the  comer  of  his  eye.  He  sat 
on  a sunny  slab  of  rock,  and  if  he 
felt  uneasy  he  concealed  it  quite 
successfully.  In  fact,  thought  Mur- 
phy, he  appeared  completely  re- 
laxed. Maybe  the  problem  of  se- 
curing diggers  was  a minor  one  aft- 
er all.  . . 

And  here  was  an  odd  sidelight 
on  the  Singhalusi  character.  Once 
clear  of  the  valley  the  man  openly 
wore  his  shirt,  a fine  loose  garment 
of  electric  blue,  in  defiance  of  the 
Sultan’s  edict.  Of  course  out  here 
he  might  be  cold.  . . 

Murphy  felt  his  own  skin  crawl- 
ing. How  could  he  be  cold?  How 
could  he  be  alive?  Where  was  his 
space-suit?  He  lounged  on  the  rock, 
grinning  sardonically  at  Murphy. 
He  wore  heavy  sandals,  a black 
turban,  loose  breeches,  the  blue 
shirt.  Nothing  more. 

Where  were  the  others? 

Murphy  turned  a feverish  glance 
over  his  shoulder.  A good  three 
miles  distant,  bounding  and  leap- 
ing toward  Singhalut,  were  twenty 
desperate  figures.  They  all  wore 
space-suits.  This  man  here.  . . A 
sjambak?  A wizard?  A hallucina- 
tion? 


SJAMBAK 


23 


HE  CREATURE  rose  to  his 
feet,  strode  springily  toward 
Murphy.  He  carried  a crossbow  and 
a sword,  like  those  of  Murphy’s 
fleet-footed  guards.  But  he  wore  no 
space-suit.  Could  there  be  breathy 
able  traces  of  an  atmosphere?  Mur- 
phy glanced  at  his  gauge.  Outside 
pressure:  zero. 

Two  other  men  appeared,  mov- 
ing with  long  elastic  steps.  Their 
eyes  were  bright,  their  faces  flushed. 
They  came  up  to  Murphy,  took  his 
arm.  They  were  solid,  corporeal. 
They  had  no  invisible  force  fields 
around  their  heads. 

Murphy  jerked  his  arm  free. 
“Let  go  of  me,  damn  it!”  But  they 
certainly  couldn’t  hear  him  through 
the  vacuum. 

He  glanced  over  his  shoulder. 
The  first  man  held  his  naked  blade 
a foot  or  two  behind  Murphy’s 
bulging  space-suit.  Murphy  made 
no  further  resistance.  He  punched 
the  button  on  his  camera  to  auto- 
matic. It  would  now  run  for  sev- 
eral hours,  recording  one  hundred 
pictures  per  second,  a thousand  to 
the  inch. 

The  sjambaks  led  Murphy  two 
hundred  yards  to  a metal  door. 
They  opened  it,  pushed  Murphy 
inside,  banged  it  shut.  Murphy  felt 
the  vibration  through  his  shoes, 
heard  a gradually  waxing  hum.  His 
gauge  showed  an  outside  pressure 
of  5,  10,  12,  14,  14.5.  An  inner 
door  opened.  Hands  pulled  Murphy 
in,  undamped  his  dome. 

“Just  what’s  going  on  here?” 
demanded  Murphy  angrily. 

Prince  Ali-Tomas  pointed  to  a 
table.  Murphy  saw  a flashlight  bat- 
tery, aluminum  foil,  wire,  a tran- 
sistor kit,  metal  tubing,  tools,  a few 


other  odds  and  ends. 

“There  it  is,”  said  Prince  Ali- 
Tomas.  “Get  to  work.  Let’s  see  one 
of  these  paralysis  weapons  you 
boast  of.” 

“Just  like  that,  eh?” 

“Just  like  that.” 

“What  do  you  want  ’em  for?” 
“Does  it  matter?” 

“I’d  like  to  know.”  Murphy  was 
conscious  of  his  camera,  recording 
sight,  sound,  odor. 

“I  lead  an  army,”  said  Ali-To- 
mas, “but  they  march  without 
weapons.  Give  me  weapons!  I will 
carry  the  word  to  Hadra,  to  New 
Batavia,  to  Sundaman,  to  Boeng- 
Bohdt!” 

“How?  Why?” 

“It  is  enough  that  I will  it. 
Again,  I beg  of  you.  . .”  He  indi- 
cated the  table. 

Murphy  laughed.  “I’ve  got  my- 
self in  a fine  mess.  Suppose  I don’t 
make  this  weapon  for  you?” 

“You’ll  remain  until  you  do,  un- 
der increasingly  difficult  condi- 
tions.” 

“I’ll  be  here  a long  time.” 

“If  such  is  the  case,”  said  Ali- 
Tomas,  “we  must  make  our  ar- 
rangements for  your  care  on  a long- 
term basis.” 

Ali  made  a gesture.  Hands  seized 
Murphy’s  shoulders.  A respirator 
was  held  to  his  nostrils.  He  thought 
of  his  camera,  and  he  could  have 
laughed.  Mystery!  Excitement! 
Thrills!  Dramatic  sequence  for 
Know  Your  Universe!  Staff-man 
murdered  by  fanatics!  The  crime 
recorded  on  his  own  camera!  See 
the  blood,  hear  his  death-rattle, 
smell  the  poison! 

The  vapor  choked  him.  What  a 
break!  What  a sequence! 


24 

//CIRGAMESK,”  said  Howard 
•^Frayberg,  “bigger  and  bright- 
er every  minute.” 

“It  must’ve  been  just  about  in 
here,”  said  Gatlin,  “that  Wilbur’s 
horseback  rider  appeared.” 

“That’s  right!  Steward!” 

“Yes,  sir?’’ 

“We’re  about  twenty  thousand 
miles  out,  aren’t  we?” 

“About  fifteen  thousand,  sir.” 
“Sidereal  Cavalry!  What  an  idea! 
I wonder  how  Wilbur’s  making  out 
on  his  superstition  angle?” 

Sam  Gatlin,  watching  out  the 
window,  said  in  a tight  voice, 
“Why  not  ask  him  yourself?” 
“Eh?” 

“Ask  him  for  yourself!  There  he 
is — outside,  riding  some  kind  of 
critter.  . .” 

“It’s  a ghost,”  whispered  Fray- 
berg.  “A  man  without  a space- 
suit.  . . There’s  no  such  thing!” 

“He  sees  us.  . . Look.  , .” 
Murphy  was  staring  at  them, 
and  his  surprise  seemed  equal  to 
their  own.  He  waved  his  hand.  Gat- 
lin gingerly  waved  back. 

Said  Frayberg,  “That’s  not  a 
horse  he’s  riding.  It’s  a combina- 
tion ram-jet  and  kiddie  car  with 
stirrups!” 

“He’s  coming  aboard  the  ship,” 
said  Gatlin.  “That’s  the  entrance 
port  down  there.  . . 

WILBUR  MURPHY  sat  in  the 
captain’s  stateroom,  taking 
careful  breaths  of  air. 

“How  are  you  now?”  asked 
Frayberg. 

“Fine.  A little  sore  in  the  lungs.” 
“I  shouldn’t  wonder,”  the  ship’s 


JACK  VANCE 

doctor  growled.  “I  never  saw  any- 
thing like  it.” 

“How  does  it  feel  out  there,  Wil- 
bur?” Gatlin  asked. 

“It  feels  awful  lonesome  and 
empty.  And  the  breath  seeping  up 
out  of  your  lungs,  never  going  in — 
that’s  a funny  feeling.  And  you 
miss  the  air  blowing  on  your  skin. 
I never  realized  it  before.  Air  feels 
like — like  silk,  like  whipped  cream 
— it’s  got  texture.  . . .” 

“But  aren’t  you  cold?  Space  is 
supposed  to  be  absolute  zero!” 
“Space  is  nothing.  It’s  not  hot 
and  it’s  not  cold.  When  you’re  in 
the  sunlight  you  get  warm.  It’s  bet- 
ter in  the  shade.  You  don’t  lose  any 
heat  by  air  convection,  but  radia- 
tion and  sweat  evaporation  keep 
you  comfortably  cool.” 

“I  still  can’t  understand  it,”  said 
Frayberg.  “This  Prince  Ali,  he’s  a 
kind  of  a rebel,  eh?” 

“I  don’t  blame  him  in  a way.  A 
normal  man  living  under  those 
domes  has  to  let  off  steam  some- 
how. Prince  Ali  decided  to  go  out 
crusading.  I think  he  would  have 
made  it  too — at  least  on  Girga- 
mes^.” 

“Certainly  there  are  many  more 
men  inside  the  domes.  . .” 

“When  it  comes  to  fighting,”  said 
Murphy,  “a  sjambak  can  lick 
twenty  men  in  spacesuits.  A little 
nick  doesn’t  hurt  him,  but  a little 
nick  bursts  open  a spacesuit,  and^ 
the  man  inside  comes  apart.” 
“Well,”  said  the  Captain.  “I 
imagine  the  Peace  Office  will  send 
out  a team  to  put  things  in  order 
now.” 

Gatlin  asked,  “What  happened 
when  you  woke  up  from  the  chloro- 
form?” 


SJAMBAK 


25 


“Well,  nothing  very  miKh.  I felt 
this  attachment  on  my  chest,  but 
didn’t  think  much  about  it.  Still 
kinda  woozy.  I was  halfway 
through  decompression.  They  keep 
a man  there  eight  hours,  drop  pres- 
sure on  him  two  pounds  an  hour, 
nice  and  slow  so  he  don’t  get  the 
bends.” 

“Was  this  the  same  place  they 
took  you,  when  you  met  Ali?” 

“Yeah,  that  was  their  decompres- 
sion chamber.  They  had  to  make  a 
sjambak  out  of  me;  there  wasn’t 
anywhere  else  they  could  keep  me. 
Well,  pretty  soon  my  head  cleared, 
and  I saw  this  apparatus  stuck  to 
my  chest.”  He  poked  at  the  mech- 
anism on  the  table.  “I  saw  the  oxy- 
gen tank,  I saw  the  blood  running 
dirough  the  plastic  pipes — blue 
from  me  to  that  carburetor  ar- 
rangement, red  on  the  way  back 
in — and  I figured  out  the  whole  ar- 
rangement. Carbon  dioxide  still  ex- 
hales up  through  your  lungs,  but 
the  vein  back  to  the  left  auricle  is 
routed  through  the  carburetor  and 
supercharged  with  oxygen.  A man 
doesn’t  need  to  breathe.  The  car- 
buretor flushes  his  blood  with  oxy- 
gen, the  decompression  tank  ad- 
justs him  to  the  lack  of  air-pres- 
sure. There’s  only  one  thing  to  look 
out  for;  that’s  not  to  touch  any- 
thing with  your  naked  flesh.  If  it’s 
in  the  sunshine  it’s  blazing  hot;  if 
it’s  in  the  shade  it’s  cold  enough  to 
cut.  Otherwise  you’re  free  as  a 
bird.” 

“But — ^how  did  you  get  away?” 

“I  saw  those  little  rocket-bikes, 
and  began  figuring.  I couldn’t  go 


back  to  Singhalut;  I’d  be  lynched 
on  sight  as  a sjambak.  I couldn’t  fly 
to  another  planet — the  bikes  don’t 
carry  enough  fuel. 

“I  knew  when  the  ship  would  be 
coming  in,  so  I figured  I’d  fly  up  to 
meet  it.  I told  the  guard  I was  go- 
ing outside  a minute,  and  I got  on 
one  of  the  rocket-bikes.  There  was 
nothing  much  to  it.” 

“Well,”  said  Frayberg,  “it’s  a 
great  feature,  Wilbur — a great  film! 
Maybe  we  can  stretch  it  into  two 
hours.” 

“There’s  one  thing  bothering 
me,”  said  Gatlin.  “Who  did  the 
steward  see  up  here  the  first  time?” 
Murphy  shrugged.  “It  might 
have  been  somebody  up  here  sky- 
larking. A little  too  much  oxygen 
and  you  start  cutting  all  kinds  of 
capers.  Or  it  might  have  been 
someone  who  decided  he  had 
enough  crusading. 

“There’s  a sjambak  in  a cage, 
right  in  the  middle  of  Singhalut. 
Prince  Ali  walks  past;  they  look  at 
each  other  eye  to  eye.  Ali  smiles  a 
little  and  walks  on.  Suppose  this 
sjambak  tried  to  escape  to  the  ship. 
He’s  taken  aboard,  turned  over  to 
the  Sultan  and  the  Sultan  makes  an 
example  of  him.  . .” 

“What’ll  the  Sultan  do  to  Ali?” 
Murphy  shook  his  head.  “If  I 
were  Ali  I’d  disappear.” 

A loudspeaker  turned  on.  “Atten- 
tion all  passengers.  We  have  just 
passed  through  quarantine.  Passen- 
gers may  now  disembark.  Impor- 
tant: no  weapons  or  explosives  al- 
lowed on  Singhalut!” 

“This  is  where  I came  in,”  said 
Murphy. 


THE  END 


There’s  no  such  thing  as  a weapon  too  horrible 
to  use;  weapons  will  continue  to  become  bigger, 
and  deadlier.  Like  other  things  that  can’t  be 
stopped  ... 


IRRESISTIBLE  WEAPON 

By  H.  B.  Fyfe 

Illustrated  by  ED  EMSH 


IN  THE  SPECIAL  observation 
dome  of  the  colossal  command 
ship  just  beyond  Pluto,  every  nerv- 
ous clearing  of  a throat  rasped 
through  the  silence.  Telescopes 
were  available  but  most  of  the 
scientists  and  high  officials  pre- 
ferred the  view  on  the  huge  tele- 
screen. 

This  showed,  from  a distance  of 
several  million  miles,  one  of  the 
small  moons  of  the  frigid  planet,  so 
insignificant  that  it  had  not  been 
discovered  until  man  had  pushed 
the  boundaries  of  space  exploration 
past  the  asteroids.  The  satellite  was 
about  to  become  spectacularly  sig- 
nificant, however,  as  the  first  tar- 
get of  man’s  newest,  most  destruc- 
tive weapon. 

“I  need  not  remind  you,  gentle- 
men,” white-haired  Co-ordinator 
Evora  of  Mars  had  said,  “that  if 
we  have  actually  succeeded  in  this 
race  against  our  former  Centaurian 


colonies,  it  may  well  prevent  the 
imminent  conflict  entirely.  In  a 
few  moments  we  shall  know  wheth- 
er our  scientists  have  developed  a 
truly  irresistible  weapon.” 

Of  all  the  officials,  soldiers,  and 
scientists  present,  Arnold  Gibson 
was  perhaps  the  least  excited.  For 
one  thing,  he  had  labored  hard  to 
make  the  new  horror  succeed  and 
felt  reasonably  confident  that  it 
would.  The  project  had  been  given 
the  attention  of  every  first  class 
scientific  mind  in  the  Solar  System ; 
for  the  great  fear  was  that  the  new 
states  on  the  Centaurian  planets 
might  win  the  race  of  discovery 
and  . . . 

And  bring  a little  order  into  this 
old-fashioned,  inefficient  fumbling 
toward  progress,  Gibson  thought 
contemptuously.  Look  at  them — 
fools  for  all  their  degrees  and  titles! 
They’ve  stumbled  on  something 
with  possibilities  beyond  their  con- 


28 


H.  B.  FYFE 


fused  powers  of  application. 

A gasp  rustled  through  the 
chamber,  followed  by  an  even  more 
awed  silence  than  had  preceded 
the  unbelievable,  ultra-rapid  action 
on  the  telescreen.  Gibson  permitted 
himself  a tight  smile  of  satisfaction. 

Now  my  work  really  begins,  he 
reflected. 

A few  quick  steps  brought  him 
to  Dr.  Haas,  director  of  the  project, 
just  before  the  less  stunned  observ- 
ers surrounded  that  gentleman, 
babbling  questions. 

“I’ll  start  collecting  the  Number 
Three  string  of  recorders,”  he  re- 
ported. 

“All  right,  Arnold,”  agreed  Haas. 
“Tell  the  others  to  get  their  ships 
out  too.  I’ll  be  busy  here.” 

Not  half  as  busy  as  you  will  be 
in  about  a day,  thought  Gibson, 
heading  for  the  spaceship  berths. 


E HAD  ARRANGED  to  be  as- 
signed the  recording  machines 
drifting  in  space  at  the  greatest  dis- 
tance from  the  command  ship.  The 
others  would  assume  that  he  need- 
ed more  time  to  locate  and  retrieve 
the  apparatus — ^which  would  give 
him  a head  start  toward  Alpha 
Centauri. 

His  ship  was  not  large,  but  it  was 
powerful  and  versatile  to  cope  with 
any  emergency  that  may  have  been 
encountered  during  the  dangerous 
tests.  Gibson  watched  his  instru- 
ments carefully  for  signs  of  pursuit 
until  he  had  put  a few  million 
miles  between  himself  and  the  com- 
mand ship.  Then  he  eased  his  craft 
into  subspace  drive  and  relaxed  his 
vigilance. 

He  returned  to  normal  space 


many  “days”  later  in  the  vicinity 
of  Alpha  Centauri.  They  may 
have  attempted  to  follow  him  for 
all  he  knew,  but  it  hardly  mattered 
by  then.  He  broadcast  the  recogni- 
tion signal  he  had  been  given  to 
memorize  long  ago,  when  he  had 
volunteered  his  services  to  the  new 
states.  Then  he  headed  for  the  cap- 
ital planet,  Nessus.  Long  before 
reaching  it,  he  acquired  a lower- 
ing escort  of  warcraft,  but  he  was 
permitted  to  land. 

“Well,  well,  it’s  young  Gibson!” 
the  Chairman  of  Nessus  greeted 
him,  after  the  newcomer  had 
passed  through  the  exhaustive 
screening  designed  to  protect  the 
elaborate  underground  headquar- 
ters. “I  trust  you  have  news  for  us, 
my  boy.  Watch  outside  the  door, 
Colonel!” 

One  of  the  ostentatiously  armed 
guards  stepped  outside  and  closed 
the  door  as  Gibson  greeted  the 
obese  man  sitting  across  the  button- 
studded  expanse  of  desk.  The  scien- 
tist was  under  no  illusion  as  to  the 
vagueness  of  the  title  “Chairman.” 
He  was  facing  the  absolute  power 
of  the  Centaurian  planets — which, 
in  a few  months’  time,  would  be  the 
same  as  saying  the  ruler  of  all  the 
human  race  in  both  systems.  Gib- 
son’s file  must  have  been  available 
on  the  Chairman’s  desk  telescreen 
within  minutes  of  the  reception  of 
his  recognition  signal.  He  felt  a 
thrill  of  admiration  for  the  effici- 
ency of  the  new  states  and  their 
system  of  government. 

He  made  it  his  business  to  report 
briefly  and  accurately,  trusting  that 
the  plain  facts  of  his  feat  would  at- 
tract suitable  recognition.  They  did. 
Chairman  Diamond’s  sharp  blue 


IRRESISTIBLE  WEAPON 


29 


eyes  glinted  out  of  the  fat  mask  of 
his  features. 

“Well  done,  my  boy!”  he  grunted, 
with  a joviality  he  did  not  bother 
trying  to  make  sound  overly  sincere. 
“So  they  have  it!  You  must  see  our 
men  immediately,  and  point  out 
where  they  have  gone  wrong.  You 
may  leave  it  to  me  to  decide  who 
has  gone  wrong!” 

Arnold  GIBSON  shivered  in- 
voluntarily before  reminding 
himself  that  he  had  seen  the  correct 
answer  proved  before  his  eyes.  He 
had  stood  there  and  watched — 
more,  he  had  worked  with  them  all 
his  adult  life — and  he  was  the  last 
whom  the  muddled  fools  would 
have  suspected. 

The  officer  outside  the  door, 
Colonel  Korman,  was  recalled  and 
given  orders  to  escort  Gibson  to  the 
secret  state  laboratories.  He  glanced 
briefly  at  the  scientist  when  they 
had  been  let  out  through  the  com- 
plicated system  of  safeguards. 

“We  have  to  go  to  the  second 
moon,”  he  said  expressionlessly. 
“Better  sleep  all  you  can  on  the  way. 
Once  you’re  there,  the  Chairman 
will  be  impatient  for  results!” 
Gibson  was  glad,  after  they  had 
landed  on  the  satellite,  that  he  had 
taken  the  advice.  He  was  led  from 
one  underground  lab  to  another,  to 
compare  Centaurian  developments 
with  Solarian.  Finally,  Colonel  Kor- 
man appeared  to  extricate  him, 
giving  curt  answers  to  such  re- 
searchers as  still  had  questions. 

“Whew!  Glad  you  got  me  out!” 
Gibson  thanked  him.  “They’ve  been 
picking  my  brain  for  two  days 
straight!” 


“I  hope  you  can  stay  awake,”  re- 
torted Korman  with  no  outward 
sign  of  sympathy.  “If  you  think  you 
can’t,  say  so  now.  I’ll  have  them 
give  you  another  shot.  The  Chair- 
man is  calling  on  the  telescreen.” 
Gibson  straightened. 

Jealous  snob!  he  thought.  Typical 
military  fathead,  and  he  knows  I 
amount  to  more  than  any  little 
colonel  now.  I was  smart  enough  to 
fool  all  the  so-called  brains  of  the 
Solar  System. 

“I’ll  stay  awake,”  he  said 
shortly. 

Chairman  Diamond’s  shiny  fea- 
tures appeared  on  the  screen  soon 
after  Korman  reported  his  charge 
ready. 

“Speak  freely,”  he  ordered  Gib- 
son. “This  beam  is  so  tight  and 
scrambled  that  no  prying  jackass 
could  even  tell  that  it  is  communica- 
tion. Have  you  set  us  straight?” 
“Yes,  Your  Excellency,”  replied 
Gibson.  “I  merely  pointed  out 
which  of  several  methods  the  Solar- 
ians  got  to  yield  results.  Your — our 
scientists  were  working  on  all  pos- 
sibilities, so  it  would  have  been 
only  a matter  of  time.” 

“Which  you  have  saved  us,”  said 
Chairman  Diamond.  His  ice-blue 
eyes  glinted  again.  “I  wish  I could 
have  seen  the  faces  of  Haas  and  Co- 
ordinator Evora,  and  the  rest.  You 
fooled  them  completely!” 

Gibson  glowed  at  the  rare  praise. 
“I  dislike  bragging.  Your  Excel- 
lency,” he  said,  “but  they  are  fools. 
I might  very  well  have  found  the 
answer  without  them,  once  they  had 
collected  the  data.  My  success  shows 
what  intelligence,  well-directed 
after  the  manner  of  the  new  states 


30 


H.  B.  FYFE 


of  Centauri,  can  accomplish  against 
inefficiency.” 

The  Chairman’s  expression, 
masked  by  the  fat  of  his  face,  never- 
theless approached  a smile. 

“So  you  would  say  that  you — one 
of  our  sympathizers — were  actually 
the  most  intelligent  worker  they 
had?” 

He’ll  have  his  little  joke,  thought 
Gibson,  and  I’ll  let  him  put  it  over. 
Then,  even  that  sour  colonel  will 
laugh  with  us,  and  the  Chairman 
will  hint  about  what  post  I’ll  get 
as  a reward.  1 wouldn’t  mind  be- 
ing in  charge — old  Haas’  opposite 
number  at  this  end. 

“I  think  I might  indeed  be  per- 
mitted to  boast  of  that  much  ability. 
Your  Excellency,”  he  answered, 
putting  on  what  he  hoped  was  an 
expectant  smile.  “Although,  con- 
sidering the  Solarians,  that  is  not 
saying  much.” 

The  little  joke  did  not  develop 
precisely  as  anticipated. 

“Unfortunately,”  Chairman  Dia- 
mond said,  maintaining  his  smile 
throughout,  “wisdom  should  never 
be  confused  with  intelligence.” 

Gibson  waited,  feeling  his 

own  smile  stiffen  as  he  won- 
dered what  could  be  going  wrong. 
Surely,  they  could  not  doubt  his 
loyalty!  A hasty  glance  at  Colonel 
Korman  revealed  no  expression  on 
the  military  facade  affected  by  that 
gentleman. 

“For  if  wisdom  were  completely 
synonymous  with  intelligence,”  the 
obese  Chairman  continued,  relish- 
ing his  exposition,  “you  would  be  a 
rival  to  myself,  and  consequently 
would  be — disposed  of — anyway!” 


Such  a tingle  shot  up  Gibson’s 
spine  that  he  was  sure  he  must  have 
jumped. 

“Anyway?”  he  repeated  huskily. 
His  mouth  suddenly  seemed  dry. 

Chairman  Diamond  smiled  out 
of  the  telescreen,  so  broadly  that 
Gibson  was  unpleasantly  affected 
by  the  sight  of  his  small,  gleaming, 
white  teeth. 

“Put  it  this  way,”  he  suggested 
suavely.  “Your  highly  trained  mind 
observed,  correlated,  and  memo- 
rized the  most  iiitricate  data  and 
mathematics,  meanwhile  guiding 
your  social  relations  with  your 
former  colleagues  so  as  to  remain 
unsuspected  while  stealing  their 
most  cherished  secret.  Such  a feat 
demonstrates  ability  and  intelli- 
gence.” 

Gibson  tried  to  lick  his  lips,  and 
could  not,  despite  the  seeming  fair- 
ness of  the  words.  He  sensed  a puls- 
ing undercurrent  of  cruelty  and 
cynicism. 

“On  the  other  hand,”  the  mellow 
voice  flowed  on,  “having  received 
the  information,  being  able  to  u.se 
it  effectively  now  without  you,  and 
knowing  that  you  betrayed  once — 
I shall  simply  discard  you  like  an 
old  message  blank.  That  is  an  act  of 
wisdom. 

“Had  you  chosen  your  course 
more  wisely,”  he  added,  “your  posi- 
tion might  be  stronger.” 

By  the  time  Arnold  Gibson  re- 
gained his  voice,  the  Centaurian 
autocrat  was  already  giving  instruc- 
tions to  Colonel  Korman.  The 
scientist  strove  to  interrupt,  to  at- 
tract the  ruler’s  attention  even  mo- 
mentarily. 

Neither  paid  him  any  heed,  until 
he  shouted  and  tried  frenziedly  to 


IRRESISTIBLE  WEAPON 

shove  the  soldier  from  in  front  of 
the  telescreen.  Korman  backhanded 
him  across  the  throat  without  look- 
ing around,  with  such  force  that 
Gibson  staggered  back  and  fell. 

He  lay,  half-choking,  grasping 
his  throat  with  both  hands  until  he 
could  breathe.  The  colonel  contin- 
ued discussing  his  extinction  with- 
out emotion. 

“. . . so  if  Your  Excellency  agrees, 
I would  prefer  taking  him  back  to 
Nessus  first,  for  the  sake  of  the 
morale  factor  here.  Some  of  them 
are  so  addled  now  at  having  been 
caught  chasing  up  wrong  alleys 
that  they  can  hardly  work.” 

Apparently  the  Chairman 
agreed,  for  the  screen  was  blank 
when  the  colonel  reached  down 
and  hauled  Gibson  to  his  feet. 

“Now,  listen  to  me  carefully!”  he 
said,  emphasizing  his  order  with  a 
ringing  slap  across  Gibson’s  face. 
“I  shall  walk  behind  you  with  my 
blaster  drawn.  If  you  make  a false 
move,  I shall  not  kill  you.” 

Gibson  stared  at  him,  holding  his 
bleeding  mouth. 

“It  will  be  much  worse,”  Kor- 
man went  on  woodenly.  “Imagine 
what  it  will  be  like  to  have  both 
feet  charred  to  the  bone.  You 
would  have  to  crawl  the  rest  of  the 
way  to  the  ship;  I certainly  would 
not  consider  carrying  you!” 

In  a nightmarish  daze,  Gibson 
obeyed  the  cold  directions,  and 
walked  slowly  along  the  under- 
ground corridors  of  the  Centaurian 
research  laboratories.  He  prayed 
desperately  that  someone — anyone 
— might  come  along.  Anybody  who 
could  possibly  be  used  to  create  a 
diversion,  or  to  be  pushed  into  Kor- 
man and  his  deadly  blaster. 


31 

The  halls  remained  deserted, 
possibly  by  arrangement. 

Maybe  I’d  better  wait  till  we 
reach  his  ship,  Gibson  thought.  I 
ought  to  he  able  to  figure  a way  be- 
fore we  reach  Nessus.  I had  the 
brains  to  fool  Haas  and  . . . 

He  winced,  recalling  Chairman 
Diamond’s  theory  of  the  difference 
between  intelligence  and  wisdom. 

The  obscene  swine!  he  screamed 
silently. 

Colonel  Korman  grunted  warn- 
ingly,  and  Gibson  took  the  indi- 
cated turn. 

They  entered  the  spaceship  from 
an  underground  chamber,  and 
Gibson  learned  the  reason  for  his 
executioner’s  assurance  when  the 
latter  chained  him  to  one  of  the 
pneumatic  acceleration  seats.  The 
chain  was  fragile  in  appearance,  but 
he  knew  he  would  not  be  free  to 
move  until  Korman  so  desired. 

More  of  their  insane  brand  of 
cleverness!  he  reflected.  That’s  the 
sort  of  thing  they  do  succeed  in 
thinking  of.  They’re  all  crazy!  Why 
did  I ever  . . . 

But  he  shrank  from  the  question 
he  feared  to  answer.  To  drag  out 
into  the  open  his  petty,  selfish  rea- 
sons, shorn  of  the  tinsel  glamor  of 
so-called  “service”  and  “progress,” 
would  be  too  painful. 


After  the  first  series  of 

accelerations,  he  roused  himself 
from  his  beaten  stupor  enough  to 
note  that  Korman  was  taking  a 
strange  course  for  reaching  Nessus. 
Then,  entirely  too  close  to  ‘the 
planet  and  its  satellites  to  ensure 

(Continued  on  page  118) 


A grim  tale  of  a future  in  which  everyone  is  desperate  to  escape 
reality,  and  a hero  who  wants  to  have  his  wine  and  drink  it,  too. 


A BOTTLE  OF 

OU  Wine 

By  Richard  O.  Lewis 

Illustrated  by  KELLY  FREAS 


"LTERBERT  HYREL  settled  him- 
self  more  comfortably  in  his 
easy  chair,  extended  his  short  legs 
further  toward  the  fireplace,  and  let 
his  eyes  travel  cautiously  in  the  gen- 
eral direction  of  his  wife. 

She  was  in  her  chair  as  usual,  her 
long  legs  curled  up  beneath  her, 
the  upper  half  of  her  face  hidden 
in  the  bulk  of  her  personalized, 
three-dimensional  telovis.  The  telo- 
vis,  of  a stereoscopic  nature,  seem- 
ingly brought  the  performers  with 
all  their  tinsel  and  color  directly 
into  the  room  of  the  watcher. 

Hyrel  had  no  way  of  seeing  into 
the  plastic  affair  she  wore,  but  he 
guessed  from  the  expression  on  the 
lower  half  of  her  face  that  she  was 
watching  one  of  the  newer  black- 
market  sex-operas.  In  any  event, 
there  would  be  no  sound,  move- 
ment, or  sign  of  life  from  her  for 
the  next  three  hours.  To  break  the 
thread  of  the  play  for  even  a mo- 


ment would  ruin  all  the  previous 
emotional  build-up. 

There  had  been  a time  when  he 
hated  her  for  those  long  and  silent 
evenings,  lonely  hours  during 
which  he  was  completely  ignored. 
It  was  different  now,  however,  for 
those  hours  furnished  him  with 
time  for  an  escape  of  his  own. 

His  lips  curled  into  a tight  smile 
and  his  right  hand  fondled  the  un- 
obtrusive switch  beneath  his  trou- 
ser leg.  He  did  not  press  the  switch. 
He  would  wait  a few  minutes 
longer.  But  it  was  comforting  to 
know  that  it  was  there,  exhilara- 
ting to  know  that  he  could  escape 
for  a few  hours  by  a mere  flick  of 
his  finger. 

He  let  his  eyes  stray  to  the  dim 
light  of  the  artificial  flames  in  the 
fireplace.  His  hate  for  her  was  not 
bounded  merely  by  those  lonely 
hours  she  had  forced  upon  him. 
No,  it  was  far  more  encompassing. 


34 


RICHARD  O.  LEWIS 


He  hated  her  with  a deep,  burn- 
ing savagery  that  was  deadly  in  its 
passion.  He  hated  her  for  her 
money,  the  money  she  kept  securely 
from  him.  He  hated  her  for  the 
paltry  allowance  she  doled  out  to 
him,  as  if  he  were  an  irresponsible 
child.  It  was  as  if  she  were  con- 
stantly reminding  him  in  every 
glance  and  gesture,  “I  made  a bad 
bargain  when  I married  you.  You 
wanted  me,  my  money,  everything, 
and  had  nothing  to  give  in  return 
except  your  own  doltish  self.  You 
set  a trap  for  me,  baited  with  lies 
and  a false  front.  Now  you  are 
caught  in  your  own  trap  and  will 
remain  there  like  a mouse  to  eat 
from  my  hand  whatever  crumbs  I 
stoop  to  give  you.” 

But  some  day  his  hate  would  be 
appeased.  Yes,  some  day  soon  he 
would  kill  her! 

He  shot  a sideways  glance  at  her, 
wondering  if  by  chance  she  sus- 
pected . . . She  hadn’t  moved.  Her 
lips  were  pouted  into  a half  smile; 
the  sex-opera  had  probably 
reached  one  of  its  more  pleasur- 
able moments. 

Hyrel  let  his  eyes  shift  back  to 
the  fireplace  again.  Yes,  he  would 
kill  her.  Then  he  would  claim 
a rightful  share  of  her  money,  be 
rid  of  her  debasing  dominance. 


He  let  the  thought  run 
around  through  his  head,  sa- 
voring it  with  mental  taste  buds. 
He  would  not  kill  her  tonight.  No, 
nor  the  next  night.  He  would  wait, 
wait  until  he  had  sucked  the  last 
measure  of  pleasure  from  the 
thought. 

It  was  like  having  a bottle  of 


rare  old  wine  on  a shelf  where  it 
could  be  viewed  daily.  It  was  like 
being  able  to  pause  again  and 
again  before  the  bottle,  hold  it  up 
to  the  light,  and  say  to  it,  “Some 
day,  when  my  desire  for  you  has 
reached  the  ultimate,  I shall  un- 
stopper you  quietly  and  sip  you 
slowly  to  the  last  soul-satisfying 
drop.”  As  long  as  the  bottle  re- 
mained there  upon  the  shelf  it  was 
symbolic  of  that  pleasurable  mo- 
ment. . . . 

He  snapped  out  of  his  reverie 
and  realized  he  had  been  wasting 
precious  moments.  There  would  be 
time  enough  tomorrow  for  gloat- 
ing. Tonight,  there  were  other 
things  to  do.  Pleasurable  things. 
He  remembered  the  girl  he  had 
met  the  night  before,  and  smiled 
smugly.  Perhaps  she  would  be 
awaiting  him  eVen  now.  If  not, 
there  would  be  another  one.  . . 

He  settled  himself  deeper  into 
the  chair,  glanced  once  more  at  his 
wife,  then  let  his  head  lean  com- 
fortably back  against  the  chair’s 
headrest.  His  hand  upon  his  thigh 
felt  the  thin  mesh  that  cloaked  his 
body  beneath  his  clothing  like  a 
sheer  stocking.  His  fingers  went 
again  to  the  tiny  switch.  Again  he 
hesitated. 

Herbert  Hyrel  knew  no  more 
about  the  telporter  suit  he  wore 
than  he  did  about  the  radio  in  the 
corner,  the  TV  set  against  the  wall, 
or  the  personalized  telovis  his  wife 
was  wearing.  You  pressed  one  of 
the  buttons  on  the  radio;  music 
came  out.  You  pressed  a button 
and  clicked  a dial  on  the  TV ; 
music  and  pictures  came  out.  You 
pressed  a button  and  made  an  ad- 
justment on  the  telovis;  three  di- 


A BOTTLE  OF  OLD  WINE 


35 


itiensional,  emotion-colored  pic- 
tures leaped  into  the  room.  You 
pressed  a tiny  switch  on  the  telpor- 
ter  suit ; you  were  whisked  away  to 
a receiving  set  you  had  previously 
set  up  in  secret. 

He  knew  that  the  music  and  the 
Images  of  the  performers  on  the 
Tv  and  telovis  were  brought  to  his 
room  by  some  form  of  electrical  im- 
pulse or  wave  while  the  actual  mu- 
sicians and  performers  remained  in 
the  studio.  He  knew  that  when  he 
pressed  the  switch  on  his  thigh 
something  within  him — his  ecto- 
plasm, higher  self,  the  thing  spirits 
use  for  materialization,  whatever 
its  real  name — streamed  out  of  him 
along  an  invisible  channel,  leaving 
his  body  behind  in  the  chair  in  a 
conscious  but  dream-like  state.  His 
other  self  materialized  in  a small 
cabin  in  a hidden  nook  between  a 
highway  and  a river  where  he  had 
installed  the  receiving  set  a month 
ago. 

He  thought  once  more  of  the  girl 
who  might  be  waiting  for  him, 
smiled,  and  pressed  the  switch. 

'T'HE  DANK  AIR  of  the  cabin 
was  chill  to  Herbert  Hyrel’s 
naked  flesh.  He  fumbled  through 
the  darkness  for  the  clothing  he 
kept  there,  found  his  shorts  and 
trousers,  got  hurriedly  into  them, 
then  flicked  on  a pocket  lighter  and 
ignited  a stub  of  candle  upon  the 
table.  By  the  wavering  light,  he  fin- 
ished dressing  in  the  black  satin 
clothing,  the  white  shirt,  the  flow- 
ing necktie  and  tarn.  He  invoiced 
the  contents  of  his  billfold.  Not 
much.  And  his  monthly  pittance 
was  still  two  weeks  away. . . 


He  had  skimped  for  six  months 
to  salvage  enough  money  from  his 
allowance  to  make  a down  pay- 
ment on  the  telporter  suit.  Since 
then,  his  expenses — monthly  pay- 
ments for  the  suit,  cabin  rent,  costly 
liquor — had  forced  him  to  place  his 
nights  of  escape  on  strict  ration.  He 
could  not  go  on  this  way,  he  real- 
ized. Not  now.  Not  since  he  had 
met  the  girl.  He  had  to  have  more 
money.  Perhaps  he  could  not  af- 
ford the  luxury  of  leaving  the  wine 
bottle  longer  upon  the  shelf  .... 

Riverside  Club,  where  Hyrel  ar- 
rived by  bus  and  a hundred  yards 
of  walking,  was  exclusive.  It  ca- 
tered to  a clientele  that  had  but 
three  things  in  common:  money,  a 
desire  for  utter  self-abandonment, 
and  a sales  slip  indicating  owner- 
ship of  a telporter  suit.  The  club 
was  of  necessity  expensive,  for  self- 
telportation  was  strictly  illegal,  and 
police  protection  came  high. 

Herbert  Hyrel  adjusted  his  white, 
silken  mask  carefully  at  the  door 
and  shoved  his  sales  slip  through  a 
small  aperture  where  it  was  thor- 
oughly scanned  by  unseen  eyes.  A 
buzzer  sounded  an  instant  later,  the 
lock  on  the  door  clicked,  and  Hyrel 
pushed  through  into  the  exhilara- 
ting warmth  of  music  and  laughter. 

The  main  room  was  large.  Hid- 
den lights  along  the  walls  sent  slow 
beams  of  red,  blue,  Vermillion, 
green,  yellow  and  pink  trailing 
across  the  domed  ceiling  in  a het- 
erogeneous pattern.  The  colored 
beams  mingled,  diffused,  spread, 
were  caught  up  by  mirrors  of  vari- 
ous tints  which  diffused  and  min- 
gled the  lights  once  more  until  the 
whole  effect  was  an  ever-changing 
panorama  of  softly-melting  shades. 


36 


RICHARD  O.  LEWIS 


The  gay  and  bizarre  costumes  of 
the  masked  revelers  on  the  dance 
floor  and  at  the  tables,  unearthly  in 
themselves,  were  made  even  more 
so  by  the  altering  light.  Music 
flooded  the  room  from  unseen 
sources.  Laughter  — hysterical, 
drunken,  filled  with  utter  abandon- 
ment— came  from  the  dance  floor, 
the  tables,  and  the  private  booths 
and  rooms  hidden  cleverly  within 
the  walls. 

Hyrel  pushed  himself  to  an  un- 
occupied table,  sat  down  and  or- 
dered a bottle  of  cheap  whiskey.  He 
would  have  preferred  champagne, 
but  his  depleted  finances  forbade 
the  more  discriminate  taste. 

When  his  order  arrived,  he 
poured  a glass  tumbler  half  full 
and  consumed  it  eagerly  while  his 
eyes  scanned  the  room  in  search  of 
the  girl.  He  couldn’t  see  her  in  the 
dim  swirl  of  color.  Had  she  ar- 
rived? Perhaps  she  was  wearing  a 
different  costume  than  shs  had  the 
night  before.  If  so,  recognition 
might  prove  difficult.  ' 

He  poured  himself  another  drink, 
promising  himself  he  would  go  in 
search  of  her  when  the  liquor  be- 
gan to  take  effect. 

A woman  clad  in  the  revealing 
garb  of  a Persian  dancer  threw  an 
arm  about  him  from  behind  and 
kissed  him  on  the  cheek  through 
the  veil  which  covered  the  lower 
part  of  her  face. 

“Hi,  honey,”  she  giggled  into  his 
ear.  “Havin’  a time?” 

He  reached  for  the  white  arm  to 
pull  her  to  him,  but  she  eluded  his 
grasp  and  reeled  away  into  the 
waiting  arms  of  a tall  toreador. 
Hyrel  gulped  his  whiskey  and 
watched  her  nestle  into  the  arms  of 


her  partner  and  begin  with  him  a 
sinuous,  suggestive  dance.  The 
whiskey  had  begun  its  warming  ef- 
fect, and  he  laughed. 

This  was  the  land  of  the  lotus 
eaters,  the  sanctuary  of  the  escap- 
ists, the  haven  of  all  who  wished  to 
cast  off  their  shell  of  inhibition  and 
become  the  thing  they  dreamed 
themselves  to  be.  Here  one  could 
be  among  his  own  kind,  an  actor 
upon  a gay  stage,  a gaudy  butter- 
fly metamorphosed  from  the  slug, 
a knight  of  old. 

The  Persian  dancing  girl  was 
probably  the  wife  of  a boorish  oaf 
whose  idea  of  romance  was  spend- 
ing an  evening  telling  his  wife  how 
he  came  to  be  a successful  bank 
president.  But  she  had  found  her 
means  of  escape.  Perhaps  she  had 
pleaded  a sick  headache  and  had 
retired  to  her  room.  And  there  upon 
the  bed  now  reposed  her  shell  of 
reality  while  her  inner  self,  the 
shadowy  one,  completely  material- 
ized, became  an  exotic  thing  from 
the  East  in  this  never-never  land. 

The  man,  the  toreador,  had 
probably  closeted  himself  within  his 
library  with  a set  of  account  books 
and  had  left  strict  orders  not  to  be 
disturbed  until  he  had  finished 
with  them. 

Both  would  have  terrific  hang- 
overs in  the  morning.  But  that,  of 
course,  would  be  fully  compensated 
for  by  the  memories  of  the  evening. 

Plyrel  chuckled.  The  situation 
struck  him  as  being  funny:  the 
shadowy  self  got  drunk  and  had  a 
good  time,  and  the  outer  husk  suf- 
fered the  hangover  in  the  morning. 
Strange.  Strange  how  a device  such 
as  the  telporter  suit  could  cause  the 
shadow  of  each  bodily  cell  to  leave 


A BOTTLE  OF  OLD  WINE 


37 


the  body,  materialize,  and  become 
a reality  in  its  own  right.  And 

yet . . . 


"LTE  LOOKED  at  the  heel  of  his 
left  hand.  There  was  a long, 
irregular  scar  there.  It  was  the  re- 
sult of  a cut  he  had  received  near- 
ly three  weeks  ago  when  he  had 
fallen  over  this  very  table  and  had 
rammed  his  hand  into  a sliver  of 
broken  champagne  glass.  Later  that 
evening,  upon  re-telporting  back 
home,  the  pain  of  the  cut  had  re- 
mained in  his  hand,  but  there  was 
no  sign  of  the  cut  itself  on  the  hand 
of  his  outer  self.  The  scar  was  pe- 
culiar to  the  shadowy  body  only. 
There  was  something  about  the 
shadowy  body  that  carried  the 
hurts  to  the  outer  body,  but  not  the 
scars  . . . 

Sudden  laughter  broke  out  near 
him,  and  he  turned  quickly  in  that 
direction.  A group  of  gaily  cos- 
tumed revelers  was  standing  in  a 
semi-circle  about  a small  mound  of 
clothing  upon  the  floor.  It  was  the 
costume  of  the  toreador. 

Hyrel  laughed,  too.  It  had  hap- 
pened many  times  before — a cos- 
tume suddenly  left  empty  as  its 
owner,  due  to  a threat  of  discovery 
at  home,  had  had  to  press  the 
switch  in  haste  to  bring  his  shad- 
owy self — and  complete  conscious- 
ness— back  to  his  outer  self  in  a 
hurry. 

A waiter  picked  up  the  clothing. 
He  would  put  it  safely  away  so  that 
the  owner  could  claim  it  upon  his 
next  visit  to  the  club.  Another 
waiter  placed  a fresh  bottle  of 
whiskey  on  the  table  before  Hyrel, 
and  Hyrel  paid  him  for  it. 


The  whiskey,  reaching  his  head 
now  in  surges  of  warm  cheerful- 
ness, was  filling  him  with  abandon- 
ment, courage,  and  a desire  for 
merriment.  He  pushed  himself  up 
from  the  table,  joined  the  merry 
throng,  threw  his  arm  about  the 
Persian  dancer,  drew  her  close. 

They  began  dancing  slowly  to 
the  throbbing  rhythm,  dancing  and 
holding  on  to  each  other  tightly. 
Hyrel  could  feel  her  hot  breath 
through  her  veil  upon  his  neck,  add- 
ing to  the  headiness  of  the  liquor. 
His  feeling  of  depression  and  inferi- 
ority flowed  suddenly  from  him. 
Once  again  he  was  the  all-conquer- 
ing male. 

His  arm  trembled  as  it  drew  her 
still  closer  to  him  and  he  began 
dancing  directly  and  purposefully 
toward  the  shadows  of  a clump  of 
artificial  palms  near  one  comer  of 
the  room.  There  was  an  exit  to  the 
garden  behind  the  palms. 

Half  way  there  they  passed  a se- 
cluded booth  from  which  pro- 
truded a long  leg  clad  in  black 
mesh  stocking.  Hyrel  paused  as  he 
recognized  that  part  of  the  cos- 
tume. It  was  she!  The  girl!  The 
one  he  had  met  so  briefly  the  night 
before! 

His  arm  slid  away  from  the  Per- 
sian dancer,  took  hold  of  the  mesh- 
clad  leg,  and  pulled.  A female  form 
followed  the  leg  from  the  booth 
and  fell  into  his  arms.  He  held  her 
tightly,  kissed  her  white  neck,  let 
her  perfume  send  his  thoughts  reel- 
ing. 

“Been  looking  for  me,  honey?” 
she  whispered,  her  voice  deep  and 
throaty. 

“You  know  it!” 

He  began  whisking  her  away  to- 


38 


RICHARD  O.  LEWIS 


ward  the  palms.  The  Persian  girl 
was  pulled  into  the  booth. 

Yes,  she  was  wearing  the  same 
costume  she  had  worn  the  night 
before,  that  of  a can-can  dancer  of 
the  90’s.  The  mesh  hose  that  en- 
cased her  shapely  legs  were  held  up 
by  flowered  supporters  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  leave  four  inches  of 
white  leg  exposed  between  hose  top 
and  lacy  panties.  Her  skirt,  frilled 
to  suggest  innumerable  petticoats, 
fell  away  at  each  hip,  leaving  the 
front  open  to  expose  the  full  length 
of  legs.  She  wore  a wig  of  platinum 
hair  encrusted  with  jewels  that 
sparkled  in  the  lights.  Her  jewel- 
studded  mask  was  as  white  as  her 
hair  and  covered  the  upper  half  of 
her  face,  except  for  the  large 
almond  slits  for  her  eyes.  A white 
purse,  jewel  crusted,  dangled  from 
one  arm. 

He  stopped  once  before  reaching 
the  palms,  drew  her  closer,  kissed 
her  long  and  ardently.  Then  he  be- 
gan pulling  her  on  again. 

She  drew  back  when  they 
reached  the  shelter  of  the  fronds. 
“Champagne,  first,”  she  whispered 
huskily  into  his  ear. 

His  heart  sank.  He  had  very  lit- 
tle money  left.  Well,  it  might  buy 
a cheap  brand  .... 

SHE  SIPPED  her  champagne 
slowly  and  provocatively  across 
the  table  from  him.  Her  eyes  spar- 
kled behind  the  almond  slits  of  her 
mask,  caught  the  color  changes  and 
cast  them  back.  She  was  wearing 
contact  lenses  of  a garish  green. 

He  wished  she  would  hurry  with 
her  drink.  He  had  horrible  visions 
of  his  wife  at  home  taking  off  her 


telovis  and  coming  to  his  chair.  He 
would  then  have  to  press  the 
switch  that  would  jerk  his  shadowy 
self  back  along  its  invisible  con- 
necting cord,  jerk  him  back  and 
leave  but  a small  mound  of  clothes 
upon  the  chair  at  the  table. 

Deep  depression  laid  hold  of 
him.  He  would  not  be  able  to  see 
her  after  tonight  until  he  received 
his  monthly  dole  two  weeks  hence. 
She  wouldn’t  wait  that  long.  Some- 
one else  would  have  her. 

Unless  . . . 

Yes,  he  knew  now  that  he  was 
going  to  kill  his  wife  as  soon  as  the 
opportunity  presented  itself.  It 
would  be  a simple  matter.  With  the 
aid  of  the  telporter  suit,  he  could 
establish  an  iron-clad  alibi. 

He  took  a long  drink  of  whiskey 
and  looked  at  the  dancers  about 
him.  Sight  of  their  gay  costumes 
heightened  his  depression.  He  was 
wearing  a cheap  suit  of  satin,  all  he 
could  afford.  But  some  day  soon  he 
would  show  them!  Some  time  soon 
he  would  be  dressed  as  gaily  . . . 

“Something  troubling  you, 
honey?” 

His  gaze  shot  back  to  her  and 
she  blurred  slightly  before  his  eyes. 
“No.  Nothing  at  all!”  He  sum- 
moned a sickly  smile  and  clutched 
her  hand  in  his.  “Come  on.  Let’s 
dance.” 

He  drew  her  from  the  chair  and 
into  his  arms.  She  melted  toward 
him  as  if  desiring  to  become  a part 
of  him.  A tremor  of  excitement 
surged  through  him  and  threat- 
ened to  turn  his  knees  into  quiver- 
ing jelly.  He  could  not  make  his 
feet  conform  to  the  flooding 
rhythm  of  the  music.  He  half  stum- 


A BOTTLE  OF  OLD  WINE 


39 


bled,  half  pushed  her  along  past  the 
booths. 

In  the  shelter  of  the  palms  he 
drew  her  savagely  to  him.  “Let’s — 
let’s  go  outside.”  His  voice  was  lit- 
tle more  than  a croak. 

“But,  honey!”  She  pushed  her- 
self away,  her  low  voice  madden- 
ing him.  “Don’t  you  have  a private 
room?  A girl  doesn’t  like  to  be 
taken  outside  . . . .” 

Her  words  bit  into  his  brain  like 
the  blade  of  a hot  knife. 

No,  he  didn’t  have  a private 
room  at  the  club  like  the  others.  A 
private  room  for  his  telporter  re- 
ceiver, a private  room  where  he 
could  take  a willing  guest.  No!  He 
couldn’t  afford  it!  No!  No!  NO! 
His  lot  was  a cheap  suit  of  satin! 
Cheap  whiskey!  Cheap  cham- 
pagne! A cheap  shack  by  the 
river  . . . 

An  inarticulate  cry  escaped  his 
twisted  lips.  He  clutched  her  rough- 
ly to  him  and  dragged  her  through 
the  door  and  into  the  moonlight, 
whiskey  and  anger  lending  him 
brutal  strength. 

He  pulled  her  through  the  de- 
serted garden.  All  the  others  had 
private  rooms!  He  pulled  her  to 
the  far  end,  behind  a clump  of 
squatty  firs.  His  hands  clawed  at 
her.  He  tried  to  smother  her  mouth 
with  kisses. 

She  eluded  him  deftly.  “But, 
honey!”  Her  voice  had  gone  deeper 
into  her  throat.  “I  just  want  to  be 
sure  about  things.  If  you  can’t  af- 
ford one  of  the  private  rooms — if 
you  can’t  afford  to  show  me  a good 
time — if  you  can’t  come  here  real 
often  . . 

The  whiskey  pounded  and 
throbbed  at  his  brain  like  blows 


from  an  unseen  club.  His  ego 
curled  and  twisted  within  him  like 
a headless  serpent. 

“I’ll  have  money!”  he  shouted, 
struggling  to  hold  her.  “I’ll  have 
plenty  of  money!  After  tonight!” 
“Then  we’ll  wait,”  she  said. 
“We’ll  wait  until  tomorrow  night.” 
“No!”  he  screamed.  “You  don’t 
believe  me!  You’re  like  the  others! 
You  think  I’m  no  good!  But  I’ll 
show  you!  I’ll  show  all  of  you!” 

SHE  HAD  GONE  coldly  rigid  in 
his  arms,  unyielding. 

Madness  added  to  the  pounding 
in  his  brain.  Tears  welled  into  his 
eyes. 

“I’ll  show  you!  I’ll  kill  her!  Then 
I’ll  have  money!”  The  hands 
clutching  her  shoulders  shook  her 
drunkenly.  “You  wait  here!  I’ll  go 
home  and  kill  her  now!  Then  I’ll 
be  back!” 

“Silly  boy!”  Her  low  laughter 
rang  hollowly  in  his  ears.  “And  just 
who  is  it  you  are  going  to  kill?” 
“My  wife!”  he  cried.  “My  wife! 

I’ll  . . .” 

A sudden  sobering  thought 
struck  him.  He  was  talking  too 
much.  And  he  wasn’t  making  sense. 
He  shouldn’t  be  telling  her  this. 
Anyway,  he  couldn’t  get  the  money 
tonight  even  if  he  did  kill  his  wife. 

“And  so  you  are  going  to  kill 
your  wife  . . . 

He  blinked  the  tears  from  his 
eyes.  His  chest  was  heaving,  his 
heart  pounding.  He  looked  at  her 
shimmering  form.  “Y-yes,”  he  whis- 
pered. 

Her  eyes  glinted  strangely  in  the 
light  of  the  moon.  Her  handbag 
glinted  as  she  opened  it,  and  some- 


40 


RICHARD  0.  LEWIS 


thing  she  took  from  it  glittered 
coldly  in  her  hand. 

“Fool!” 

The  first  shot  tore  squarely 
through  his  heart.  And  while  he 
stood  staring  at  her,  mouth  agape, 
a second  shot  burned  its  way 
through  his  bewildered  brain. 

A/TRS.  HERBERT  HYREL  re- 
moved  the  telovis  from  her 
head  and  laid  it  carefully  aside. 
She  uncoiled  her  long  legs  from  be- 
neath her,  walked  to  her  husband’s 
chair,  and  stood  for  a long  moment 
looking  down  at  him,  her  lips 
drawn  back  in  contempt.  Then  she 
bent  over  him  and  reached  down 
his  thigh  until  her  fingers  contacted 
the  small  switch. 

Seconds  later,  a slight  tremor 
sjiook  Hyrel’s  body.  His  eyes 
snapped  open,  air  escaped  his  lungs. 


his  lower  jaw  sagged  inanely,  and 
his  head  lolled  to  one  side. 

She  stood  a moment  longer, 
watching  his  eyes  become  glazed 
and  sightless.  Then  she  walked  to 
the  telephone. 

“Police?”  she  said.  “This  is  Mrs. 
Herbert  Hyrel.  Something  horrible 
has  happened  to  my  husband. 
Please  come  over  immediately. 
Bring  a doctor.” 

She  hung  up,  went  to  her  bath- 
room, stripped  off  her  clothing, 
and  slid  carefully  out  of  her  tel- 
porter  suit.  This  she  folded  neatly 
and  tucked  away  into  the  false  back 
of  the  medicine  cabinet.  She  found 
a fresh  pair  of  blue,  plastifur  pa- 
jamas and  got  into  them. 

She  was  just  arriving  back  into 
the  living  room,  tying  the  cord  of 
her  dressing  gown  about  her  slim 
waist,  when  she  heard  the  sound  of 
the  police  siren  out  front. 


THE  END 


DEPARTMENT  OF  SAFE  PREDICTIONS 

CAUTIOUSLY,  modestly,  and  with  full  knowledge  of  the  quantities 
of  fine  science  fiction  being  published  these  days,  we  guarantee  that 
A CASE  OF  CONSCIENCE,  by  James  Blish,  will  rate  as  one  of  the 
best  five  short  novels  of  1953.  An  outstandingly  complete  and  con- 
vincing examination  of  an  alien  planet  and  its  civilization ; a compel- 
ling portrait  of  a highly  unusual,  and  unusually  human,  hero;  a sus- 
penseful development  of  a complex  problem  which  will  leave  you 
with  plenty  to  ponder  and  argue — this  is  the  stuff  of  which  classics 
are  made,  and  it’s  coming  in  the  September  issue  (on  sale  July  10). 
IF  is  proud  of  this  story;  you  won’t  want  to  miss  it! 


Sound  the  fanfare!  Beat  the  drums! 
Shout  hosannas!  Here  he  comes  , . . 


CELEBRITY 

By  James  McKimmey,  Jr. 

Illustrated  by  PAUL  ORBAN 


JUNE  19,  1978.  Celebrity  day.  monds.  A bird  chirped.  Another. 

The  city  stretched.  Empty  The  city  yawned, 
streets  glistened  from  the  bath  of  Rows  of  houses  lay  like  square 
a water  truck.  Dew-wet  grass  ivory  beads  on  patches  of  green 
winked  at  the  fresh  peeping  sun,  felt.  A boy  drove  his  bicycle  down 
like  millions  of  shimmering  dia-  the  middle  of  an  elm-bordered  av- 


42 


JAMES  McKIMMEY,  JR. 


enue,  whistling  loudly,  while  tightly 
rolled  newspapers  arced  from  his 
hand  and  slapped  against  porches, 

Lights  snapped  on  in  a thousand 
windows,  shining  yellowly  against 
the  cool  whiteness  of  dawn.  Men 
blinked  and  touched  beard-stub- 
bled  chins.  Women  moved  sleepily 
toward  porcelain  and  chrome  kitch- 
ens. 

A truck  roared  and  garbage  pails 
rattled.  There  was  a smell  of  sour 
orange  rinds  and  wet  leaves  and  un- 
folding flowers.  Over  this  came  the 
smell  of  toasting  bread  and  frying 
bacon. 

Doors  swung  open,  slippered  feet 
padded  across  porches  and  hands 
groped  for  the  rolled  newspapers. 
The  air  was  stricken  with  the  blar- 
ing sound  of  transcribed  music  and 
the  excited  voices  of  commercial 
announcers.  The  doors  swung  shut 
and  the  sounds  were  muted. 

A million  people  shifted  and 
stretched  and  scratched.  The  sun 
rose  above  the  horizon. 

Celebrity  day. 


Doors  slammed  again, 

and  half-consumed  cups  of 
coffee  lay  cooling  behind.  Children 
wiped  at  sleepy  eyes  and  mothers 
swept  crumbs,  touching  self-con- 
scious fingers  at  their  own  bed-ruf- 
fled hair.  Laborers  and  clerks  and 
lawyers  and  doctors  strode  down 
sidewalks  and  climbed  into  automo- 
biles and  busses  and  sleek-nosed  ele- 
vated trains.  The  city  moved. 

To  the  center  of  the  city,  where 
the  tall  buildings  stretched  to  the 
lighting  sky,  came  the  horde,  like 
thousands  of  ants  toward  a comb  of 
honey.  Wheels  sang  and  whined. 


Horns  blasted.  Whistles  blew. 

And  waiting,  strung  above  the 
wide  streets  between  the  cold  mar- 
quees and  the  dead  neon  tubes, 
were  the  banners  and  the  flags  and 
the  bunting. 

The  air  warmed  and  the  sun 
brightened.  Voices  chattered.  El- 
bows nudged.  Mouths  smiled,  teeth 
shone,  and  there  was  the  sound  of 
laughter,  rising  over  the  pushing 
throngs.  The  city  was  happy. 

The  bunting  dipped  and  the 
banners  fluttered  and  the  flags 
whipped.  At  the  edge  of  the  city, 
the  airport  tightened  itself.  Wait- 
ing, waiting  for  the  silver  and  blue 
rocket.  The  rocket  of  the  Celebrity. 

A large  hotel,  towering  above  the 
pulsing  streets,  began  the  quiver  of 
activity.  As  though  a great  electric 
current  had  been  run  through  its 
cubes  and  shafts  and  hollows,  the 
hotel  crackled.  Desk  clerks  clicked 
bells  and  bell  boys  hopped.  Eleva- 
tors rose  and  fell.  In  the  cellar, 
wine  bottles  were  dusted  by  quick, 
nervous  hands.  In  the  kitchen,  a 
towering  cake  was  frosted  and  dec- 
orated. Orders  cracked.  Hands 
flew  and  feet  chattered  against  tile. 
In  one  rich  expansive  suite  a giant 
hoop  of  multi-colored  flowers  was 
placed  in  the  center  of  a room. 

It  was  in  the  air.  Laughter,  awe, 
worship,  excitement! 

Ropes  went  up  and  stretched  be- 
tween lamp  posts.  Blue-coated  men 
on  horses  began  blocking  streets. 
Old  women  with  wooden  boxes, 
children  with  flashing  eyes,  men  in 
rich  suits  and  tattered  suits  began 
filling  the  sidewalks. 

Curbs  became  lined  with  people. 
Bars  threw  open  doors  and  fresh 
air  met  stale  air.  Men  with  fat 


CELEBRITY 


43 


faces,  thin  faces,  white  faces,  red 
faces,  twitching  with  the  anticipa- 
tion of  holiday  freedom,  gulped 
jiggers  of  raw  whiskey  and  shud- 
dered happily. 

Children  giggled  and  yelled  and 
sprinted  in  crazy  zig-zags.  Men  in 
white  caps  hustled  in  front  of  the 
lined  curbs,  shouting,  carrying 
their  boxes  of  ice-cream.  Men  with 
buttons,  men  with  pennants,  men 
with  balloons  joined  the  shouting, 
and  the  sound  rose  in  the  air  and 
the  city  smiled  and  shifted  and  its 
heart  pounded. 

The  hotel  whirred  inside  itself. 
The  airport  tensed  and  searched  the 
sky. 


IME  MOVED  and  the  swell- 
ing throngs  jammed  the  side- 
walks, raising  their  strengthening 
sound  between  the  tall  buildings. 
Windows  popped  open  and  faces 
beamed.  Tentative  showers  of  con- 
fetti drifted  down  through  the  air. 

The  city  waited,  its  pulse  thump- 
ing. 

The  rocket  was  a black  point  in 
the  sky.  It  grew.  White-suited  men 
scattered  over  the  landing  strip. 
Photographers  crouched.  Bulbs 
snapped  into  reflectors.  Cameras 
pointed. 

The  rocket  landed.  A door 
snapped  open.  Blue  uniforms  con- 
verged and  flash  bulbs  popped. 
There  were  shouts  and  orders  and 


men  running.  Gates  swung  and 
there  was  a blue-rimmed  move- 
ment to  a black  open  car.  Sirens 
moaned,  screamed.  And  the  black 
car  was  moving  swiftly  into  the 
city. 

Beneath  the  buildings,  marching 
bands  in  red  and  blue  and  yellow 
uniforms  stood  assembled.  Girls  in 
short  skirts  and  tassled  hats  spun 
silver  batons  into  the  warm  air. 
Bare  legs  kicked.  Black  boots 
flashed. 

The  crowd  swayed  against  the 
ropes,  and  there  was  laughter  and 
sweating  and  squinting. 

The  black  car  reached  the  heart 
of  the  city.  Sirens  died.  Rows  of 
men  snapped  to  attention.  Police- 
men aligned  their  motorcycles. 

A baton  shimmered  high  against 
the  sun  and  came  down. 

A cymbal  crashed.  Drums 
cracked.  Music  blared.  And  there 
was  a movement  down  the  street. 

The  black  car  rolled  along,  while 
tape  swept  down  from  the  build- 
ings in  long  swirling  ribbons.  There 
was  a snow  of  confetti.  And  from 
the  throats  of  the  people  came  the 
first  roar.  It  grew,  building,  build- 
ing in  volume,  and  the  city  thun- 
dered its  welcome  to  the  man  sit- 
ting upon  the  back  of  the  open  car, 
the  small  man  who  tipped  his  hat 
and  smiled  and  blinked  behind  his 
glasses:  Joseph  S.  Stettison,  B.A., 
B.S.,  M.S.,  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  L.M. 
(Hon.),  F.R.C.O.G. 


THE  END 


C.I.B.  Agent  Pell  used  his  head,  even  if  he  did  rely  on  hunches 
more  than  on  the  computer.  In  fact,  when  the  game  got  rough, 
he  found  that  to  use  his  head,  he  first  had  to  keep  it , 


Brink  of 

MADNESS 


By  Walt  Sheldon 

Illustrated  by  KELLY  FREAS 


The  night  the  visitors  came 
Richard  Pell  worked  late 
among  the  great  banks  of  crimino- 
logical computers.  He  whistled  to 
himself,  knowing  that  he  was  way 
off  key  but  not  caring.  Ciel,  his 
wife,  was  still  in  his  mind’s  eye; 
he’d  seen  her  on  the  viewer  and 
talked  with  her  not  ten  minutes  ago. 

“Be  home  shortly,  baby,”  he’d 
said,  “soon  as  I fill  in  a form  or 
two.” 

“All  right,  dear.  I’ll  wait,”  she’d 
answered,  with  just  the  slightest 
tone  of  doubt. 

It  was  an  important  night.  It 
was  at  once  their  second  anniver- 
sary and  the  beginning  of  their  sec- 
ond honeymoon.  Just  how  Pell — 
knobby,  more  or  less  homely,  and 
easygoing — had  won  himself  a 


lovely,  long-limbed  blonde  like  Ciel 
was  something  of  a mystery  to 
many  of  their  friends.  She  could 
hardly  have  married  him  for  his 
money.  Central  Investigation  Bu- 
reau agents  were  lucky  if  all  their 
extras  and  bonuses  brought  them 
up  to  a thousand  credits  a year. 

Pell  had  unquestionably  caught 
her  in  a romantic  moment.  Maybe 
that  was  part  of  the  trouble — part 
of  the  reason  they  needed  this  sec- 
ond honeymoon,  this  period  of  re- 
acquaintance so  badly.  Being  the 
wife  of  a C.I.B.  agent  meant  sitting 
at  home  nine-tenths  of  the  time 
while  he  was  working  on  a case,  and 
then  not  hearing  about  the  case  for 
security  reasons  during  the  one- 
tenth  of  the  time  he  was  with  her. 

Four  times  now  Pell  had  been 


46 


WALT  SHELDON 


ready  to  take  his  vacation;  four 
times  last  minute  business  had  come 
up.  No  more,  though,  by  golly.  To- 
night he’d  get  out  of  here  just  as 
quickly  as  . . . 

The  Identifier,  beyond  the  door, 
began  to  hum.  That  meant  some- 
body was  putting  his  hand  to  the 
opaque  screen,  and  if  the  scanner 
recognized  the  fingerprints  the 
door  would  open.  Pell  scowled  at 
the  bulky  shadows  outside. 

“Go  away,  whoever  you  are,”  he 
muttered  to  himself. 

Some  of  the  other  agents  were 
out  there,  no  doubt;  they  were  al- 
ways getting  sudden  inspirations 
late  at  night  and  returning  to  use 
the  computers  again.  In  fact,  it  had 
been  tactifully  suggested  to  Agent 
Richard  Pell  that  he  might  use  the 
computers  a little  more  himself  in- 
stead of  relying  on  hunches  as  he 
so  often  did.  “Investigation’s  a cold 
science,  not  a fancy  art,”  Chief 
Larkin  was  fond  of  saying  to  the 
group — with  his  eyes  on  Pell. 

Well,  whoever  it  was.  Pell  was 
definitely  through.  No  time-wasting 
conversation  for  him!  He  was 
ready  for  six  glorious  weeks  of 
saved-up  vacation  time.  He  and 
Ciel,  early  tomorrow,  would  grab 
a rocket  for  one  of  the  Moon  re- 
sorts, and  there  they’d  just  loaf  and 
relax  and  pay  attention  to  each 
other.  Try  to  regain  whatever  it 
was  they’d  had.  . . . 

The  door  opened  and  Chief 
Larkin  walked  in. 

Chief  Eustace  J.  Larkin  was  tall, 
in  his  forties,  bu+  still  boyishly  hand- 
some. He  dressed  expensively  and 


well.  He  was  dynamic  and  confident 
and  he  always  had  about  him  just 
the  faintest  aroma  of  very  expensive 
shaving  cologne.  He  had  a Master’s 
degree  in  criminology  and  his  rise 
to  the  post  of  Director,  C.I.B.,  had 
been  sudden,  dramatic  and  impres- 
sive. Not  the  least  of  his  talents  was 
a keen  sense  of  public  relations. 

“I — uh — was  on  my  way  out,” 
said  Pell.  He  reached  for  his  hat. 
Funny  about  hats:  few  people  trav- 
eled topside  anymore,  and  in  the 
climate-conditioned  tunnels  you 
didn’t  need  a hat.  But  C.I.B. 
agents  had  to  be  neat  and  digni- 
fied; regulations  required  hats  and 
ties  and  cuffs  and  lapels.  Thus,  you 
could  always  spot  a C.I.B.  agent  a 
mile  away. 

Larkin  had  a dimple  when  he 
smiled  and  Pell  would  bet  he  knew 
it.  “We’d  have  called  your  home  if 
we  hadn’t  found  you  here.  Sit 
down,  Dick.” 

Pell  sat  glumly.  For  the  first 
time,  he  noticed  the  men  who  had 
come  in  with  the  Chief.  He  recog- 
nized both.  One  was  fiftyish,  tall, 
solidly-built  and  well-dressed  on 
the  conservative  side.  His  face  was 
strong,  square  and  oddly  pale,  as  if 
someone  had  taken  finest  white 
marble  and  roughly  hacked  a face 
into  it.  Pell  had  seen  that  face  in 
faxpapers  often.  The  man  was 
Theodor  Rysland,  once  a wealthy 
corporation  lawyer,  now  a World 
Government  adviser  in  an  unoffi- 
cial way.  Some  admired  him  as  a 
selfless  public  servant;  others  swore 
he  was  a power-mad  tyrant.  Few 
were  indifferent. 

“I’m  sure  you  recognize  Mr.  Rys- 
land,” said  Chief  Larkin,  smiling. 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


47 


“And  this  is  Dr.  Walter  Nebel,  of 
the  World  Department  of  Educa- 
tion.” 

Dr.  Walter  Nebel  was  slight  and 
had  a head  remarkably  tiny  in  pro- 
portion to  the  rest  of  him.  He  wore 
cropped  hair.  His  eyes  were  turtle- 
lidded  and  at  first  impression  sleepy, 
and  then,  with  a second  look — ■ 
wary.  Pell  remembered  that  he  had 
won  fame  some  time  ago  by  discov- 
ering the  electrolytic  enzyme  in  the 
thought  process.  Pell  wasn’t  sure 
exactly  what  this  was,  but  the  fax- 
papers  had  certainly  made  a fuss 
about  it  at  the  time. 

He  shook  hands  with  the  two 
men  and  then  said  to  Larkin, 
“What’s  up?” 

“Patience,”  said  Larkin  and 
shuffled  chairs  into  place. 

Rysland  sat  down  solidly  and 
gravely;  Nebel  perched.  Rysland 
looked  at  Pell  with  a strong,  level 
stare  and  said,  “It’s  my  sincere 
hope  that  this  meeting  tonight  will 
prevent  resumption  of  the  war  with 
Venus.” 

Larkin  said,  “Amen.” 

Pell  stared  back  in  some  surprise. 
High-level  stuff! 

Rysland  saw  his  stare  and 
chuckled.  “Chief  Larkin  tells  me 
your  sympathies  are  more  or  less 
Universalist.  Not  that  it  would  be 
necessary,  but  it  helps.” 

“Oh,”  said  Pell,  with  mild  be- 
wilderment. The  difference  be- 
tween the  Universal  and  Defense 
parties  was  pretty  clear-cut.  The 
Universalists  hoped  to  resume  full 
relations  with  Venus  and  bring 
about  a really  secure  peace  through 
friendship  and  trade.  It  would  ad- 
mittedly be  a tough  struggle,  and 


the  Defenders  didn’t  think  it  was 
possible.  Forget  Venus,  said  they; 
fortify  Earth,  keep  the  line  of  de- 
marcation on  Mars,  and  sit  tight. 

“But  there  is,  as  you  may  know,” 
said  Rysland,  “a  third  course  in  our 
relations  with  Venus.” 

“There  is?”  asked  Pell.  From  the 
corner  of  his  eye  he  saw  Chief  Lar- 
kin looking  at  him  with  an  expres- 
sion of — what,  amusement?  Yes, 
amusement,  largely,  but  with  a 
touch  of  contempt,  too,  perhaps. 
Hard  to  say. 

“The  third  course,”  said  Rys- 
land, not  smiling,  “would  be  to  at- 
tack Venus  again,  resume  the  war, 
and  hope  to  win  quickly.  We  know 
Venus  is  exhausted  from  the  recent 
struggle.  A sudden,  forceful  attack 
might  possibly  subjugate  her.  At 
least,  that  is  the  argument  of  a cer- 
tain group  called  the  Supremists.” 

Dr.  Nebel  spoke  for  the  first 
time.  Pell  realized  that  the  man 
had  been  watching  him  closely.  His 
voice  was  sibilant ; it  seemed  to  drag 
itself  through  wet  grass.  “Also  Ve- 
nus Is  psychologically  unprepared 
for  war;  the  Supremists  believe  that, 
too.” 

Pell  reached  back  into  his  mem- 
ory. The  Supremists.  They  were  a 
minor  political  party — sort  of  a cult, 
too.  The  outfit  had  sprung  up  in 
the  last  year  or  so.  Supremists  be- 
lieved that  Earthmen,  above  all 
other  creatures,  had  a destiny — 
were  chosen — were  supreme.  They 
had  several  followers  as  delegates  in 
World  Congress.  General  impres- 
sion: slightly  crackpot. 

“The  Supremists,”  said  Theodor 
Rysland,  tapping  his  hard,  white 
palm,  and  leaning  forward,  “have 


48 


WALT  SHELDON 


been  calling  for  attack.  Aggression. 
Starting  the  war  with  Venus  all 
over  again.  And  they’re  not  only  a 
vociferous  nuisance.  They  have  an 
appeal  in  this  business  of  Earth- 
man’s  supremacy.  They’re  gaining 
converts  every  day.  In  short, 
they’ve  now  become  dangerous.” 


ELL  THOUGHT  it  over  as 
Rysland  talked.  Certainly  the 
idea  of  renewed  war  was  nightmar- 
ish. He’d  been  in  the  last  one:  who 
hadn’t?  It  had  started  in  2117,  the 
year  he  was  born,  and  it  had 
dragged  on  for  twenty-five  years 
until  T-day  and  the  truce.  The 
causes?  Well,  both  Earth  and  Ve- 
nus worked  the  mineral  deposits  on 
Mars  unimpeded  by  the  non-in- 
telligent  insectile  life  on  that 
planet,  and  the  original  arguments 
had  been  about  those  mineral  de- 
posits, though  there  were  enough 
for  a dozen  planets  there.  The 
causes  were  more  complicated  and 
obscure  than  that.  Semantics,  part- 
ly. There  was  freedom  as  Earth- 
men  saw  it  and  freedom  as  the  Ve- 
nusians  saw  it.  Same  with  honor 
and  good  and  evil.  They  were  al- 
ways two  different  things.  And 
then  Venusians  had  a greenish 
tinge  to  their  skins  and  called  the 
Earthmen,  in  their  clicking  lan- 
guage, “Pink-faces.”  And  both 
Earthmen  and  Venusians  hated 
like  the  devil  to  see  the  other  get 
away  with  anything. 

Anyway,  there  had  been  war, 
terrible  war.  Space  battle,  air  bat- 
tle, landing,  repulse.  Stalemate.  Fi- 
nally, through  utter  weariness  per- 
haps, truce.  Now,  a taut,  uneasy, 
suspicious  peace.  Communications 


opened,  a few  art  objects  mutually 
exchanged.  Immigration  for  a few 
Venusian  dancers  or  students  or 
diplomats.  It  wasn’t  much,  but  it 
was  all  in  the  right  direction.  At 
least  Pell  felt  so. 

Rysland  was  saying:  “We’re  not 
sure,  of  course,  but  we  suspect — 
we  jeel — that  more  than  mere  acci- 
dent may  be  behind  these  Suprem- 
ists.” 

“What  do  you  mean  by  that?” 
“Someone  seeking  power,  per- 
haps. As  I said,  we  don’t  know. 
We  want  to  find  out.  Dr.  Nebel  has 
been  interested  for  some  time  in 
the  curious  psychology  of  these  Su- 
premists — their  blind,  unthinking 
loyalty  to  their  cause,  for  instance. 
He  is,  as  you  know,  a special  assist- 
ant in  the  Department  of  Educa- 
tion. He  asked  my  help  in  arrang- 
ing for  an  investigation,  and  I 
agreed  with  him  wholeheartedly 
that  one  should  be  made.” 

“And  I told  these  gentlemen,” 
said  Chief  Larkin,  “that  I’d  put  a 
detail  on  it  right  away.” 

Now  Pell  believed  he  saw 
through  it.  Larkin  didn’t  believe  it 
was  important  at  all;  he  was  just 
obliging  these  Vips.  A man  couldn’t 
have  too  many  friends  in  World 
Government  circles,  after  all.  But  of 
course  Larkin  couldn’t  afford  to 
put  one  of  his  bright,  machine- 
minded  boys  on  it,  and  so  Pell  was 
the  patsy. 

“Could  I remind  you,”  said  Pell, 
“that  my  vacation  is  supposed  to 
start  tomorrow?” 

“Now,  now,  Dick,”  said  Larkin, 
turning  on  the  personality,  “this 
won’t  take  you  long.  Just  a routine 
report.  The  computers  ought  to 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


49 


give  you  all  the  information  you 
need  in  less  than  a day.” 

“That’s  what  you  always  say,  ev- 
ery time  I’m  ready  to  take  a vaca- 
tion. I’ve  been  saving  up  for  two 
years  now  . . . 

“Dick,  that’s  hardly  the  right  at- 
titude for  an  agent  who  is  so  close 
to  making  second  grade.” 

Larkin  had  him  over  a barrel, 
there.  Pell  desperately  wanted  to 
make  his  promotion.  Second-grad- 
ers didn’t  spend  their  time  at  the 
control  banks  gathering  data;  they 
did  mostly  desk  work  and  evalu- 
ation. They  had  a little  more  time 
to  spend  with  their  wives.  He  said, 
“Okay,  okay,”  and  got  up. 

“Where  are  you  going?” 

“To  get  my  wife  on  the  viewer 
and  tell  her  I won’t  be  home  for  a 
while  after  all.” 

He  left  the  three  of  them 
chuckling  and  thought:  He  jests  at 
scars  who  never  felt  a wound.  He 
didn’t  say  it  aloud.  You  could  quote 
formulae  or  scientific  precepts  in 
front  of  Larkin,  but  not  Shake- 
speare. 

He  PUNCHED  OUT  his  home 
number  and  waited  until 
Ciel’s  image  swirled  into  the  view- 
plate.  His  heart  went  boppety-bop 
as  it  always  did.  Hair  of  polished 
gold.  Dark  eyes,  ripe  olives,  a little 
large  for  her  face  and  sometimes 
deep  and  fathomless.  She  wore  a 
loose,  filmy  nightgown  and  the  sug- 
gestion of  her  body  under  it  was 
enough  to  bring  on  a touch  of  mad- 
ness in  him. 

“Let  me  say  it,”  Ceil  said.  She 
wasn’t  smiling.  “You  won’t  be 


home  for  a while.  You’ve  got  an- 
other case.” 

“Well — ^yes.  That’s  it,  more  or 
less.”  Pell  swallowed. 

“Oh,  Dick.” 

“I’m  sorry,  honey.  It’s  just  that 
something  important  came  up.  I’ve 
got  a conference  on  my  hands.  It 
shouldn’t  take  more  than  an  hour.” 

“And  we  were  supposed  to  leave 
for  the  moon  in  the  morning.” 

“Listen,  baby,  this  is  absolutely 
the  last  time.  I mean  it.  As  soon  as 
this  thing  is  washed  up  we’ll  really 
take  that  vacation.  Look,  I’ll  tell 
you  what.  I’ll  meet  you  somewhere 
in  an  hour.  We’ll  have  some  fun — 
take  in  a floor  show — drink  a little 
meth.  We  haven’t  done  that  in  a 
long  time.  How  about  the  Stardust 
Cafe?  I hear  they’ve  got  a terrific 
new  mentalist  there.” 

Ciel  said,  “No.” 

“Don’t  be  like  that.  We  need  an 
evening  out.  It’ll  hold  us  until  I get 
this  new  case  washed  up.  That 
won’t  be  long,  but  at  least  we’ll 
have  a little  relaxation.” 

Ciel  said,  “Well  . . .” 

“Attababy.  One  hour.  Absolute- 
ly. You  just  go  to  Station  B-90, 
take  the  lift  to  topside  and  it’s  right 
on  Shapley  Boulevard  there.  You 
can’t  miss  it.” 

“I  know  where  it  is,”  said  Ciel. 
She  shook  her  finger.  “Richard 
Pell,  so  help  me,  if  you  stand  me  up 
this  time  . . .” 

“Baby!”  he  said  in  a tone  of 
deep  injury. 

“Goodbye,  Dick.”  She  clicked 
off. 

Pell  had  the  feeling  that  even  the 
free-flowing  meth  and  the  gaiety  of 
the  Stardust  Cafe  wouldn’t  really 


50 


WALT  SHELDON 


help  matters  much.  He  sighed 
deeply  as  he  turned  and  went  back 
into  the  other  room. 


Chapter  II 


A LITTLE  OVER  an  hour 
later  he  stepped  from  the 
elevator  kiosk  at  Station  B-90  and 
breathed  the  night  air  of  topside. 
It  was  less  pure  actually  than  the 
carefully  controlled  tunnel  air,  but 
it  was  somehow  infinitely  more 
wonderful.  At  least  to  a sentimen- 
tal primitive  boob  like  Richard  Pell, 
it  was.  Oh,  he  knew  that  it  was  in- 
finitely more  sensible  to  live  and 
work  entirely  underground  as  peo- 
ple did  these  days — but  just  the 
same  he  loved  the  look  of  the  black 
sky  with  the  crushed  diamonds  of 
stars  thrown  across  it  and  he  loved 
the  uneven  breeze  and  the  faint 
smell  of  trees  and  grass. 

This  particular  topside  section 
was  given  over  to  entertainment; 
all  about  him  were  theaters  and 
cafes  and  picnic  groves  and  air- 
ports for  flying  sports.  A few  hun- 
dred feet  ahead  he  could  see  the 
three-dimensional  atmospheric  pro- 
jection that  marked  the  Stardust 
Cafe,  and  he  could  hear  faintly  the 
mournful  sound  of  a Venusian  la- 
ment being  played  by  the  askarins. 
He  was  glad  they  hadn’t  banned 
Venusian  music,  anyway,  although 
he  wouldn’t  be  surprised  if  they 
did,  some  day. 

That  was  one  of  the  things  these 
Supremists  were  trying  to  do.  Rys- 
land  and  Chief  Larkin  had  given 
him  a long  and  careful  briefing  on 
the  outfit  so  that  he  could  start 


work  tomorrow  with  his  partner, 
Steve  Kronski.  Steve,  of  course, 
would  shrug  phlegmatically,  swing 
his  big  shoulders  toward  the  com- 
puter rooms  and  say,  “Let’s  go  to 
work.”  It  would  be  just  another  as- 
signment to  him. 

As  a matter  of  fact,  the  job 
would  be  not  without  a certain 
amount  of  interest.  There  were  a 
couple  of  puzzling  things  about 
these  Supremists  that  Rysland  had 
pointed  out.  First  of  all,  they  didn’t 
seem  to  be  at  all  organized  or  in- 
corporated. No  headquarters,  no 
officers  that  anybody  knew  about. 
They  just  were.  It  was  a complete 
mystery  how  a man  became  a Su- 
premist,  how  they  kept  getting  new 
members  all  the  time.  Yet  you 
couldn’t  miss  a Supremist  when- 
ever you  met  one.  Before  the  con- 
versation was  half  over  he’d  start 
spouting  about  the  destiny  of 
Earthmen  and  the  general  inferior- 
ity of  all  other  creatures  and  so  on. 
It  sounded  like  hogwash  to  Pell.  He 
wondered  how  such  an  attitude 
could  survive  in  a scientific  age. 

Nor  would  a Supremist  be  essen- 
tially a moron  or  a neurotic;  they 
were  found  in  all  walks  of  life,  at 
all  educational  and  emotional  lev- 
els. Rysland  told  how  he  had  ques- 
tioned a few,  trying  to  discover 
when,  where  and  how  they  joined 
the  movement;  Apparently  there 
was  nothing  to  join,  at  least  to  hear 
them  tell  it.  They  just  knew  one  day 
that  they  were  Supremists,  and  that 
was  the  word.  Rysland  had  shaken 
his  head  sadly  and  said,  “Their  be- 
lief is  completely  without  logic — 
and  maybe  that’s  what  makes  it  so 
strong.  Maybe  that’s  what  fright- 
ens me  about  it.” 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


51 


KAY,  TOMORROW  then 
Pell  would  tackle  it.  Tomor- 
row he’d  think  about  it.  Right  now 
he  had  a date  with  his  best  girl. 

He  entered  the  cafe  and  the 
music  of  the  askarins  swirled  more 
loudly  about  his  head  and  he 
looked  through  the  smoke  and  col- 
ored light  until  he  spotted  Ciel  sit- 
ting in  a rear  booth.  The  place  was 
crowded.  On  the  small  dance  floor 
before  the  orchestra  nearly  nude 
Venusian  girls  were  going  through 
the  writhing  motions  of  a serpen- 
tine dance.  Their  greenish  skins 
shimmered  iridescently.  The  sad- 
faced Venusian  musicians  on  the 
band-stand  waved  their  graceful, 
spatulated  fingers  over  thair  curi- 
ous, boxlike  askarins,  producing 
changing  tones  and  overtones  by 
the  altered  capacitance.  A rocket- 
man  in  the  black  and  silver  uni- 
form of  the  Space  Force  was  trying 
to  stumble  drunkenly  out  on  to  the 
floor  with  the  dancers  and  his 
friends  were  holding  him  back. 
There  was  much  laughter  about  the 
whole  thing.  The  Venusian  girls 
kept  dancing  and  didn’t  change 
their  flat,  almost  lifeless  expressions. 

Ciel  looked  up  without  smiling 
when  he  got  to  the  booth.  She  had 
a half-finished  glass  of  meth  before 
her.  . 

He  tried  a smile  anyway.  “Hello, 
baby.”  He  sat  down. 

She  said,  “I  didn’t  really  think 
you’d  get  here.  I could  have  had 
dates  with  exactly  eleven  spacemen. 
I kept  count.” 

“You  have  been  faithful  to  me, 
Cynara,  in  your  fashion.  I need  a 
drink  and  don’t  want  to  wait  for 
the  waitress.  Mind?”  He  took  her 
half  glass  of  meth  and  tossed  it 


down.  He  felt  the  wonderful  illu- 
sion of  an  explosion  in  his  skull,  and 
it  seemed  to  him  that  his  body  was 
suddenly  the  strongest  in  the  world 
and  that  he  could  whip  everybody 
in  the  joint  with  one  arm  tied  be- 
hind his  back.  He  said,  “Wow.” 
Ciel  tried  a smile  now.  “It  does 
that  to  you  when  you’re  not  used 
to  it.” 

The  first  effect  passed  and  he 
felt  only  the  warmth  of  the  drink. 
He  signaled  a waitress  and  ordered 
a couple  more.  “Don’t  forget  to  re- 
mind me  to  take  a hangover  pill 
before  I go  to  work  in  the  morn- 
ing,” he  told  Ciel. 

“You — you  are  going  to  work  in 
the  morning,  then?” 

“Afraid  I can’t  get  out  of  it.” 
“And  the  moon  trip’s  off?” 

“Not  off,  just  postponed.  We’ll 
get  to  it,  don’t  worry.” 

“Dick.” 

“Yes?” 

“I  can  take  it  just  so'  long,  put- 
ting our  vacation  off  and  off  and 
off.”  Her  eyes  were  earnest,  liquid 
and  opaque.  “I’ve  been  thinking 
about  it.  Trying  to  arrive  at  some- 
thing. I’m  beginning  to  wonder, 
Dick,  if  maybe  we  hadn’t  just  bet- 
ter, well — call  it  quits,  or  some- 
thing.” 

He  stared  at  her.  “Baby,  what 
are  you  saying?” 


A SUDDEN,  fanfare-like  blast 
from  the  orchestra  inter- 
rupted. They  looked  at  the  dance 
floor.  There  was  a flash  of  light,  a 
swirling  of  jnist,  and  within  the 
space  of  a second  the  Venusian 
girls  suddenly  disappeared  and 
their  place  was  taken  by  a tall. 


52 

hawk-nosed,  dark-eyed  man  with  a 
cloak  slung  dramatically  over  one 
shoulder.  The  audience  applauded. 

“That’s  Marco,  the  new  mental- 
ist,”  said  Pell. 

Ciel  shrugged  to  show  that  she 
wasn’t  particularly  impressed. 
Neither  was  Pell,  to  tell  the  truth. 
Mentalists  were  all  the  rage,  partly 
because  everybody  could  practice  a 
little  amateur  telepathy  and  hypno- 
tism in  his  own  home.  Mentalists, 
of  course,  made  a career  of  it  and 
were  much  better  at  it  than  any- 
body else. 

Their  drinks  came  and  they 
watched  Marco  go  through  his  act 
in  a rather  gloomy  silence.  Marco 
was  skillful,  but  not  especially  un- 
usual. He  did  the  usual  stuff; 
calling  out  things  that  people  wrote 
on  slips  of  paper,  calling  out  dates 
on  coins,  and  even  engaging  in 
mental  duels  wherein  the  chal- 
lenger wrote  a phrase,  concealed  it 
from  Marco,  and  then  deliberately 
tried  to  keep  him  from  reading  it 
telepathically.  He  had  the  usual 
hypnotism  session  with  volunteers 
who  were  certain  they  could  resist. 
He  made  them  hop  around  the 
stage  like  monkeys,  burn  their  fin- 
gers on  pieces  of  ice,  and  so  on. 
The  audience  roared  with  laugh- 
ter. Pell  and  Ciel  just  kept  staring. 

When  Marco  had  finished  his  act 
and  the  thundering  applause  had 
faded  the  Venusian  dancing  girls 
came  back  on  the  stage  again. 

Ciel  yawned. 

Pell  said,  “Me,  too.  Let’s  get  out 
of  here.” 

It  wasn’t  until  they  were  home  in 
their  underground  apartment  and 
getting  ready  for  bed  that  Ciel 
turned  to  him  and  said,  “You  see?” 


WALT  SHELDON 

He  was  buttoning  his  pajamas. 
“See  what?” 

“It’s  us,  Dick.  It’s  not  the  floor 
show,  or  the  meth,  or  anything — 
it’s  us.  We  can’t  enjoy  anything  to- 
gether any  more.” 

He  said,  “Now  wait  a minute . . .” 

But  she  had  already  stepped  into 
the  bedroom  and  slammed  the 
door.  He  heard  the  lock  click. 

“Hey,”  he  said,  “what  am  I sup- 
posed to  do,  sleep  out  here?” 

, He  took  the  ensuing  silence  to 
mean  that  he  was. 

And  he  did. 


The  next  morning,  as  he 

came  into  the  office.  Pell 
scowled  deeply  and  went  to  his  desk 
without  saying  good  morning  to 
anybody.  Ciel  had  kept  herself 
locked  in  the  bedroom  and  he  had 
made  his  own  breakfast.  How  it 
was  all  going  to  end  he  didn’t 
know.  He  had  the  feeling  that  she 
was  working  herself  up  to  the  de- 
cision to  leave  him.  And  the  real 
hell  of  it  was  that  he  couldn’t 
exactly  blame  her. 

“Morning,  partner,”  said  a voice 
above  him.  He  looked  up.  Way  up. 
Steve  Kronski  was  built  along  the 
general  lines  of  a water  buffalo. 
The  usual  battered  grin  was 
smeared  across  his  face.  “I  see  we 
got  a new  assignment.” 

"Oh — did  Larkin  brief  you  on  it 
already?” 

“Yeah.  Before  I could  get  my 
hat  off.  Funny  set-up,  all  right.  I 
punched  for  basic  data  before  you 
got  in.  Hardly  any.” 

“Maybe  that  means  something  in 
itself.  Maybe  somebody  saw  to  it 
that  the  information  never  got 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


53 


into  the  central  -banksu” 

Tlie  C.I.B.  computers  could  be 
hooked  into  the  central  banks  which 
stored  information  on  nearly  every- 
thing and  everybody.  If  you  incor- 
porated, filed  for  a patent,  paid 
taxes,  voted,  or  just  were  born,  the 
central  banks  had  an  electronic 
record  of  it. 

Kronski  jerked  his  thumb  toward 
the  computer  room.  “I  punched  for 
names  of  Supremist  members 
coupla  minutes  ago.  Thought  may- 
be we  could  start  in  that  way.” 

Pell  followed,  his  mind  not  really 
on  the  job  yet.  He  wasn’t  at  his 
best  working  with  the  computers, 
and  yet  operating  them  was  ninety 
per  cent  of  investigation.  He  sup- 
posed he’d  get  used  to  it  sometime. 

Three  walls  of  the  big  computer 
room  were  lined  with  control  racks, 
consisting  mostly  of  keyboard  set- 
ups. Code  symbols  and  index  cards 
were  placed  in  handy  positions.  The 
C.I.B.  circuits,  of  course,  were 
adapted  to  the  specialized  work  of 
investigation.  In  the  memory  banks 
of  tubes  and  relays  there  was  a 
master  file  of  all  names — aliases  and 
nicknames  included — with  which 
the  organization  had  ever  been  con- 
cerned. Criminals,  witnesses,  com- 
plaints, everyone.  Code  numbers 
linked  to  the  names  showed  where 
data  on  their  owner  could  be  found. 
A name  picked  at  random  might 
show  that  person  to  have  data  in 
the  suspect  file,  the  arrest  file,  the 
psychological  file,  the  modus  oper- 
and! file,  and  so  forth.  Any  of  the 
data  in  these  files  could  be  checked, 
conversely,  against  the  names. 

Kronski  walked  over  to  where  let- 
ter sized  cards  were  flipping  from  a 
slot  into  a small  bin.  He  said. 


“Didn’t  even  have  to  dial  in  Cen- 
tral Data  for  these.  Seems  we  got  a 
lot  of  Supremist  members  right  in 
our  own  little  collection.” 

Pell  picked  up  one  of  the  cards 
and  examined  it  idly.  Vertical  col- 
umns were  inscribed  along  the  card, 
each  with  a heading,  and  with  fur- 
ther sub-headed  columns.  Under 
the  column  marked  Modus  Oper- 
andi,  for  instance,  there  were  sub- 
columns titled  Person  Attacked, 
Property  Attacked,  How  Attacked, 
Means  of  Attack,  Object  of  Attack, 
and  Trademark.  Columns  of  digits, 
one  to  nine,  were  under  each  item. 
If  the  digits  3 and  2 were  punched 
under  Trademark  the  number  32 
could  be  fed  into  the  Operational 
Data  machine  and  this  machine 
would  then  give  back  the  informa- 
tion on  a printed  slip  that  number 
32  stood  for  the  trademark  of  leav- 
ing cigar  butts  at  the  scene  of  the 
crime. 

“Got  five  hundred  now,”  said 
Kronski.  “I’ll  let  a few  more  run 
in  case  we  need  alternates.” 

“Okay,”  said  Pell.  “I’ll  start  this 
batch  through  the  analyzer.” 

He  took  the  cards  across  the  room 
to  a machine  about  twenty  feet 
long  and  dropped  them  into  the 
feeder  at  one  end.  Channels  and 
rollers  ran  along  the  top  of  this 
machine  and  under  them  were  a 
series  of  vertical  slots  into  which 
the  selected  cards  could  drop.  He 
cleared  the  previous  setting  and  ran 
the  pointer  to  Constants.  He  set 
the  qualitative  dial  to  85%.  This 
meant  that  on  the  first  run  the 
punch  hole  combinations  in  the 
cards  would  be  scanned  and  any 
item  common  to  85%  of  the  total 
would  be  registered  in  a relay.  Up- 


54 

on  the  second  run  the  machine 
would  select  the  cards  with  this  con- 
stant and  drop  them  into  a slot  cor- 
responding with  that  heading.  Fur- 
ther scanning,  within  the  slot  itself, 
would  pick  out  the  constant  num- 
ber. 

Pell  started  the  rollers  whirring. 

Kronski  came  over.  He  rubbed 
his  battered  nose.  “Hope  we  get 
outside  on  this  case.  I’m  gettin’ 
sick  o’  the  office.  Haven’t  been  out 
in  weeks.” 

Pell  nodded.  Oh,  for  the  life  of 
a C.I.B.  man.  In  teleplays  they  cor- 
nered desperate  criminals  in  the 
dark  ruins  of  the  ancient  cities  top- 
side, and  fought  it  out  with  freezers. 
The  fact  was,  although  regulations 
called  for  them  to  carry  freezers  in 
their  shoulder  holsters,  one  in  a 
thousand  ever  got  a chance  to  use 
them. 

Pell  said,  “Maybe  you  need  a 
vacation.” 

“Maybe.  Only  I keep  putting  my 
vacation  off.  Got  a whole  month 
saved  up  now.” 

“Me,  too.”  Pell  sighed.  Ciel 
would  probably  be  pacing  the  floor 
back  home  now,  trying  to  make  up 
her  mind.  To  break  it  up,  or  not 
to  break  it  up?  There  would  be  no 
difficulty,  really:  she  had  been  a 
pretty  good  commercial  artist  be- 
fore they  were  married  and  she 
wouldn’t  have  any  trouble  finding 
a job  again  somewhere  in  World 
City. 

The  rollers  kept  whirring  and 
the  cards  flipping  along  with  a whis- 
pering sound. 

“Wonder  what  we’re  looking  in- 
to these  Supremists  for?”  asked 
Kronski.  “I  always  thought  they 


WALT  SHELDON 

were  some  kind  of  harmless  crack- 
pots.” 

“The  Chief  doesn’t  think  so. 
Neither  does  Theodor  Rysland.”  He 
told  Kronski  more  about  the  inter- 
view last  night. 

Presently  the  machine  stopped, 
clicked  several  times  and  began  roll- 
ing the  other  way. 

“Well,  it  found  something,”  said 
Kronski. 

They  kept  watching.  Oh,  for  the 
life  of  a C.I.B.  man.  Cards  began 
to  drop  into  one  of  the  slots.  The 
main  heading  was  Physical  and  the 
sub-heading  Medical  History.  Pell 
frowned  and  said,  “Certainly  didn’t 
expect  to  find  a constant  in  this 
department.”  He  picked  up  a few 
of  the  first  cards  and  looked  at 
them,  hoping  to  catch  the  constant 
by  eye.  He  caught  it.  “What’s  445 
under  this  heading?” 


RONSKI  SAID,  “I’ll  find 
out,”  and  stepped  over  to  the 
Operational  Data  board.  He 
worked  it,  took  the  printed  slip  that 
came  out  and  called  back;  “Record 
of  inoculation.” 

“That’s  a funny  one.” 

“Yup.  Sure  is.”  Kronski  stared  at 
the  slip  and  scratched  his  neck.  “It 
must  be  just  any  old  kind  inocula- 
tion. If  it  was  special — like  typhoid 
or  tetanus  or  something — it’d  have 
another  digit.” 

“There  must  be  some  other  boil- 
downs,  if  we  could  think  of  them.” 
Pell  was  frowning  heavily.  Some  of 
the  other  men,  used  to  the  ma- 
chines, could  grab  a boil-down  out 
of  thin  air,  run  the  cards  again  and 
get  another  significant  constant. 
The  machine,  however,  inhibited 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


55 


Pell.  It  made  him  feel  uneasy  and 
stupid  whenever  he  was  around  it. 

“How  about  location?”  suggested 
Kronski. 

Pell  shook  his  head.  “I  checked 
a few  by  eye.  All  different  numbers 
under  location.  Some  of  ’em  come 
from  World  City,  some  from  Mars 
Landing,  some  from  way  out  in  the 
sticks.  Nothing  significant  there.” 

“Maybe  what  we  need  is  a cup 
of  coffee.” 

Pell  grinned.  “Best  idea  all  morn- 
ing. Come  on.” 

Some  minutes  later  they  sat 
across  from  each  other  at  a table  in 
the  big  cafeteria  on  the  seventy- 
third  level.  It  was  beginning  to  be 
crowded  now  with  personnel  from 
other  departments  and  bureaus. 
The  coffee  urge  came  for  nearly 
everybody  in  the  government  offices 
at  about  the  same  time.  Pell  was 
studying  by  eye  a handful  of  spare 
data  cards  he’d  brought  along  and 
Kronski  was  reading  faxpaper  clip- 
pings from  a large  manila  envelope 
marked  Supremist  Party.  Just  on  a 
vague  hunch  Pell  had  viewplated 
Central  Public  Relations  and  had 
them  send  the  envelope  down  by 
tube. 

“Prominent  Educator  Addresses 
Supremist  Rally,”  Kronski  mut- 
tered. “Three  Spaceport  Cargomen 
Arrested  at  Supremist  Riot.  Young 
Supremists  Form  Rocket  Club. 
Looks  like  anybody  and  everybody 
can  be  a Supremist.  And  his  grand- 
mother. Wonder  how  they  do  it?” 

“Don’t  know.”  Pell  wasn’t  really 
listening. 

“And  here’s  a whole  town  went 
over  to  the  Supremists.  On  the 
moon.” 

“Uh-huh,”  said  Pell. 


Kronski  sipped  his  coffee  loudly. 
A few  slender,  graceful  young  men 
from  World  Commerce  looked  at 
him  distastefully.  “Happened  just 
this  year.  New  Year  they  all  went 
over.  Augea,  in  the  Hercules  Moun- 
tains. Big  celebration.” 

Pell  looked  up  and  said,  “Wait 
a minute.  . .” 

“Wait  for  what?  I’m  not  goin’ 
anywhere.  Not  on  this  swivel-chair 
of  a job,  damn  it.” 

“New  Year  they  all  become 
Supremists.  And  the  last  week  of 
December  everybody  on  the  moon 
gets  his  inoculations,  right?” 
“Search  me.” 

“But  I know  that.  I found  that 
out  when  I was  tailing  those  two 
gamblers  who  had  a place  on  the 
moon,  remember?” 

“So  it  may  be  a connection.” 
Kronski  shrugged. 

“It  may  be  the  place  where  we 
can  study  a bunch  of  these  cases 
in  a batch  instead  of  picking  ’em 
one  by  one.” 

“You  mean  we  oughta  take  a 
trip  to  the  moon?” 

“Might  not  hurt  for  a few  days.” 
Kronski  was  grinning  at  him. 
“What  are  you  grinning  at?” 
“First  you  got  to  stay  over  on 
your  vacation,  so  you  can’t  go  to 
the  moon  with  your  wife.  Now  all 
of  a sudden  you  decide  duty  has 
got  to  take  you  to  the  moon,  huh?” 
Pell  grinned  back  then.  “What 
are  you  squawking  about?  You  said 
you  wanted  to  get  out  on  this  case.” 
Kronski,  still  grinning,  got  up. 
“I’m  not  complaining.  I’m  just 
demonstrating  my  powers  of  deduc- 
tion, as  they  say  in  teleplays.  Come 
on,  let’s  go  make  rocket  reserva- 
tions.” 


56 


WALT  SHELDON 


Chapter  III 


The  big  tourist  rochet  let 

them  down  at  the  Endymion 
Crater  Landing,  and  they  went 
through  the  usual  immigration  and 
customs  formalities  in  the  under- 
ground city  there.  They  stayed  in  a 
hotel  overnight,  Pell  and  Ciel  look- 
ing very  much  like  tourists,  Kron- 
ski  tagging  along  and  looking  faintly 
out  of  place.  In  the  morning — 
morning  according  to  the  24  hour 
earth  clock,  that  is — they  took  the 
jitney  rocket  to  the  resort  town  of 
Augea,  in  the  Hercules  Mountains. 
The  town  was  really  a cliff  dwell- 
ing, built  into  the  side  of  a great 
precipice  with  quartz  windows  over- 
looking a tremendous,  stark  valley. 

It  was  hard  to  say  just  what  at- 
traction the  moon  had  as  a vaca- 
tion land,  and  it  was  a matter  of 
unfathomable  taste.  You  either 
liked  it,  or  you  didn’t.  If  you  didn’t, 
you  couldn’t  understand  what  peo- 
ple who  liked  it  saw  in  it.  They 
couldn’t  quite  explain.  “It’s  so 
quiet.  It’s  so  vast.  It’s  so  beautiful,” 
they’d  say,  but  never  anything 
clearer  than  that. 

Augea  itself  was  like  twenty  other 
resorts  scattered  throughout  both 
the  northern  and  southern  latitudes 
of  the  moon.  Except  for  the  mili- 
tary posts  and  scientific  research 
stations  the  moon  had  little  value 
other  than  as  a vacation  land.  Peo- 
ple came  there  to  rest,  to  look  at 
the  bizarre  landscape  through 
quartz,  or  occasionally  to  don 
spacesults  and  go  out  on  guided 
exploration  trips. 

Immediately  after  checking  into 
their  hotel  Pell  and  Kronski  got  di- 


rections to  the  office  of  the  Resident 
Surgeon  and  prepared  to  go  there. 
Ciel  looked  on  quietly  as  Pell 
tightened  the  straps  of  his  shoulder 
holster  and  checked  the  setting  on 
his  freezer. 

Ciel  said,  “I  knew  it.” 

“Knew  what,  honey?”  Pell  went 
to  the  mirror  to  brush  his  hair.  He 
wasn’t  sure  it  would  materially  im- 
prove the  beauty  of  his  long,  knob- 
by, faintly  melancholy  face,  but  he 
did  it  any  way. 

“The  minute  we  get  here  you 
have  to  go  out  on  business.” 

He  turned,  kissed  her,  then  held 
and  patted  her  hand.  “That’s  just 
because  I want  to  get  it  over  with. 
Then  I’ll  have  time  for  you.  Then 
we’ll  have  lots  of  time  together.” 
She  melted  into  him  suddenly. 
She  put  her  arms  around  .his  neck 
and  held  him  tightly.  “If  I didn’t 
love  you,  you  big  lug,  it  wouldn’t 
be  so  bad.  But,  Dick,  I can’t  go  on 
like  this  much  longer.  I just  can’t.” 
“Now,  baby,”  he  started  to  say. 
There  was  a knock  on  the  door 
then  and  he  knew  Kronski  was 
ready.  He  broke  away  from  her, 
threw  a kiss  and  said,  “Later.  Later, 
baby.” 

She  nodded  and  held  her  under 
lip  in  with  her  upper  teeth. 

He  sighed  and  left. 


PELL  AND  KRONSKI  left  the 
hotel  and  started  walking  along 
the  winding  tunnel  with  the  side 
wall  of  quartz.  On  their  right  the 
huge  valley,  with  its  stark,  imearthly 
landshapes,  stretched  away.  It  was 
near  the  end  of  the  daylight  period 
and  the  shadows  from  the  distant 
peaks,  across  the  valley,  were  long 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


57 


and  deep.  Some  of  them,  with  little 
reflected  light,  seemed  to  be  patches 
of  nothingness.  Pell  fancied  he 
could  step  through  them  into  an- 
other dimension. 

All  about  them,  even  here  in  the 
side  of  the  mountain,  and  behind 
the  thick  quartz,  there  was  the  odd, 
utterly  dead  silence  of  the  moon. 

Their  footsteps  echoed  sparsely  in 
the  corridor. 

Pell  said  to  Kronski,  “Got  the 
story  all  straight?” 

“Like  as  if  it  was  true.” 
“Remember  the  signal?” 

“Sure.  Soon  as  you  say  we’re  out 
of  cigarettes.  What’s  the  matter, 
you  think  I’m  a moron,  I can’t  re- 
member?” 

Pell  laughed  and  clapped  him  on 
the  shoulder  blade. 

Minutes  later  they  turned  in  from 
the  corridor,  went  through  another, 
shorter  passageway  and  then  came 
to  a door  marked;  Resident  Sur- 
geon. They  knocked  and  a deep 
voice  boomed:  “Come  in!” 

It  was  a medium-sized  room, 
clearly  a dispensary.  There  was  an 
operating  table,  a sterilizer,  tall 
glass-fronted  instrument  cabinets 
and  a refrigerator.  At,  the  far  end  of 
the  room  a hulking,  bear-like  man 
sat  behind  a magnalloy  desk.  The 
nameplate  on  the  desk  said:  Hal 
H.  Wilcox,  M.D. 

“Howdy,  gents,”  said  Dr.  Hal  H. 
Wilcox,  shattering  the  moon-silence 
with  a vengeance.  “What  can  I do 
for  you?”  he  was  all  smiles. 

That  smile,  decided  Pell,  didn’t 
quite  match  the  shrewdness  of  his 
eyes.  Have  to  watch  this  boy,  may- 
be. There  was  a big  quartz  window 
behind  the  man  so  that  for  the  mo- 
ment Pell  saw  him  almost  in  sil- 


houette. “We’re  from  Current 
magazine,”  said  Pell.  “I’m  Dick 
Pell  and  this  is  Steve  Kronski.  You 
got  our  radio,  I guess.” 

“Oh,  yes.  Yes,  indeed.”  Wilcox 
creaked  way  back  in  his  chair. 
“You’re  the  fellas  want  to  do  a 
story  on  us  moon  surgeons.” 

“That’s  right.”  Pell  fumbled  a 
little  self-consciously  with  the  gravi- 
ty weights  clipped  to  his  trousers. 
Took  a while  for  moon  visitors  t6 
get  used  to  them,  everybody  said. 

“Well,  I don’t  know  exactly  as 
how  there’s  much  of  a story  in  what 
we  do.  We’re  just  a bunch  of  saw- 
bones stationed  here,  that’s  all.” 
“We’re  interested  in  the  diseases 
peculiar  to  the  moon,”  said  Pell. 
“For  instance,  why  do  the  perma- 
nent residents  up  here  have  to  have 
an  inoculation  every  year?” 
“That’s  for  the  Venusian  rash. 
Thought  everybody  knew  that.” 
“Venusian  rash?” 

“Nearest  thing  we  ever  had  to  it 
on  Earth  was  Rocky  Mountain 
Spotted  Fever.  It’s  a rickettsia 
disease.  Makes  a fella  pretty  sick; 
sometimes  kills  Lim  in  two,  three 
days.  It  started  when  they  had  those 
Venusian  construction  workers  and 
tunnel  men  here,  oh,  long  before 
the  war.  Under  certain  conditions 
the  rickettsia  stays  dormant  and 
then  pops  up  again.” 

“And  the  inoculation’s  for  that?” 
“Standard.  Once  a year.  You 
got  the  inoculation  yourself,  no 
doubt,  before  you  jumped  off  for 
the  moon.” 

“Where  does  the  serum  or  what- 
ever you  call  it  come  from?” 

Pell  thought  he  saw  Wilcox’s  eyes 
flicker.  The  doctor  said,  “It’s 
stored  at  the  main  landings.  We 


58 

draw  it  as  we  need  it  from  there.” 

“Have  any  here  now?” 

Wilcox’s  eyes  did  move  this  time. 
He  looked  at  the  refrigerator — but 
only  for  the  veriest  moment.  “Don’t 
really  reckon  so,”  he  said  finally. 
He  was  staring  blankly  at  Pell 
again. 

Pell  patted  his  pockets,  turned 
to  Kronski  and  said,  “You  know,  I 
think  we’re  out  of  cigarettes.”  Be- 
fore Kronski  could  answer  he 
moved  to  the  big  quartz  window 
behind  Wilcox’s  desk.  He  gazed  at 
the  moonscape.  “Just  can’t  get  over 
how  big  and  quiet  it  is,”  he  said. 

Wilcox  turned  and  gazed  with 
him. 

Kronski  drew  his  freezer.  He 
pointed  it,  squeezed,  and  there  was 
a soft,  momentary  buzzing  and  a 
twinkling  of  violet  sparks  at  the 
muzzle  of  the  weapon. 

Wilcox  sat  where  he  was,  frozen, 
knowing  nothing. 


PELL  TURNED  FAST.  “Come 
on,  Steve.  Let’s  get  it.”  They 
both  stepped  to  the  refrigerator. 

They  had  only  seconds;  Kronski’ s 
weapon  had  been  set  at  a low  read- 
ing. The  time  of  paralysis  varied 
with  the  individual  and  Doc  Wil- 
cox looked  husky  enough  not  to 
stay  frozen  very  long.  If  Pell  and 
Kronski  returned  to  their  original 
positions  after  he  came  out  of  it 
he  would  never  know  that  anything 
had  happened. 

Far  back  on  a lower  shelf  of  the 
refrigerator  were  a dozen  small 
bottles  of  the  same  type.  Pell 
grabbed  one,  glanced  at  the  label, 
nodded,  and  dropped  it  into  his 


WALT  SHELDON 

pocket.  They  took  their  places 
again. 

A few  moments  later  Wilcox 
moved  slightly  and  said,  “Yup. 
Moon’s  a funny  place  all  right.  You 
either  like  it  or  you  don’t.” 

The  rest  of  the  conversation  was 
fairly  uninspired.  Pell  didn’t  want 
to  walk  out  too  quickly,  and  had 
to  keep  up  the  pretense  of  inter- 
viewing Wilcox  for  a magazine 
story.  It  wasn’t  easy.  They  excused 
themselves  finally,  saying  they’d  be 
back  for  more  information  as  soon 
as  they  made  up  some  notes  and 
got  the  overall  picture — whatever 
that  meant.  Wilcox  seemed  satisfied 
with  it. 

They  hurried  back  along  the  tun- 
nel, descended  to  another  level  and 
found  the  Augea  Post  Office.  They 
showed  the  postmaster  their  C.I.B. 
shields  and  identification  cards 
and  arranged  for  quick  and  special 
handling  for  the  bottle  of  vaccine. 
Pell  marked  it  Attention,  Lab,  and 
it  was  scheduled  to  take  a quick 
rocket  to  the  Endymion  landing  and 
the  next  unmanned  mail  rocket 
back  to  World  City. 

Pell  stayed  at  the  Post  Office  to 
make  out  a quick  report  on  the 
incident  so  he  wouldn’t  have  to 
bore  Ciel  by  doing  it  in  the  room, 
and  Kronski  sauntered  on  back  to 
the  hotel. 

There  was  a fax  receiver  there 
and  Pell,  missing  the  hourly  voice 
bulletins  of  World  City  Under- 
ground, checked  it  for  news.  The 
pages  were  coming  out  in  a long 
tongue.  He  looked  at  the  first  head- 
line: 

VENUSIAN  OBSERVERS  AD- 
MITTED TO  WORLD  CONGRESS 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


59 


Well,  that  was  a step  in  the  right 
direction.  Maybe  one  of  these  days 
they’d  get  around  to  a Solar  Con- 
gress, as  they  ought  to.  The  recent 
open  war  with  Venus  had  taught 
both  Earthmen  and  Venusians  a lot 
about  space  travel,  and  it  was  prob- 
ably possible  to  explore  the  solar 
system  further  right  now.  No  one 
had  yet  gone  beyond  the  asteroids. 
Recent  observations  from  the  tele- 
scope stations  here  on  the  moon  had 
found  what  seemed  to  be  geometri- 
cal markings  on  some  of  Jupiter’s 
satellites.  Life  there?  Could  be. 
Candidates  for  a brotherhood  of 
the  zodiac — if  both  Terrans  and 
Venusians  could  get  the  concept  of 
brotherhood  pounded  through  their 
still  partially  savage  skulls. 

Another  headline; 

'WE  CAN  LICK  UNIVERSE' 
—WAR  SEC 

Not  so  good,  that.  Loose  talk. 
Actually  it  was  an  Undersecretary 
of  War  who  had  said  it.  Pell  ran 
over  the  rest  of  the  article  quickly 
and  came  to  what  seemed  to  him 
a significant  excerpt.  “Certain  pa- 
triotic groups  in  the  world  today 
are  ready  and  willing  to  make  the 
necessary  sacrifices  to  get  it  over 
with.  There  is  a fundamental  dif- 
ference between  Earthmen  and 
other  creatures  of  the  system,  and 
this  difference  can  be  resolved  only 
by  the  dominance  of  one  over  the 
other.” 

Supremist  stuff.  Strictly.  If  this 
Undersecretary  were  not  actually  a 
member  he  was  at  least  a supporter 
of  the  Supremist  line.  And  that  line 
had  an  appeal  for  the  unthinking, 
Pell  had  to  admit.  It  was  pleasant 


to  convince  yourself  that  you  were 
a superior  specimen,  that  you  were 
chosen.  . . . 

VENUSIAN  SPY  SUSPECTS  HELD 
ON  MARS 

Pell  frowned  deeply  at  that  one 
and  read  the  story.  A couple  of 
Venusian  miners  on  Mars  had  wan- 
dered too  close  to  one  of  the  Earth 
military  outposts,  and  had  been 
nabbed.  He  doubted  that  they  were 
spies;  he  doubted  that  the  authori- 
ties holding  them  thought  so.  But  it 
seemed  to  make  a better  story  with 
a slight  scare  angle.  He  thought 
about  how  Mars  was  divided  at  an 
arbitrary  meridian — half  to  Venus, 
half  to  Earth.  The  division  solved 
nothing,  pleased  nobody.  Joe  Citi- 
zen, the  man  in  the  tunnels  could 
see  these  things,  why  couldn’t  these 
so-called  trained  diplomats? 

Pell  finished  his  report,  ques- 
tioned the  Postmaster  a little  on 
routine  facts  concerning  the  town, 
and  went  back  to  the  hotel. 


lEL  WAS  WAITING  for  him. 
She  was  in  a smart,  frontless 
frock  of  silvercloth.  Her  golden  hair 
shone.  Her  large,  dark  eyes  looked 
deep,  moist,  alive.  She  looked  at 
him  questioningly  and  he  read  the 
silent  question : Now  can  you  spare 
a little  time? 

“Baby,”  he  said  softly,  and  kissed 
her. 

“Mm,”  he  said  when  he  had 
finished  kissing  her. 

The  voice-phone  rang. 

He  said,  “Damn  it.” 

It  was  Kronski,  in  his  own  room 


60 


WALT  SHELDON 


next  door.  “Did  Wilcox  leave  yet?” 
he  asked. 

“Wilcox?” 

“Yeah.  The  Doc.  Is  he  still 
there?” 

“I  didn’t  know  he  was  here  at 
all.” 

Kronski  said,  “Huh?” 

Pell  said,  “Maybe  we  better  back 
up  and  start  all  over  again.” 
“Wilcox,  the  Resident  Surgeon 
Doc  Wilcox,”  said  Kronski,  not  too 
patiently.  “He  was  in  my  room  a 
little  while  ago.  Said  he’d  drop  by 
on  his  way  out  and  see  if  you  were 
in.” 

Pell  glanced  at  Ciel.  She  was  busy 
lighting  a cigarette  at  the  other 
end  of  the  room.  Or  pretending  to 
be  busy.  Pell  said,  “I  just  got  here. 
Just  this  minute.  I didn’t  see  any 
Wilcox.  What’d  he  want?” 

“I  don’t  know  exactly.  He  was 
kind  of  vague  about  it.  Wanted  to 
know  if  he  could  answer  any  more 
questions  for  us,  or  anything  like 
that.” 

“Sounds  screwy.” 

“Yeah.  It  sure  does,  now  that  I 
think  it  over.” 

“Let  me  call  you  back,”  said  Pell 
and  hung  up.  He  turned  to  Ciel. 
“Was  Doc  Wilcox  here?” 

“Why,  yes.  He  stopped  in.” 
Nothing  but  blank  innocence  on 
her  face. 

“Why  didn’t  you  tell  me?” 
“Hm?”  She  raised  her  eyebrows. 
“He  just  stopped  in  to  see  if  you 
were  here,  that  was  all.  I told  him 
you  weren’t  and  he  went  out 
again.” 

“But  you  didn’t  mention  it.” 
“Well,  why  should  I?” 

“I  don’t  know.  I’d  think  you’d 
say  something  about  it.” 


“Now,  listen,  Dick — I’m  not 
some  suspect  you’re  grilling.  What’s 
the  matter  with  you,  anyway?” 

“It  just  strikes  me  as  funny  that 
Wilcox  should  drop  in  here  and 
you  shouldn’t  say  one  word  about 
it,  that’s  all.” 

“Well,  I like  that.”  She  folded 
her  arms.  “You’re  getting  to  be  so 
much  of  a cop  you’re  starting  to  be 
suspicious  of  your  own  wife.” 

“Now,  you  know  it’s  not  that  at 
all.” 

“What  else  is  it?  Dick,  I’m  sick 
of  it.  I’m  sick  of  this  whole  stupid 
business  you’re  in.  The  first  time  we 
get  a few  minutes  alone  together 
you  start  giving  me  the  third  de- 
gree. I won’t  stand  for  it,  that’s 
all!” 

“Now,  baby,”  he  said  and  took  a 
step  toward  her. 

The  deeper  tone  of  the  viewer 
sounded. 


**  A GH,  FOR  PETE’S  sake,”  he 
Mol.  said  disgustedly  and  an- 
swered the  call.  The  image  of  Chief 
Larkin’s  boyishly  handsome  face 
came  into  focus  on  the  screen.  Pell 
lifted  a surprised  eyebrow  and  said, 
“Oh,  hello,  Chief.” 

Larkin’s  eye  was  cold.  Especially 
cold  in  the  setting  of  that  boyish 
face.  “What  in  hell,”  he  asked, 
“are  you  and  Kronski  doing  on  the 
moon?” 

“Hm?”  Now  it  was  Pell’s  turn  to 
look  innocent.  “Why,  you  know 
what  we’re  doing.  Chief.  We’re  in- 
vestigating that  case.  You  know  the 
one — I don’t  want  to  mention  it 
over  the  viewer.” 

“Who  the  devil  authorized  you 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


61 


to  go  traipsing  to  the  moon  to  do 
it?” 

“Why,  nobody  authorized  us.  I 
thought — I mean,  when  you’re 
working  on  a case  and  you  have  a 
lead,  you’re  supposed  to  go  after  it, 
aren’t  you?” 

“Yes,  but  not  when  it’s  a crazy 
wild  goose  chase.”  In  the  viewer 
Pell  saw  the  Chief  slam  his  desk 
with  the  palm  of  his  hand.  “I’d  like 
to  know  what  in  blazes  you  think 
you  can  do  on  the  moon  that  you 
can’t  do  in  a good  healthy  session 
at  the  computers?” 

“Well,  that’s  kind  of  hard  to  ex- 
plain over  the  viewer.  We  have 
made  some  progress,  though.  I just 
sent  you  a report  on  it.” 

Larkin  narrowed  one  eye.  “Pell, 
who  do  you  think  you’re  fooling?” 

“Fooling?”  ■ 

“You  heard  me.  I know  damn 
well  you  wanted  to  take  a vacation 
on  the  moon.  But  we  have  a little 
job  for  you  that  holds  you  up,  and 
what  do  you  do?  The  next  best 
thing,  eh?  You  see  to  it  that  the  job 
takes  you  to  the  moon.” 

“Now,  Chief,  it  wasn’t  that  at 
all ” 

“The  devil  it  wasn’t.  Now,  listen 
to  me.  Pell.  You  pack  your  bags 
and  get  right  back  to  World  City. 
The  next  rocket  you  can  get.  You 
understand?” 

Before  he  answered  the  question 
he  looked  at  Ciel.  She  was  staring 
at  him  quietly.  Again  he  could  read 
something  of  what  was  in  her  mind. 
He  knew  well  enough  that  she  was 
trying  to  say  to  him:  "Make  a 
clean  break  now.  Tell  him  No,  you 
won’t  come  back.  Quit.  Now’s  the 
time  to  do  it — unless  you  want  that 
stupid  job  of  yours  more  than  you 


want  me  ...” 

Pell  sighed  deeply,  slowly  looked 
into  the  viewer  again  and  said, 
“Kronski  and  I’ll  be  back  on  the 
next  rocket.  Chief.” 


Ch^ter  rV 


Back  again  in  the  under- 
ground offices  of  C.I.B.,  Agent 
Richard  Pell  plunged  into  his  job. 
Up  to  his  neck.  It  was  the  only  way 
he  could  keep  from  brooding  about 
Ciel.  She  was  somewhere  in  the  city 
at  this  very  moment  and  if  he 
really  wanted  to  take  the  trouble 
he’d  be  able  to  find  her  easily 
enough — but  he  didn’t  want  it  to 
happen  that  way.  She’d  never 
really  be  his  again  unless  she  came 
to  him  .... 

And  so  once  more  he  found  him- 
self in  the  office  late  at  night. 
Alone.  Poring  over  the  lab  reports 
that  had  come  in  that  afternoon, 
turning  them  over  in  his  mind  and 
hoping,  he  supposed,  for  a nice  in- 
tuitive flash,  free  of  charge. 

As  a matter  of  fact  the  analysis 
of  the  vaccine  he’d  lifted  from  Wil- 
cox’s dispensary  was  not  without 
significance.  There  was  definitely 
an  extraneous  substance.  The  only 
question  was  just,  what  this  sub- 
stance might  be.  Take  a little  longer 
to  find  that  out,  the  report  said. 

It  made  Pell  think  of  the  corny 
sign  World  Government  officials  al- 
ways had  on  their  desks,  the  one 
about  doing  the  difficult  right  away 
and  taking  a little  longer  for  the 
impossible.  Some  day,  when  he  was 
a big-shot,  he  would  have  a sign  on 
his  desk  saying:  Why  make  things 


62 


WALT  SHELDON 


difficult  when  with  even  less  effort 
you  can  make  them  impossible?  Of 
course,  ideas  like  that  were  prob- 
ably the  very  reason  he’d  never  be 
a big-shot  .... 

The  Identifier  humming.  Some- 
one coming  again. 

He  looked  up,  and  then  had  the 
curious  feeling  of  being  jerked  back 
in  time  to  several  nights  ago.  Chief 
Larkin  and  Theodor  Rysland  en- 
tered. 

“Hello,  Dick,”  said  Larkin,  with 
a touch  of  studied  democracy.  He 
glanced  at  the  government  adviser 
as  if  to  say:  See?  Knew  we’d  find 
him  here. 

Pell  made  a sour  face.  “Some 
day  I’m  going  to  stop  giving  all  this 
free  overtime.  Some  day  I’m  not 
going  to  show  up  at  all.” 

Rysland  smiled,  dislodging  some 
of  the  rock  strata  of  his  curiously 
pale  face.  He  seemed  a little  weary 
this  evening.  He  moved  slowly  and 
with  even  more  than  his  usual  dig- 
nity. He  said,  “I  hope,  Mr.  Pell, 
that  you’ll  wait  at  least  until  you 
finish  this  job  for  us.  I understand 
you’ve  made  some  progress.” 

Pell  shrugged  and  gestured  at  the 
lab  report.  “Progress,  maybe — but 
I don’t  know  how  far.  Just  a bunch 
of  new  puzzles  to  be  perfectly 
frank.” 

Rysland  sat  down  at  the  other 
desk  and  drummed  on  it  with  his 
fingertips.  He  looked  at  Pell  grave- 
ly. “As  a matter  of  fact,  since  we 
last  talked  to  you  the  situation  has 
become  even  more  urgent.  A Su- 
premist  congressman  introduced  a 
bill  today  before  the  world  dele- 
gates which  may  prove  very  dan- 
gerous. Perhaps  you  know  the  one 
I refer  to.” 


“I  was  too  busy  to  follow  the 
news  today,”  said  Pell,  looking 
meaningfully  at  Larkin. 

Larkin  didn’t  seem  to  notice. 

Rysland  said,  “I’ll  brief  you  then. 
The  bill  purports  to  prohibit  ma- 
terial aid  of  any  kind  to  a non- 
Terran  government.  That  means 
both  credit  and  goods.  And  since 
the  only  real  non-Terran  govern- 
ment we  know  is  Venus,  it’s  ob- 
viously directed  specifically  at  the 
Venusians.” 

Pell  thought  it  over.  High  level 
stuff  again.  He  nodded  to  show  he 
followed. 

“On  the  surface,”  continued 
Rysland,  “this  would  seem  to  be  a 
sort  of  anti-espionage  bill.  Actually, 
it’s  a deliberately  provocative  act.  I 
know  the  Venusians  will  take  it 
that  way.  But  right  now  certain 
quarters  are  secretly  trying  to  ne- 
gotiate a trade  treaty  with  Venus 
which  would  be  a major  step  to- 
ward peaceful  relations.  If  this  bill 
became  law,  such  a treaty  would  be 
impossible.” 

“But  World  Congress  isn’t  likely 
to  pass  such  a bill,  is  it?  Won’t  they 
see  through  it?” 

Rysland  frowned.  “That’s  what 
we’re  not  sure  of.  Messages  are 
pouring  in  urging  passage— all  of 
them  from  Supremists,  of  course. 
The  Supremists  are  relatively  few, 
but  they  make  a lot  of  noise.  Some- 
times noise  like  that  is  effective.  It 
could  swing  a lot  of  delegates  who 
don’t  see  the  real  danger  of  this  bill 
and  are  at  the  moment  undecided. 
The  Defender  side,  with  its  desire 
to  isolate  and  fortify,  is  especially 
susceptible.” 

“That  is  bad,”  said  Pell  thought- 
fully. 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


63 


MYSLAND  put  his  palm  on 
the  desk.  “Now  then,  if  we  can 
somehow  discredit  the  Supremists 
— get  to  the  bottom  of  this  thing 
quickly  enough — I’m  sure  that  bill 
will  be  killed.  I came  here  tonight, 
I suppose,  out  of  pure  anxiety.  In 
other  words,  Mr.  Pell,  just  how  far 
are  you?” 

Pell  smiled  and  shook  his  head. 
“Not  very,  I’m  afraid.  This  Su- 
premist  thing  is  the  damndest  I 
ever  came  across.  No  central  head- 
quarters, no  officers,  no  propaganda 
mill — entirely  word  of  mouth  as 
far  as  I can  see.  No  way  of  finding 
out  how  it  started,  or  even  how  the 
new  members  are  proselyted.  Ask 
any  member  how  he  became  a Su- 
premist.  He  just  looks  kind  of 
dreamy  and  mutters  something 
about  the  truth  suddenly  dawning 
upon  him  one  day.” 

“But  don’t  you  have  any  the- 
ories?” 

“I’ve  got  a hunch,”  Pell  said, 
picking  up  the  lab  report. 

Chief  Larkin  snorted  softly.  The 
snort  said  clearly  enough  that  an 
efficient  investigator  didn’t  depend 
on  hunches  these  days:  he  went 
after  something  doggedly  on  the 
computer,  or  by  other  approved 
techniques. 

Pell  pretended  not  to  hear  the 
snort.  “First  of  all  we  discovered 
that  nearly  all  Supremists  received 
some  kind  of  an  inoculation  before 
they  became  Supremists.  Then  we 
found  a whole  village,  one  of  those 
moon  resort  towns,  that  had  gone 
over.  There  was  the  record  of  inoc- 
ulation there,  too.  I got  hold  of 
some  of  the  vaccine  and  had  the 
lab  analyze  it.  It’s  mostly  vaccine 
all  right,  but  there  is  a foreign  sub- 


stance in  it.  Listen.”  He  read  from 
the  report:  “Isolated  point  oh  six 
jour  seven  grams  unclassified  crys- 
tal compound,  apparently  form  of 
nucleotide  enzyme.  Further  analysis 
necessary.” 

“You  think  this  enzyme,  or  what- 
ever it  is,  has  something  to  do  with 
it?” 

“I  don’t  know.  All  I have  is  a 
pretty  wild  theory.  To  begin,  when 
our  lab  can’t  analyze  something 
right  away,  it’s  pretty  rare — pos- 
sibly even  unknown  to  chemistry  in 
general.  Now  it’s  just  possible  that 
this  substance  does  something  to  the 
brain  that  makes  a man  into  a Su- 
premist,  and  that  somebody’s  be- 
hind the  whole  thing,  deliberately 
planting  the  stuff  so  that  people 
here  and  there  become  injected 
with  it.” 

“Pell.”  Larkin  made  a pained 
face.  “Really.” 

Pell  shrugged.  “Well,  as  I say,  it’s 
a hunch,  that’s  all.” 

“It’s  a pipe  dream,”  said  Larkin. 
“I  never  heard  of  anything  so  fan- 
tastic.” 

“That’s  what  folks  said  a couple 
of  centuries  ago  when  the  Venu- 
sians  were  first  trying  to  make  con- 
tact and  their  ships  were  sighted  all 
over  the  place.  T never  heard  of 
anything  so  fantastic,’  they  all  said.” 

Theodor  Rysland  still  looked  in- 
terested. “Granted  there  is  some 
connection  between  the  Supremist 
mental  state  and  this,  er,  enzyme. 
What  then,  Mr.  Pell?” 

“Well,”  said  Pell,  stretching  his 
legs  out,  “I  had  an  idea  maybe 
your  friend  Dr.  Nebel  could  give 
us  some  help  on  that.” 

“Nebel?” 


64 


WALT  SHELDON 


“He’s  interested  in  this  thing, 
isn’t  he?” 

“Definitely.  Nebel’s  a very  public 
spirited  man.” 

“Well,  I understand  he’s  one  of 
the  top  psychobiologists  in  the 
country  today.  Seems  to  me  this 
new  enzyme,  whatever  it  is,  would 
be  right  up  his  alley.  Of  course  the 
lab  should  get  to  it  eventually,  but 
he  might  do  it  a lot  quicker.” 

Larkin  had  been  examining  some 
statistical  crime  charts  on  the  wall. 
He  turned  from  them.  “Pell,  does 
Kronski  know  about  all  these  wild 
hunches  of  yours?” 

“I  haven’t  talked  with  him 
about  them  yet.  He  left  today  be- 
fore the  lab  report  came  in.  Why?” 

“I  was  just  wondering,”  said 
Larkin  evenly,  “whether  I had  two 
maniacs  in  my  organization  or  only 
one, 

Rysland,  frowning,  turned  to  the 
chief.  “I  wouldn’t  be  hasty,  Lar- 
kin,” he  said.  “Crazy  as  it  sounds 
Pell  may  have  something  here.” 

Larkin  snorted  again,  and  this 
time  along  with  it  he  shook  his 
head  sadly. 

“What’s  your  next  move  then?” 
Rysland  asked  Pell. 

“Tomorrow  morning,  first  thing,” 
Pell  said,  “I’ll  take  a sample,  of  this 
stuff  to  Dr.  Nebel  and  see  what  he 
can  do  with  it.  Of  course  the  lab 
can  keep  on  working  on  it  in  the 
meantime.” 

“Don’t  you  think  you  might  do 
better  to  get  busy  on  those  com- 
puters?” Larkin  asked. 

Pell  shook  his  head.  “This  hunch 
is  too  strong,  Chief.” 

Rysland  smiled,  and  got  up. 
“I’m  inclined  to  put  a little  stock 
into  this  man’s  hunches.  He’s  done 


pretty  well  with  them  so  far.  I’d 
even  say  he’s  pretty  close  to  a solu- 
tion of  this  thing — possibly.” 

Larkin  shrugged  and  started  to 
look  at  the  crime  charts  again. 

Rysland  held  out  his  hand. 
“Good  night,  Mr.  Pell.  You’ve  en- 
couraged me.  Larkin  and  I are  go- 
ing topside  for  a little  night  cap  be- 
fore we  turn  in.  Like  to  join  us?” 

“No,  thanks,”  said  Pell.  “I’m 
sleepy.  I want  to  get  home  and  hit 
that  sack.” 

“Very  well.  Good  night  again.” 
The  two  men  went  toward  the 
door. 

Pell  watched  them  quietly.  He 
had  lied.  He  wasn’t  sleepy  at  all. 
He  just  wanted  to  get  home  and  sit 
by  that  viewer  and  hope,  hope 
against  hope,  that  it  would  ring 
and  that  Ciel’s  lovely  image  would 
swirl  into  view. . . . 


ON  THE  WAY  home  he  was 
just  the  least  bit  tempted  to 
go  topside,  however.  He  thought 
he  might  like  to  walk  the  broad, 
quiet  boulevards  under  the  stars. 
His  brain  functioned  better  there. 
The  tunnels  were  so  clean  and 
bright  and  sterile,  so  wonderfully 
functional  and  sensible,  that  they 
oppressed  him  somehow.  Maybe,  he 
sometimes  thought,  he  wasn’t  fit  for 
this  age.  Maybe  he  should  have 
been  born  a couple  of  hundred 
years  ago.  But  common  sense  told 
him  that  people  in  that  age  must 
have  often  thought  exactly  the 
same  thing  to  themselves. 

He  looked  at  his  chrono  and  de- 
cided he  had  better  go  home. 

The  apartment,  when  he  came 
to  it,  was  cold  and  empty  without 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


65 


Ciel.  He  bathed  and  tried  to  keep 
up  his  spirits  by  singing  in  his  tune- 
less way,  but  it  didn’t  help. 

He  went  back  into  the  living 
room,  selected  a film  from  the  li- 
brary and  slipped  it  into  a lap  pro- 
jector. He  sat  down  and  tried  to 
concentrate  on  the  film,  a historical 
adventure  about  the  days  of  the 
first  moon  rockets.  He  couldn’t  fol- 
low it. 

The  viewer  rang. 

He  bounded  from  the  chair  as 
though  he  had  triggered  a high 
speed  ejection  seat  in  a burning  jet. 
He  went  to  the  viewer  and  flicked 
it  on.  The  plate  shimmered,  and 
then  Giel’s  image  came  into  focus. 

“Baby!”  He  was  certain  his 
shout  overmodulated  every  amp 
tube  in  the  entire  World  City 
viewer  system.  But  he  felt  better, 
wonderfully  better,  already. 

She  was  smiling.  “Hello,  Dick.” 

“Hello.” 

And  then  they  looked  at  each 
other  in  afifectionate  embarrassment 
for  a moment. 

“One  of  us,”  said  Pell,  “ought  to 
have  his  script  writer  along.” 

“Dick,  I don’t  know  exactly  how 
to  say  what  I want  to  say  . . . .” 

“Don’t.  Don’t  say  anything.  Just 
pretend  nothing  ever  happened. 
Just  come  on  home  fast  as  you 
can.” 

“No,  Dick.  Not  yet.  I still  want 
to  talk  about — well,  everything. 
Dick,  we’ve  got  to  reach  some  sort 
of  compromise.  There  must  be  a 
way.” 

“Come  on  home.  We’ll  find  a 
way.” 

“Not  home.  Too  many  memories 
there.  Besides,”  she  smiled  a little, 
“I  don’t  trust  us  alone  together.  You 


know  what  would  happen.  We 
wouldn’t  get  any  talking  done.  Not 
any  sensible  talking  anyway.  You’d 
better  meet  me  someplace.” 

He  sighed.  “Okay.  Where  can  I 
meet  you?” 

“How  about  the  Stardust  Cafe?” 
“Again?  That  place  didn’t  help 
us  much  the  last  time.” 

“I  know,  but  it’s  the  handiest. 
I’m  sure  we  can  find  a quiet  place. 
Out  on  the  terrace  or  something.” 
“Is  there  a terrace?” 

“Yes,  I think  so.  I’m  sure  there 
must  be.” 

He  looked  at  his  chrono.  “All 
right,  baby.  Half  an  hour?” 

“Half  an  hour.” 

When  she  clicked  of!  he  felt  his 
heart  pounding.  He  felt  dizzy.  He 
felt  as  though  he  had  just  taken  a 
quart  of  meth  at  one  jolt — intra- 
venously. He  sang,  more  loudly  and 
more  off-key  than  ever.  He  went 
into  the  bedroom  and  started  to  get 
dressed  again. 

It  wasn’t  until  he  was  finishing 
the  knot  in  his  tie  that  the  hunch 
hit  him. 


IT  WAS  FUNNY  about  that 
hunch.  He  would  have  said  it 
came  out  of  nowhere,  and  yet  it 
must  have  broken  from  the  bottom 
of  his  mind  through  some  kind  of 
restraining  layer  into  the  conscious 
levels.  He  didn’t  remember  .think- 
ing anything  that  might  have 
brought  it  on — his  mind  was  strict- 
ly on  Ciel.  Maybe  that  was  how  it 
came  through,  with  the  attention 
of  his  conscious  mind  directed  else- 
where. 

With  the  hunch  he  heard  Ciel’s 
voice  again,  heard  it  very  clearly. 


66 


WALT  SHELDON 


saying:  '‘Vm  sure  we  can  find  a 
quiet  place.  Out  on  the  terrace  or 
something.”  And  with  that  other 
things  started  to  fall  into  place. 

As  he  thought,  and  as  the  possi- 
bilities of  his  hunch  fanned  out  to 
embrace  other  possibilities  he  be- 
came suddenly  cold  and  sick  inside. 
He  fought  the  feeling.  “Got  to  go 
through  with  it,”  he  muttered  to 
himself.  “Got  to.” 

As  soon  as  he  was  dre.ssed  he 
took  the  tunnel  cars  to  Station 
D-90,  changing  twice.  People  were 
aboard  at  this  hour,  returning  from 
the  evening.  Lots  of  men  and  wom- 
en in  uniform:  the  green  of  the 
landfighters,  the  white  of  the  sea- 
men, the  blue  of  the  flyers,  the  sil- 
ver and  black  of  the  space  force. 
Young  people.  Kids  mostly:  kids 
who  had  never  seen  war,  smelled 
death,  heard  the  wounded  scream. 
He  hoped  they  never  would.  But  if 
his  hunch  was  correct  they  might 
be  dangerously  near  to  it  right  now. 

If  only  he  had  time  to  call  Kron- 
ski.  He’d  feel  a lot  safer  . . . 

He  shook  himself.  Have  to  stop 
thinking  about  it.  Proceed  cau- 
tiously now,  and  take  each  thing  as 
it  came.  That  was  the  only  thing  to 
do. 

He  went  topside  and  stepped 
from  the  elevator  kiosk  into  the 
night  air.  Ahead  he  saw  the  bright 
globular  sign  of  the  Stardust  Cafe. 
But  he  didn’t  go  toward  it  right 
away.  He  turned  in  the  other  direc- 
tion, walked  swiftly,  and  kept  a 
sharp  eye  on  the  shadows.  He 
turned  off  on  a side  street,  circled  a 
small  park,  and  then  crossed  a slop- 
ing lawn  toward  the  back  of  the 
night  club.  He  headed  for  the  light 
of  the  service  entrance. 


A half-credit  bill  got  him  inside 
through  the  back  entrance.  He 
found  the  door  with  the  temporary 
sign  saying:  Marco  the  Mentalist. 
He  knocked. 

Marco  the  Mentalist  opened  the 
door.  He  didn’t  look  quite  as  tall 
face-to-face  as  he  did  out  on  the 
floor,  nor  quite  as  impressive.  His 
face  was  still  dark  and  faintly  satur- 
nine, but  the  jowls  seemed  a little 
puffier  now,  there  was  a faint  net- 
work of  capillaries  around  his  nos- 
trils and  his  eyes  looked  just  the 
least  bit  ’ y and  tired.  In  a 

pleasant  l gh  voice  he  said, 

“Yes?” 

Pell  showed  his  C.I.B.  identifi- 
cation. 

Marco  raised  his  eyebrows  a lit- 
tle and  said,  “Come  inside,  please.” 
Inside  he  found  a chair  for  Pell.  He 
sat  across  from  him  at  his  dressing 
table,  half-turned  toward  the  room. 
“I  must  get  ready  for  my  show  in 
a little  while.  You  understand  that, 
of  course.” 

Pell  nodded.  “What’s  on  my 
mind  won’t  take  long.  First  of  all, 
I want  to  ask  a few  questions  about 
hypnotism.  They  may  seem  silly  to 
you,  or  maybe  a little  elementary, 
but  I’d  like  you  to  answer  ’em  just 
the  same.” 

Marco’s  eyebrows  went  a little 
bit  higher  and  he  said,  “Proceed.” 

“Okay.  Question  number  one: 
can  anybody  be  hypnotized  against 
his  will?” 

“Some  can,  some  can’t.”  Marco 
smiled.  “The  average  person,  un- 
der average  circumstances— no.  I 
appear  in  my  act  to  hypnotize  peo- 
ple against  their  wills.  Actually, 
subconsciously,  they  wish  to  be  hyp- 
notized, which  is  why  they  volun- 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


67 


teer  to  let  me  try  in  the  first  place.” 
“Okay,  number  two.  Is  there  any 
drug  that  can  hypnotize  a per- 
son?” 

Marco  frowned.  “Pentothal  and 
several  things  appear  to  do  that. 
You  could  argue  it  either  way, 
whether  the  subject  is  actually  hyp- 
notized or  not.  I believe  post-hyp- 
notic commands  have  been  given  to 
subjects  under  sodium  pentathol 
and  carried  out,  even  back  in  the 
dark  ages  of  psychiatry  several 
hundred  years  ago.” 

“I’ve  got  one  more  really  impor- 
tant question,”  Pell  said  then.  “I’d 
understood  that  somebody  under 
hypnosis  won’t  do  anything  against 
his  moral  or  ethical  sense.  An  hon- 
est man,  for  instance,  can’t  be 
forced  to  steal.  Is  that  true?” 
Marco  laughed  and  gestured 
with  his  graceful  fingers.  “I  don’t 
think  it  is  true.  It  was  once  be- 
lieved to  be,  because  hypnotic  tech- 
nique was  not  strong  enough.  That 
is,  the  subject’s  hypnosis  was  not 
strong  enough  to  overcome  a 
strong  moral  sense,  which  is  actual- 
ly a surface  veneer  on  a deeper, 
more  brutal  nature.  But  I think 
with  deep  enough  hypnosis,  and 
the  right  kind  of  command,  you 
can  get  a person  to  do  most  any- 
thing in  post-hypnotic  behavior — 
and  of  course  not  know  why  he 
must  do  it,  even  knowing  it’s 
wrong.  Do  you  follow  me?” 

“I  hope  I do.”  Then  Pell  leaned 
forward.  “And  now  I have  a very 
great  favor  to  ask  of  you.” 

“Yes?” 

“I  want  you  to  put  on  a little 
special  private  performance  for  me, 
right  here  and  now.” 


“I’m  afraid  I don’t  understand.” 
“You  will,  in  about  sixty  seconds. 
Just  listen  carefully  . . . .” 


Chapter  V 

He  was  late  for  his  date 
with  Ciel,  of  course.  He 
glanced  at  his  chrono  as  he  entered 
the  Stardust  Cafe  by  the  front  door 
and  saw  that  he  was  twenty  min- 
utes late.  However,  this  time  he 
was  certain  Ciel  wouldn’t  complain 
too  vigorously. 

Again  the  askarins  were  playing, 
and  once  more  the  green-skinned 
Venusian  girls  were  doing  their 
writhing,  spasmodic,  aphrodisiacal 
dance.  It  was  remarkable  how  they 
could  achieve  such  an  effect  of  ut- 
ter abandon  and  yet  keep  their 
faces  blank  and  frozen.  He  looked 
around  the  rest  of  the  room  swiftly. 
Not  so  crowded  tonight,  and 
people  were  generally  quieter. 
There  were  no  oversexed  spacemen 
clawing  after  the  dancers  on  the 
floor. 

Ciel  was  again  in  a rear  booth, 
in  the  same  corner  of  the  room  she 
had  chosen  before.  She  had  spotted 
him  now;  she  was  looking  his  way. 
She  lifted  a white-gloved  hand  and 
waved. 

He  smiled  and  ■ headed  for  her. 
He  forced  his  smile,  and  made  him- 
self forget  the  prickling  of  his  wrists 
and  the  feeling  of  bristling  fur  along 
his  spine.  And  he  held  his  smile  all 
the  way  across  the  room.  Why, 
hello,  darling,  fancy  seeing  you 
here;  no,  nothing’s  wrong,  nothing 
at  all,  why  on  earth  would  you 
think  anything  was  wrong? 


68 


WALT  SHELDON 


“Hi,  baby,”  was  all  he  actually 
said. 

“I’m — I’m  glad  you’re  here, 
Dick.”  Her  eyes  didn’t  show  much. 
They  roved  over  his  face  a little  too 
much  perhaps,  but  otherwise  they 
seemed  simply  as  large  and  dark  as 
ever.  He  noticed  that  the  meth 
glass  in  front  of  her  was  empty. 

Grinning,  he  sat  down.  “This  is  a 
big  moment.  This  is  almost  too 
much  for  me  to  handle.  Maybe 
that’s  what  I need — a good  slug  of 
meth.” 

“No.” 

“No?” 

“Let’s  not  waste  time.  Let’s  go 
out  on  the  terrace.  I want  you  to 
kiss  me.” 

“Best  offer  I’ve  had  all  evening.” 
He  rose  again.  “Where’s  the  ter- 
race?” 

“Through  that  door.  There’s  a 
dining  room  there  that’s  closed  at 
night.  You  go  through  the  dining 
room  and  out  to  the  terrace.” 

“Okay.” 

He  took  her  arm  and  led  her  in 
and  out  of  tables,  across  the  room. 
They  moved  swiftly  through  the 
quiet,  nearly  dark  dining  room,  and 
after  that  through  a pair  of  win- 
dow-doors. They  were  on  the  ter- 
race then,  a flagstoned  space  with 
a low  wall.  It  overlooked  the  scat- 
tered lights  of  World  City’s  topside 
area  and  some  distance  beyond 
they  could  see  the  river,  a blue-sil- 
ver ribbon  in  the  moonlight. 

They  stopped  at  the  wall.  She 
turned  toward  him.  He  looked 
down  at  her,  at  her  pale  face  and 
deep,  dark  eyes.  He  smelled  her 
perfume  and  he  felt  her  live 
warmth  near  him  and  coming 
nearer.  He  saw  her  eyes  close,  her 


lips  part  just  slightly,  and  each  lip 
glistening,  faintly  moist  .... 

He  was  wondering  when  it 
would  happen.  He  was  wondering 
when  he  would  be  struck. 

As  he  wondered  that  he  sudden- 
ly discovered  he  wasn’t  on  the  ter- 
race any  more. 


He  looked  about  him  in 

some  surprise.  It  was  nearly 
dark.  He  was  in  a room;  he  could 
sense  the  walls  about  him.  He 
heard  a curious,  high-pitched  me- 
tallic voice — and  recognized  it. 
“Pell?  Are  you  awake  now?” 

It  had  happened  then,  just  as  he 
had  expected.  Someone  had  thrown 
a freezer  on  him  there  in  the  patio, 
and  during  his  complete  uncon- 
sciousness he’d  been  taken  here, 
wherever  this  was.  He  sighed.  The 
least  they  could  have  done  would 
have  been  to  let  him  finish  kissing 
Ciel. 

As  calmly  as  he  could  he  said  to 
the  four  blank  walls,  “I’m  awake.” 
Soft  glowlights  came  on  gradual- 
ly and  he  saw  that  the  room  about 
him  was  fairly  small — twenty  by 
fifteen,  roughly — and  very  plain.  It 
contained  a bed  and  a few  odd 
pieces  of  furniture,  all  apparently 
of  good  quality.  There  was  a door 
in  one  wall.  He  tried  the  door. 
Locked.  He  went  back  to  the  mid- 
dle of  the  room. 

“Chief,”  he  said  to  the  blank 
walls,  “what’s  this  all  about?  Is  it 
some  kind  of  a joke?” 

The  metallic  voice  chuckled.  It 
belonged  to  Eustace  J.  Larkin, 
Chief,  Central  Investigation  Bu- 
reau, and  even  filtered  like  this  it 
was  somewhat  prim  and  precise. 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


69 


“No,  Dick,  it’s  not  a joke.  I’m 
afraid.  I’m  surprised  you  haven’t 
guessed  what  it’s  all  about.  Or  at 
least  had  one  of  your  brilliant 
hunches.”  There  was  sarcasm  in  this 
last. 

“Where’s  Ciel?”  Pell  asked. 
“Right  here  with  me.  In  the  next 
room.  Here — listen.” 

Ciel’s  voice  said,  “Don’t  worry, 
darling,  we’ll  explain  everything. 
And  when  it’s  all  over  it  will  be  for 
the  best.  You’ll  see  that  it  will.” 
“All  right,  everybody,”  said  Pell, 
half-belligerently,  “what’s  the  big 
idea?” 

“Big  idea  is  right,”  Larkin’s  voice 
came  back.  “The  biggest  that  ever 
hit  the  human  race.  And  as  Ciel 
says  we’ll  explain  it  all  in  a mo- 
ment. But  first  I’d  like  your  word 
that  you  won’t  be  foolish  and  make 
any  kind  of  a struggle.  If  you’ll 
promise  that  you  can  come  in  the 
other  room  here  and  we  can  all 
talk  face  to  face.” 

Pell  frowned.  “I  don’t  know — 
I’m  not  so  sure  I can  honestly 
promise  that.” 

“Suit  yourself,  then.  A few  min- 
utes from  now  it  won’t  make  any 
difference  anyway.” 

“Will  you  stop  being  so  damned 
mysterious  and  tell  me  what  it’s  all 
about?” 

Larkin’s  voice  laughed.  “Very 
well.  I haven’t  had  much  chance  to 
tell  about  it,  frankly.  And  I think 
you’ll  agree  we’ve  rather  neatly 
kept  our  parts  under  cover — until 
you  got  dangerously  close  to  the  an- 
swer, anyway.” 

“Until  I got  close?” 

“Certainly.  Doc  Wilcox’s  office 
on  the  moon  was  perhaps  our  one 
weakness  in  the  whole  set-up.  How 


you  managed  to  stumble  on  to  that, 
ni  never  know — your  luck  must 
have  been  with  you.” 

“It  wasn’t  luck,  Larkin,  it  was  a 
hunch.” 

“Still  believe  in  hunches,  eh? 
Well,  we  won’t  argue  the  point.  At 
any  rate  you  wouldn’t  have  found 
the  enzyme  any  place  else  but 
there.” 

“Oh,  so  the  enzyme  does  have 
something  to  do  with  it.” 

“Everything.  Here — suppose  I let 
Doctor  Nebel  explain  it  to  you.  He 
developed  it,  after  all.” 

Pell  lifted  his  eyebrows  in  sur- 
prise and  Dr.  Walter  Nebel’s  sibi- 
lant voice  came  through  the  hid- 
den speakers.  “I  think  you  should 
know  how  it  works,  Mr.  Pell.  You 
may  know  that  a certain  part  of 
the  brain  called  Rossi’s  area  is,  to 
put  it  figuratively,  the  hypnotic 
center.  The  cut-off  of  the  adrenal 
cortex,  so  to  speak.  In  ordinary 
hypnosis  the  function  of  that  area 
is  dulled  by  overexercising  the  mo- 
tor senses.  By  that  method  the  in- 
tensity of  hypnosis  is  widely  variable 
and  never  really  one  hundred  per 
cent  effective.  My  compound,  how- 
ever, brings  about  complete  and  ab- 
solute cut-off.  Any  post-hypnotic 
suggestion  given  under  those  cir- 
cumstances takes  permanently  and 
deeply.  It  can  only  be  removed  by 
further  post-hypnosis  under  the 
same  treatment,  negating  the  orig- 
inal command.” 

Pell  stared  at  the  blank  walls. 
!‘Go  on,”  he  said  in  a soft,  tense 
voice.  “What’s  the  rest?” 

Larkin  spoke  again.  “Suppose  we 
briefly  examine  a little  history  as  a 
kind  of  introduction  to  this  matter. 
The  human  race,  since  the  begin- 


70 


WALT  SHELDON 


ning  of  recorded  time,  has  failed  to 
achieve  real  peace  and  stability, 
right?  Every  time  there  has  been 
a chance  for  cooperative  effort — 
for  total  agreement — certain  selfish 
interests  have  spoiled  it.  There  have 
been  times,  however,  when  certain 
groups' — states  or  combinations  of 
states — came  close  to  permanent 
peace  and  prosperity-  The  Napole- 
onic era  was  one.  Hitler  two  hun- 
dred years  ago  almost  brought  it 
about.  The  only  reason  they  failed 
was  that  they  didn’t  achieve  their 
goal — complete  conquest.” 

Did  Pell  hear  correctly?  Was 
there  a faint  simmering  of  madness 
in  that  metallic  voice  now?  In  the 
words  there  was  madness,  sure- 
ly ..  . 

IT  WENT  ON:  “The  fact  is, 
Pell,  people  simply  don’t  know 
what’s  good  for  them.  Look  at  the 
blunderers  and  even  downright 
crooks  who  are  elected  to  World 
Government.  Never  the  best  brains, 
never  the  best  talents.  When  a 
really  able  man  gets  into  a position 
of  leadership  it’s  an  accident — n 
fluke.” 

“I  still  don’t  see  what  all  this  has 
got  to  do  with  it,”  said  Pell. 

There  was  a shrug  in  the  metal- 
lic voice.  “For  once  the  ablest  men 
are  going  to  take  over.  There  are  a 
number  of  us.  You  know  already 
about  myself  and  Doctor  Nebel. 
Rysland  will  be  with  us,  too,  as 
soon  as  we  can  get  him  condi- 
tioned.” 

“By  conditioned,  you  mean  this 
enzyme  of  yours?” 

“Exactly.  We  started  out  in  a 
small  way,  using  force  or  trickery 


where  necessary,  and  managed  to 
condition  a number  of  doctors  and 
nurses.  Conditioning  simply  means 
injecting  Nebel’s  compound  and 
then  giving  the  post-hypnotic  com- 
mand to  be  unquestioningly  loyal  to 
the  Supremists.  We  created  the  Su- 
premists,  of  course.  In  order  for  us 
to  take  over  it  will  be  necessary  to 
have  another  war,  and  to  conquer 
Venus.  That  can  be  done  if  Earth 
strikes  quickly.  Within  the  next  few 
days  I think  there’ll  be  enough  Su- 
premist  influence  to  get  this  war 
started.” 

Pell  stared  back,  open-mouthed. 
To  hear  it  coldly  and  calmly  like 
this  was  shock,  cold-water  shock. 
“Let  me  get  this  straight  now. 
Your  group  made  Supremists  of 
doctors  and  nurses  and  they  in  turn 
made  new  members  by  installing 
this  hypnosis  stuff  whenever  any- 
body came  for  a hypodermic  injec- 
tion of  any  kind,  is  that  it?” 

“That’s  It.” 

“But  how  does  this  stuff  work? 
Does  it  knock  you  out,  or  what?” 

“You’ll  be  finding  that  out  at 
first  hand  very  shortly.” 

Pell  stiffened,  made  fists  and  un- 
consciously lifted  them  ~and  looked 
around  him,  warily. 

Larkin  laughed.  “It  won’t  do 
you  much  good  to  put  up  a fight. 
I’m  sending  a couple  of  my  assist- 
ants in  there.  They  specialize  in 
people  who  want  to  make  a strug- 
gle. And  there’s  no  reason  to  feel 
unhappy  about  it.  Pell : once  you’re 
conditioned  you’ll  simply  be  unable 
to  do  anything  against  the  Suprem- 
ist  cause.  You’ll  be  happier,  in  fact, 
having  such  a cause.  Ask  your  wife 
if  that  isn’t  so.” 

Pell  trembled  with  anger.  “How 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


did  you  get  to  her?  How  did  you 
make  her  do  what  she  did?” 

“You  mean  luring  you  into  our 
little  trap  on  the  terrace,  so  to 
speak?  You  mustn’t  blame  Ciel  for 
that.  She  couldn’t  help  herself;  she 
had  to  obey,  after  all.  You  see  she 
was  conditioned  in  Augea  on  the 
moon  by  Dr.  Wilcox,  one  of  our 
very  loyal  men.  He  simply  dropped 
in  when  you  were  at  the  Post 
Office,  pretended  that  Ciel  needed 
a routine  injection  and  she,  not  at 
all  suspicious,  allowed  him  to  do 
it.  He  gave  her  the  command  of 
loyalty,  and  also  cautioned  her  not 
to  say  anything  about  it.  So  you 
see,  Ciel’s  been  one  of  us  for  sev- 
eral days.  It  was  just  a little  pre- 
caution of  mine,  in  case  you  should 
become  troublesome.  I had  to  as- 
sign somebody  to  the  investigation, 
of  course,  because  Rysland  and  his 
crowd  would  have  been  too  suspi- 
cious if  I hadn’t  complied  with 
their  request.” 

“You’re  stark  crazy,  Larkin!  You 
ought  to  be  in  a mental  hospital!” 

“You’ll  be  over  that  idea  in  a 
minute  or  so.  Meanwhile,  we’re 
wasting  time.  I’m  sending  the  boys 
in  now.  You’ll  make  it  easier  for 
yourself  if  you  submit  without  giv- 
ing them  any  trouble.” 

The  door  opened,  then.  Pell 
caught  a quick  glimpse  of  the  other 
room  and  saw  that  it  was  a taste- 
fully furnished  living  room.  He 
recognized  it,  and  knew  where  he 
was.  This  was  a country  house  of 
Larkin’s,  topside,  not  far  from  the 
outskirts  of  World  City.  Whoever 
turned  the  freezer  on  him  must 
have  set  the  control  at  high  inten- 
sity because  it  would  take  at  least 
an  hour  to  get  to  this  place  from 


71 

the  Stardust  Cafe  and  he  had  been 
unconscious  at  least  that  long. 

He  had  the  momentary  impulse 
to  rush  that  partly  opened  door — 
and  then  the  boys,  as  Larkin  had 
called  them,  appeared. 

They  were  specialists, 

little  doubt  of  that.  They  re- 
garded Pell  with  flat,  almost  disin- 
terested looks  as  the  door  closed  be- 
hind them.  One  held  a hypodermic 
needle.  He  was  the  shorter  of  the 
two,  but  he  had  shoulders  like  ox- 
yokes.  His  face  had  been  kneaded 
in  the  prize  ring,  and  his  bare  arms 
were  muscular  and  hairy  but  the 
top  of  his  head  was  bald.  The  other 
had  red  hair,  close-cropped.  He 
waS'  big  and  well-proportioned ; Pell 
might  have  taken  him  for  a profes- 
sional football  player. 

Red  did  the  talking.  He  spoke 
quietly,  almost  pleasantly.  “Gonna 
cooperate?”  he  asked  Pell. 

Pell  said,  “You  touch  me,  broth- 
er, and  I’ll  make  your  face  look 
like  Baldy’s.” 

Red  glanced  at  Baldy  and  seemed 
to  sigh.  Abruptly  he  whirled, 
jumped  at  Pell  and  brought  a siz- 
zling right  hand  punch  through  the 
air.  Pell  ducked  it.  He  saw  Baldy 
move  in  as  he  did  so,  and  a painful 
blow  struck  the  back  of  his  neck. 
His  teeth  rattled  when  it  struck. 
Something  caught  him  under  the 
chin,  straightened  him.  When  he 
was  straight  a pile  driver  struck 
him  in  the  midsection. 

It  was  all  over  within  a matter 
of  seconds.  Under  different  circum- 
stances Pell  might  have  found  time 
to  admire  their  technique. 

As  it  was,  he  was  now  face  down 


72 


WALT  SHELDON 


on  the  floor  and  Red  was  strad- 
dling him,  holding  him  there.  The 
pain  in  his  stomach  made  him 
gasp.  His  face  and  the  back  of  his 
neck  ached  terribly. 

Red  had  his  arm  in  the  small  of 
his  back.  Pell  tried  to  struggle. 

“I  can  break  the  arm  if  you 
move,”  said  Red  cheerfully. 

And  then  Pell  felt  the  bite  of  the 
needle  just  below  his  shoulder. 

A misty  feeling  came.  He  felt  as 
though  he  were  in  a red  whirlpool, 
spinning,  going  down — down.  . . He 
fought  to  rise.  He  could  still  hear. 
He  could  hear  footsteps  and  the 
slam  of  the  door  when  somebody 
else  came  into  the  room.  And  then 
he  seemed  abruptly  to  be  detached 
from  his  own  body  and  floating  in 
a huge  gray  void.  . . . 

Words  hammered  at  his  brain. 
Larkin’s  voice,  at  his  ear  now  and 
no  longer  metallic.  “You  will  be 
loyal  to  the  Supremist  cause.  You 
will  do  nothing  against  the  Su- 
premist  doctrine.  You  will  believe 
that  Earthmen  are  meant  to  rule 
the  Universe — ” 

He  felt  an  overpowering  impulse 
to  nod,  to  agree,  to  believe  that  it 
was  right  to  do  this.  He  fought  this 
impulse,  straining  his  mind  and  his 
very  being  until  it  seemed  that 
something  might  burst  with  the  ef- 
fort. 

“You  will  work  for  the  cause; 
you  will  give  your  life  for  it  if 
necessary.’"’ 

Yes,  perhaps  it  was  better  so  suc- 
cumb. The  words  were  too  strong. 
He  couldn’t  fight  them.  Larkin  was 
right,  Earthmen  were  supreme,  and 
they  were  destined  to  rule.  . . . 

Somewhere  in  the  depths  a tiny 
spot  of  resistance  still  glowed.  He 


tried  desperately  to  evoke  it.  It 
seemed  then  that  it  became  bright- 
er. He  could  resist — he  would.  . . . 
He  kept  thinking  over  and  over 
again;  “No,  no,  no!” 

Larkin’s  voice  said,  “Carry  him 
in  the  other  room.  He’ll  come  to  in 
a moment.” 


He  came  to  slowly,  and  he 
saw  that  he  was  lying  on  a 
couch  and  that  several  people  were 
gathered  around  him  smiling  down 
at  him.  Something  detached  itself 
from  the  group,  knelt  by  his  side. 
He  blinked.  It  was  Ciel.  Her  gold- 
en hair  shone  and  her  dark  eyes 
searched  his  face  and  she  was  smil- 
ing. “Hello,  darling,”  she  said. 

“Hello,  Ciel.”  He  kissed  her,  and 
then  sat  up  on  the  couch  and 
looked  around. 

Larkin  and  Dr.  Nebel  were 

standing  together,  and  Red  and 
Baldy  were  a few  steps  behind 

them,  still  looking  indifferent. 

“Now  you’re  one  of  us,  Dick,” 
said  Larkin,  flashing  his  professional 
smile,  dimples  and  everything.  Pell 
rose.  Nebel  held  his  hands  behind 
his  back  and  beamed,  blinking  his 
heavy  reptilian  eyelids  and  Larkin 
stepped  forward  and  held  out  his 
hand. 

“Yes,”  said  Pell,  shaking  the 

hand,  “I  guess  we’re  all  working 

for  the  same  thing  now.  What  do 
you  want  me  to  do?” 

Larkin  laughed.  “Nothing  right 
away.  We’ll  give  you  instructions 
when  the  time  comes.  I think  you 
might  as  well  go  home  with  Ciel 
now;  I have  a copter  and  a chauf- 
feur outside  that’ll  take  you  to  the 
station  near  your  apartment.” 


BRINK  OF  MADNESS 


73 


“Okay,  Chief,  whatever  you  say.” 
He  smiled  and  took  Ciel’s  arm.  He 
started  toward  the  door.  Then  he 
stopped,  patted  his  chest  and  said, 
“Oh — my  freezer.  I guess  the  boys 
took  it  away.  . . 

Larkin  turned  to  Baldy.  “Give 
him  his  weapon.” 

Baldy  took  the  freezer  from  his 
pocket  and  casually  tossed  it  to  Pell. 

A sudden  change  came  over  Pell, 
then.  His  smile  disappeared.  He 
stepped  quickly  away  from  Ciel, 
whirled  and  faced  all  of  them.  He 
pointed  the  freezer.  “All  right, 
everybody  stay  perfectly  still— you, 
too,  Ciel.  This  is  where  we  break  up 
your  little  Supremist  nightmare.” 
Larkin  stared  in  utter  amaze- 
ment. Nebel’s  turtle  lids  opened 
wide.  Ciel  brought  her  hand  to  her 
throat. 

Red’s  hand  blurred  suddenly,  go- 
ing for  his  own  weapon.  Pell 
squeezed  the  trigger,  the  violet 
sparks  danced  for  an  instant,  and 
then  Red  stood  frozen  with  his  hand 
almost  to  his  chest. 

“I’d  advise  nobody  else  to  try 
that,”  said  Pell,  and  then  in  an 
ironical  tone  to  Larkin:  “C.I.B. 
agents  are  trained  to  be  pretty  quick 
with  a freezer,  right.  Chief?” 
Larkin  seemed  to  find  his  voice 
now  “But  — how  — what  hap- 
pened? You  were  injected.  How 
can  you.  . .” 

“I  just  took  a little  precaution, 
that’s  all,’;  said  Pell.  “There’ll  be 
plenty  of  time  to  explain  it  all  later. 
You’ll  probably  hear  the  whole 
thing  in  court,  Larkin,  when  I tes- 
tify at  your  trial  for  treason.  Mean- 
while, all  of  you  just  stay  nice  and 
calm  while  I use  the  viewer.” 

He  stepped  to  the  viewer  and 


dialed  with  his  free  hand.  The  plate 
glowed,  shimmered  and  a moment 
later  the  pale,  grave  face  of  Theo- 
dor Rysland  came  into  view.  His 
eyebrows  rose  as  he  saw  the  weapon 
in  Pell’s  hand  and  glimpsed  the 
people  beyond  Pell.  “Hello — what’s 
this  all  about?” 

“Haven’t  time  to  explain  fully 
now,”  said  Pell,  “but  I want  you  to 
get  to  Larkin’s  country  house  as 
soon  as  you  can.  I’ll  call  agent 
Kronski  in  a moment  and  have  him 
bring  some  others,  and  together 
we’ll  take  Larkin  and  Nebel  into 
custody.  They’re  behind  the  Su- 
premist movement — a deliberate  at- 
tempt to  take  over  the  government. 
They  did  it  with  a drug;  that’s  how 
Supremist’s  are  made.” 

“What’s  this?  A drug?” 

“Think  about  it  later,”  said  Pell. 
“Just  grab  the  facts  right  now.  The 
drug  makes  a person  subject  to 
post-hypnotic  commands  — that’s 
why  your  Supremists  are  blindly, 
unthinkingly  loyal.  However,  the 
command  can  be  erased  by  a second 
treatment.  That’ll  be  tough  and 
take  a lot  of  ferreting  out,  but  it 
won’t  be  impossible.”  He  glanced 
at  Ciel,  and  saw  that  she  was  star- 
ing at  him  with  horror — with  en- 
mity. It  sickened  him,  but  he 
steadied  himself  with  the  realization 
that  Ciel  would  be  one  of  the  first 
to  be  re-treated. 


EVERAL  MINUTES  later  he 
had  completed  his  calls.  Rys- 
land, Kronski  and  the  others  were 
on  the  way.  He  kept  the  freezer 
pointed,  and  watched  his  captives 
carefully.  Ciel  had  gone  over  to  the 
couch  and  was  sitting  there,  her 


74 


WALT  SHELDON 


face  in  her  hands,  weeping  softly. 

“I  don’t  know  how  you  did  it,” 
said  Larkin.  “I  don’t  understand 
it.  The  injection  should  have 
worked.  It  always  did  before.” 

“Well,  it  almost  worked,”  said 
Pell.  “I  must  admit  I had  quite  a 
time  fighting  off  your  commands. 
But,  you  see,  I knew  you’d  gotten 
to  Ciel  somehow  when  she  called 
me  up  to  make  the  date  this  eve- 
ning. She  spoke  of  going  out  to  the 
terrace  at  the  Stardust  Cafe.  It  was 
a little  odd  that  she  should  speak  of 
the  terrace  like  that,  out  of  a clear 
sky — and  I wondered  why  it  should 
be  on  her  mind.  Then  it  struck  me 
that  neither  of  us  had  ever  noticed 
a terrace  there,  and  Ciel  must  have 
some  special  reason  for  knowing 
about  it. 

“She  did,  of  course — she’d  been 
instructed  to  get  me  out  there  where 
your  boys  could  slap  a freezer  on 
me.  So  I started  guessing  with  that 
hunch  to  work  on.  Everything  more 
or  less  fell  into  place  after  that.  It 
was  pretty  certain  that  they’d  try  to 
make  a loyal  Supremist  out  of  me, 
too,  and  that’s  when  I took  that 
little  precaution  I mentioned  to 
you.” 

“What  precaution?” 

Pell  smiled.  “I  had  Marco  the 
mentalist  hypnotize  me  and  give  me 


a rather  special  post-hypnotic  com- 
mand. He  ordered  me  not  to  be- 
lieve any  subsequent  post-hynotic 
commands.  That’s  why  your  condi- 
tioning didn’t  work  on  me.” 

Larkin  could  find  no  words;  he 
just  stared. 

“Think  about  it,  Larkin,”  said 
Pell.  “Think  hard.  Maybe  you’d 
convinced  yourself  you  were  doing 
good,  but  your  purpose  was  still 
tyranny.  And  like  any  tyranny  it 
contained  the  means  of  its  own  de- 
struction. It  always  works  out  that 
way,  Larkin — maybe  it’s  a law,  or 
something.” 

It  had  been  a long  speech  for 
Pell,  practically  an  oration.  He  was, 
after  all,  a cop,  not  a philosopher. 
Just  a guy  trying  to  get  along.  Just 
an  ordinary  citizen  whose  name  was 
legion,  looking  at  his  \yife  now  and 
waiting  with  what  patience  he 
could  find  for  the  time  when  she 
would  be  cleared  of  the  poisonous 
doctrine  that  any  one  race  or  group 
or  even  species  was  supreme. 

He  was  thinking,  too,  that  the 
trial  would  keep  him  busy  as  the 
very  devil  and  that  they  still 
wouldn’t  get  to  that  vacation  and 
seconcf  honeymoon  for  a long 
time.  . . . 

That,  considering  everything,  was 
not  too  much  to  put  up  with. 


THE  END 

WE  WANT  YOUR  LETTERS!  It’s  true  “The  Postman  Cometh”  is 
small,  and  we’ll  continue  this  policy  of  devoting  most  of  our  space  to  the 
best  available  stories.  But  if  you’ll  take  time  (and  a postcard)  to  tell  us 
which  stories  you  like  best,  we’ll  tabulate  and  run  the  results  in  a special 
section — and  of  course  our  future  selections  will  be  based  on  your  wishes. 
Fair  enough? 


She  was  sweet,  gentle,  kind — 
a sort  of  Martian  Old  Mother 
Hubbard.  But  when  she  went 
to  her  cupboard.  . . 

ONE 

MARTIAN 

AFTERNOON 

By  Tom  Leahy 

Illustrated  by  BRUSH 


The  clod  burst  in  a cloud  of 
red  sand  and  the  little  Martian 
sand  dog  ducked  quickly  into  his 
burrow.  Marilou  threw  another  at 
the  aperture  in  the  ground  and 
then  ran  over  and  with  the  inside 
of  her  foot  she  scraped  sand  into  it 
until  it  was  filled  to  the  surface. 
She  started  to  leave,  but  stopped. 

The  little  fellow  might  choke  to 
death,  she  thought,  it  wasn’t  his 
fault  she  had  to  live  on  Mars.  Satis- 
fied that  the  future  of  something 
was  dependent  on  her  whim,  she 
dug  the  sand  from  the  hole.  His 
little  yellow  eyes  peered  out  at  her. 

“Go  on  an’  live,”  she  said  mag- 
nanimously. 

She  got  up  and  brushed  the  sand 
from  her  knees  and  dress,  and 


75 


76 


TOM  LEAHY 


walked  slowly  down  the  red  road. 

The  noon  sun  was  relentless;  no- 
where was  there  relief  from  it. 
Marilou  squinted  and  shaded  her 
eyes  with  her  hand.  She  looked  in 
the  sky  for  one  of  those  infrequent 
Martian  rain  clouds,  but  the  deep 
blue  was  only  occasionally  spotted 
by  fragile  white  puffs.  Like  the  sun, 
they  had  no  regard  for  her,  either. 
They  were  too  concerned  with 
moving  toward  the  distant  moun- 
tains, there  to  cling  momentarily  to 
the  peaks  and  then  continue  on 
their  endless  route. 

Marilou  dabbed  the  moisture 
from  her  forehead  with  the  hem  of 
her  dress.  “I  know  one  thing,”  she 
mumbled.  “When  I grow  up.  I’ll 
get  to  Earth  an’  never  come  back 
to  Mars,  no  matter  what!” 

She  broke  into  a defiant,  ca- 
denced  step. 

“An’  I won’t  care  whether  you 
an’  Mommy  like  it  or  not!”  she  de- 
clared aloud,  sticking  out  her  chin 
at  an  imaginary  father  before  her. 

Before  she  realized  it,  a tiny, 
lime-washed  stone  house  appeared 
not  a hundred  yards  ahead  of  her. 
That  was  the  odd  thing  about  the 
Martian  midday;  something  small 
and  miles  away  would  suddenly  be- 
come large  and  very  near  as  you  ap- 
proached it. 

The  heat  waves  did  it,  her  father 
had  told  her.  “Really?”  she  had 
replied,  and — you  think  you  know 
so  doggone  much,  she  had  thought. 

n AUNT  TWYLEEl”  She  broke 
into  a run.  By  the  Joshua 
trees,  through  the  stone  gateway 
she  ran,  and  with  a leap  she  lit  like 
a young  frog  on  the  porch.  “Hi, 


Aunt  Twylee!”  she  said  breathless- 

An  ancient  Martian  woman  sat 
in  a rocking  chair  in  the  shade  of 
the  porch.  She  held  a bowl  of  pur- 
ple river  apples  in  her  lap.  Her  pa- 
pyrus-like hands  moved  quickly  as 
she  shaved  the  .skin  from  one.  In  a 
matter  of  seconds  it  was  peeled. 
She  looked  up  over  her  bifocals  at 
the  panting  Marilou. 

“Gracious  child,  you  shouldn’t 
run  like  that  this  time  of  day,”  she 
said.  “You  Earth  children  aren’t 
used  to  our  Martian  heat.  It’ll 
make  you  sick  if  you  run  too 
much.” 

“I  don’t  care!  I hate  Mars! 
Sometimes  I wish  I could  just  get 
good  an’  sick,  so’s  I’d  get  to  go 
home!” 

“Marilou,  you  are  a little  ty- 
rant!” Aunt  Twylee  laughed. 

“Watcha’  doin’.  Aunt  Twylee?” 
Marilou  asked,  getting  up  from  her 
frog  posture  and  coming  near  the 
old  Martian  lady’s  chair. 

“Oh,  peeling  apples,  dear.  I’m 
going  to  make  a cobbler  this  after- 
noon.” She  dropped  the  last  ap- 
ple, peeled,  into  the  bowl.  “There, 
done.  Would  you  like  a little  cool 
apple  juice,  Marilou?” 

“Sure — you  betcha!  Hey,  could 
I watch  you  make  the  cobbler. 
Aunt  Twylee,  could  I?  Mommy 
can’t  make  it  for  anything — it  tastes 
like  glue.  Maybe,  if  I could  see  how 
you  do  it,  maybe  I could  show  her. 
Do  you  think?” 

“Now,  Marilou,  your  mother 
must  be  a wonderful  cook  to  have 
raised  such  a healthy  little  girl.  I’m 
sure  there’s  nothing  she  could  learn 
from  me,”  Aunt  Twylee  said  as  she 
arose.  “Let’s  go  inside  and  have 


ONE  MARTIAN  AFTERNOON 


77 


that  apple  juice.” 

The  kitchen  was  dark  and  cool, 
and  filled  with  the  odors  of  the 
wonderful  edibles  the  old  Martian 
had  created  on  and  in  the  Earth- 
made  stove.  She  opened  the  Earth- 
made  refrigerator  that  stood  in  the 
corner  and  withdrew  an  Earth- 
made  bottle  filled  with  Martian  ap- 
ple juice. 

Marilou  jumped  up  on  the  table 
and  sat  cross-legged. 

“Here,  dear.”  Aunt  Twylee 
handed  her  a glass  of  the  icy  liquid. 

“Ummm,  thanks,”  Marilou  said, 
and  gulped  down  half  the  contents. 
“That  tastes  dreamy,  Aunt  Twy- 
lee.” 

The  little  girl  watched  the  old 
Martian  as  she  lit  the  oven  and 
gathered  the  necessary  ingredients 
for  the  cobbler.  As  she  bent  over  to 
get  a bowl  from  the  shelf  beneath 
Marilou’s  perch,  her  hair  brushed 
against  the  child’s  knee.  Her  hair 
was  soft,  soft  and  white  as  a pup- 
py’s, soft  and  white  like  the  down 
from  a dandelion.  She  smiled  at 
Marilou.  She  always  smiled;  her 
pencil-thin  mouth  was  a perpetual 
arc. 

Marilou  drained  the  glass. 
“Aunt  Twylee— is  it  true  what  my 
daddy  says  about  the  Martians?” 
“True?  How  can  I say,  dear?  I 
don’t  know  what  he  said.” 

“Well,  I mean,  that  when  us 
Earth  people  came,  you  Martians 
did  inf  . . . infan  . . .” 

“Infanticide?”  Aunt  Twylee  in- 
terrupted, rolling  the  dough  on  the 
board  a little  flatter,  a little  faster. 

“Yes,  that’s  it — killed  babies,” 
Marilou  said,  and  took  an  apple 
from  the  bowl.  “My  daddy  says  you 
were  real  primitive,  an’  killed  your 


babies  for  some  silly  religious  rea- 
son. I think  that’s  awful!  How 
could  it  be  religious?  God  couldn’t 
like  to  have  little  babies  killed!” 
She  took  a big  bite  of  the  apple; 
the  juice  ran  from  the  corners  of 
her  mouth. 

“Your  daddy  is  a very  intelligent 
man,  Marilou,  but  he’s  partially 
wrong.  It  is  true — but  not  for  re- 
ligious reasons.  It  was  a necessity. 
You  must  remember,  dear.  Mars  is 
very  arid — sterile — unable  to  sus- 
tain many  living  things.  It  was  aw- 
ful, but  it  was  the  only  way  we 
knew  to  control  the  population.” 


Marilou  looked  down 

her  button  nose  as  she  picked 
a brown  spot  from  the  apple. 
“Hmmph,  I’ll  tell  ’im  he’s  wrong,” 
she  said.  “He  thinks  he  knows  so 
damn  much!” 

“Marilou!”  Aunt  Twylee  ex- 
claimed as  she  looked  over  her 
glasses.  “A  sweet  child  like  you 
shouldn’t  use  such  language!” 
Marilou  giggled  and  popped  the 
remaining  portion  of  the  apple  in 
her  mouth. 

“Do  your  parents  know  where 
you  are,  child?”  Aunt  Twylee 
asked,  as  she  took  the  bowl  from 
Marilou’s  hands.  She  began  dicing 
the  apples  into  a dough-lined  cas- 
sarole. 

“No,  they  don’t,”  Marilou  re- 
plied. She  sprayed  the  air  with  lit- 
tle particles  of  apple  as  she  talked. 
“Everybody’s  gone  to  the  hills  to 
look  for  the  boys.” 

“The  boys?”  Aunt  Twylee 
stopped  her  work  and  looked  at  the 
little  girl. 

“Yes — Jimmy  an’  Eddie  an’  some 


78 


TOM  LEAHY 


of  the  others  disappeared  from  the 
settlement  this  morning.  The 
men’re  afraid  they’ve  run  off  to  th’ 
hills  an’  the  renegades  got  ’em.” 

“Gracious,”  Aunt  Twylee  said; 
her  brow  knitted  into  a criss-cross 
of  wrinkles. 

“Oh,  I know  those  dopes. 
They’re  prob’ly  down  at  th’  canals 
— fishin’  or  somep’n.” 

“Just  the  same,  your  mother  will 
be  frantic,  dear.  You  should  have 
told  her  where  you  were  going.” 

“I  don’t  care,”  Marilou  said 
with  unadulterated  honesty.  “She’ll 
be  all  right  when  I get  home.” 

Aunt  Twylee  shook  her  head 
and  clucked  her  tongue. 

“Can  I have  another  glass? 
Please?” 

The  old  lady  poured  the  glass 
full  again.  And  then  she  sprinkled 
sugar  down  among  the  apple  cubes 
in  the  cassarole  and  covered  them 
with  a blanket  of  dough.  She  cut 
an  uneven  circle  of  half  moons  in 
it  and  put  it  in  the  oven.  “There — 
all  ready  to  bake,  Marilou,”  she 
sighed. 

“It  looks  real  yummy,  Aunt  Twy- 
lee.” 

“Well,  I certainly  hope  it  turns 
out  good,  dear,”  she  said,  wiping 
her  forehead  with  her  apron.  She 
looked  out  the  open  back  door. 
The  landscape  was  beginning  to 
gray  as  heavier  clouds  moved  down 
from  the  mountains  and  pressed  the 
afternoon  heat  closer,  more  oppres- 
sively to  the  ground.  “My,  it’s  get- 
ting hot.  I wouldn’t  be  a bit  sur- 
prised if  we  didn’t  get  a little  rain 
this  afternoon,  Marilou.”  She 
turned  back  to  the  little  girl.  “Tell 
me  some  more  about  your  daddy, 
dear.  We  Martians  certainly  owe  a 


lot  to  men  like  your  father.” 

“That’s  what  he  says  too.  He 
says,  you  Martians  would  have  died 
out  in  a few  years,  if  we  hadn’t 
come  here.  We’re  so  much  more 
civi  . . . civili  . . 

“Civilized?” 

“Yeah.  He  says,  we  were  so  much 
more  ‘civ-ilized’  than  you  that  we 
saved  your  lives  when  we  came 
here  with  all  our  modern  stuff.” 
“Well,  that’s  true  enough,  dear. 
Just  look  at  that  wonderful  Earth 
stove,”  Aunt  Twylee  said,  and 
laughed.  “We  wouldn’t  be  able  to 
bake  an  apple  cobbler  like  that 
without  it,  would  we?” 


RUMBLE  of  thunder  shoul- 
dered through  the  crow'ded 
hot  air. 

“No.  He  says,  you  Martians  are 
kinda  likeable,  but  you  can’t  be 
trusted.  He’s  nuts!  I like  you  Mar- 
tians!” 

“Thank  you,  child,  but  every- 
one’s endtled  to  his  own  opinion. 
Don’t  judge  your  daddy  too  severe- 
ly,” Aunt  Twylee  said  as  she 
scraped  spilled  sugar  from  the 
table  and  put  little  bits  of  it  on  her 
tongue. 

“He  says  that  you’d  bite  th’  hand 
that  feeds  you.  He  says,  we  brought 
all  these  keen  things  to  Mars,  an’ 
that  if  you  got  th’  chance,  you’d 
kill  all  of  us!” 

“Gracious,”  said  Aunt  Twylee  as 
she  speared  scraps  of  dough  with 
the  point  of  her  long  paring  knife. 

“He’s  a dope!”  Marilou  said. 

Aunt  Twylee  opened  the  oven 
and  peeked  in  at  the  cobbler.  The 
aroma  of  the  simmering  apples 
rushed  out  and  filled  the  room. 


ONE  MARTIAN  AFTERNOON 


79 


“Could  I have  some  cobbler 
when  it’s  done?”  Marilou  asked, 
her  mouth  filling  with  saliva. 

“I’m  afraid  not,  child.  It’s  get- 
ting rather  late.” 

The  thunder  rumbled  again — a 
little  closer,  a little  louder. 

The  old  lady  washed  the  blade 
of  the  knife  in  the  sink.  “Tell  me 
more  of  what  your  father  says, 
dear,”  she  said  as  she  adjusted  the 
bifocals  on  her  thin  nose  and  ran 
her  thumb  along  the  length  of  the 
knife’s  blade. 

“Oh,  nothin’  much  more.  He  just 
says  that  you’d  kill  us  if  you  had  th’ 
chance.  That’s  the  way  the  inferior 
races  always  act,  he  says.  They  want 
to  kill  th’  people  that  help  ’em, 
’cause  they  resent  ’em.” 

“Very  interesting.” 

“Well,  it  isn’t  so,  is  it.  Aunt  Twy- 
lee?” 

The  room  was  filled  with  blind- 
ing blue-white  light,  and  the  walls 
quaked  at  the  sound  of  a monstrous 
thunderclap. 

The  old  Martian  glanced  nerv- 
ously at  the  clock  on  the  wall.  “My, 
it  is  getting  late,”  she  said  as  she 
fondled  the  knife  in  her  hands. 

“You  Martians  wouldn’t  do  any- 
thing like  that,  would  you?” 

“You  want  the  truth,  don’t  you, 
dear?”  Aunt  Twylee  asked,  smiling, 
as  she  walked  to  the  table  where 
Marilou  sat. 


“’Course  I do.  Aunt  Twylee,” 
she  said. 

Her  scream  was  answered  and 
smothered  by  the  horrendous  roar 
of  the  thunder,  and  the  piercing 
hiss  of  the  rain  that  fell  in  sheets. 
In  great  volumes  of  water,  it  fell,  as 
though  the  heavens  were  attempt- 
ing to  wash  the  sins  of  man  from 
the  universe  and  into  non-existence 
in  the  void  beyond  the  void. 


Marilou  lay  beside  the 

other  children.  Aunt  Twylee 
smiled  at  them,  closed  the  bedroom 
door  and  returned  to  the  kitchen. 

The  storm  had  moved  on;  the 
thunder  was  the  faint  grumbling  of 
a pacified  old  man.  What  water  fell 
was  a monotonous  trickle  from  the 
eaves  of  the  lime-washed  stone 
house.  Aunt  Twylee  washed  the 
blood  from  the  knife  and  wiped  it 
dry  on  her  apron.  She  opened  the 
oven  and  took  out  the  browned 
cobbler.  Sweet  apple  juice  bubbled 
to  the  surface  through  the  half 
moons  and  burst  in  delights  of  sug- 
ary aroma.  The  sun  broke  through 
the  thinning  edge  of  the  thunder- 
head. 

Aunt  Twylee  brushed  a lock  of 
her  feathery  white  hair  from  her 
moist  cheek.  “Gracious,”  she  said, 
“I  must  tidy  up  a bit  before  the 
others  come.” 


THE  E'ND 


Donald  W.  Kerst 


Donald  w.  kerst  is  proba- 
bly unknown  except  in  the  up- 
per strata  of  scientific  research, 
but  he’s  the  man  who  is  almost 
solely  responsible  for  the  betatron. 

The  lanky  six-footer  was  born  in 
Galena,  Kansas,  in  1911.  The 
Kerst  family  moved  to  Wawatosa, 
Wisconsin,  when  Donald  was  less 
than  two  years  old,  and  it  was  in 
this  small  town  that  Don  grew  up 
and  went  to  high  school.  He  had  a 
school  chum  who  was  an  ardent 
amateur  radio  operator,  and  it  was 
while  helping  this  friend  build  con- 
stantly better  ham  apparatus  that 
Donald  Kerst’s  interest  in  science 
grew  into  an  abiding  passion.  He 
entered  the  University  of  Wiscon- 
sin where  he  got  both  his  B.  A.  and 
his  Ph.D.  After  a year  at  the  Gen- 


Personalities 
in  Science 

His  Specialty:  T urning 

New  Corners 


eral  Electric  Laboratories  working 
with  X-ray  tubes,  he  accepted  the 
post  of  Professor  of  Physics  at  the 
University  of  Iowa. 

Kerst  had  started  research  into 
the  nature  of  the  atom  while  stud- 
ying for  his  doctorate,  and  now  he 
picked  up  where  he  had  left  off.  In 
1941  he  was  able  to  announce  that 
he  had  achieved  a new  instrument 
of  research  capable  of  accelerating 
electrons  to  a velocity  approximat- 
ing the  speed  of  light,  or  186,000 
miles  per  second!  He  described  this 
new  too]  as  a “rheotron,  the  heart 
of  which  is  a doughnut-shaped 
glass  vacuum  tube  placed  between 
the  poles  of  a large  electromagnet.” 

The  United  States  Government 
snapped  up  the  new  instrument 
for  use  in  arsenals  and  on  the  Man- 
hattan Project  during  the  war.  It 
was  a dependable,  foolproof,  eco- 
nomical tool  with  the  ability  to 
penetrate  twenty  inches  of  steel 
with  its  radiation  in  twenty  min- 
utes, and  to  detect  flaws  of  two- 
thousandths  of  an  inch.  The  units 
used  in  arsenals  are  able  to  detect 
flaws  in  bombs  and  shells  so  they 
can  be  corrected,  eliminating  any 
danger  of  the  projectiles  exploding 
prematurely. 


PERSONALITIES  IN  SCIENCE 


81 


The  commercial  betatron  was 
five  feet  by  ten  feet  and  housed 
behind  a three-foot  reinforced  con- 
crete wall  in  a specially  designed 
building.  In  this  particular  ma- 
chine the  electrons  from  a hot  fila- 
ment were  speeded  in  their  accel- 
eration by  electrical  impulses  until 
they  reached  20,000,000  volts — 
then  released  from  the  tube  as  beta 
rays  or  directed  at  a metal  target 
which  converted  them  into  X-rays. 


ALTHOUGH  the  government 
-i^was  using  the  betatron  during 
the  war  and  finding  it  most  satis- 
factory, Kerst  went  right  on  im- 
proving the  machine  and  its  per- 
formance. Ever  since  the  first  beta- 
tron worked,  the  desire  of  the  sci- 
entists and  physicists  was  to  pro- 
duce particles  with  cosmic  ray  en- 
ergies. Within  four  years  after  the 
commercial  betatron,  Kerst  was 
able  to  produce  one  that  achieved  a 
22,000,000-volt  free-electron  beam 
with  which  it  was  po.ssible  to  pene- 
trate to  the  core  of  the  atom  and  to 
study  the  nucleus  in  a way  that  had 
never  before  been  possible. 

After  fifteen  months  of  actual 
construction  work  the  super-beta- 
tron was  ready  for  a trial  run. 
When  asked  by  reporters  to  predict 
the  performance  of  the  machine 
and  the  possibility  that  mesons 
could  be  produced,  Kerst  answered, 
“To  ask  what  we  expect  is  like  ask- 
ing what’s  around  a corner  that 
we’ve  never  gone  around  before.” 
Two  days  after  the  unveiling  the 
super-betatron  fulfilled  all  hopes 
and  produced  what  has  been  de- 
scribed as  “torrents  of  mesons.” 

In  order  to  understand  just  what 


the  invention  of  the  betatron 
means,  we  need  to  know  exactly 
what  a meson  is.  What  we  know 
about  it  is  rather  slim,  as  a matter 
of  fact,  and  what  we  hope  to  learn 
with  the  help  of  the  super-betatron 
is  of  vital  importance.  The  meson 
is  the  fourth  basic  particle  of  sub- 
atomic matter  (the  other  three  are 
the  proton,  the  neutron  and  the 
electron).  It  is  believed  to  be  the 
binding  force  that  holds  all  nu- 
clei together.  Heretofore  mesons 
have  been  studied  by  means  of 
high-altitude  balloons  with  special 
photographic  apparatus  to  record 
their  passage  once  they’ve  been 
split  from  the  nuclei  in  the  earth’s 
atmosphere  by  incoming  cosmic 
rays.  The  force  necessary  to  split 
the  mesons  from  the  nuclei  has  up 
until  now  been  unattainable  any- 
where but  at  this  high  altitude. 

The  program  of  improving  the 
betatron  and  making  it  an  even 
more  useful  tool  than  the  present 
model  goes  right  on,  with  Dr.  Don- 
ald Kerst  working  at  it  full  time. 
The  blue-eyed,  brown-haired  man 
of  science  has  little  time  for  leisure ; 
he  feels  that  there  is  too  much  left 
undone  in  this  particular  field. 
His  wife  Dorothy  and  his  young 
son  and  daughter  know  that  the 
one  way  to  get  Dad’s  nose  off  the 
grindstone  is  to  suggest  a family 
canoeing  or  skiing  excursion.  These 
are  his  favorite  recreations. 

“As  long  as  the  water  holds  out 
and  the  snow  stays,  we  know  we 
can  have  him  around  with  us,” 
says  Mrs.  Kerst,  “but  you  can’t 
stop  him  from  mulling  things  over 
even  then.  He’s  what  you  might 
call  ‘wrapped  up  in  his  work’.” 

— epw 


Does  your  wife  call  you  Pumpkinhead?  Well, 
maybe  it’s  not  an  insult;  it  might  be  a pet  name. 
Ah — but  whose  pet  name? 


WEAK  OH  SQUARE  ROOTS 

By  Russell  Burton 

Illustrated  by  TOM  BEECHAM 


AS  HIS  COACH  sped  through 
dusk-darkened  Jersey  meadows, 
Ronald  Lovegear,  fourteen  years 
with  Allied  Electronix,  embraced 
his  burden  with  both  arms,  silently 
cursing  the  engineer  who  was  de- 
liberately rocking  the  train.  In  his 
thin  chest  he  nursed  the  conviction 
that  someday  there  would  be  an  in- 
telligent robot  at  the  throttle  of  the 
5:10  to  Philadelphia. 

He  carefully  moved  one  hand 
and  took  a notebook  from  his  pock- 
et. That  would  be  a good  thing  to 
mention  at  the  office  next  Monday. 

Again  he  congratulated  himself 
for  having  induced  his  superiors  to 
let  him  take  home  the  company’s 
most  highly  developed  mechanism 
to  date.  He  had  already  forgiven 
himself  for  the  little  white  lie  that 
morning. 

“Pascal,”  he  had  told  them,  “is 
a little  weak  on  square  roots.”  That 
had  done  it! 

Old  Hardwick  would  never  per- 
mit an  Allied  computer  to  hit  the 


market  that  was  not  the  absolute 
master  of  square  roots.  If  Love- 
gear  wanted  to  work  on  Pascal  on 
his  own  time  it  was  fine  with  the 
boss. 

Ronald  Lovegear  consulted  his 
watch.  He  wondered  if  his  wife 
would  be  on  time.  He  had  told 
Corinne  twice  over  the  phone  to 
bring  the  station  wagon  to  met  him. 
But  she  had  been  so  forgetful  lately. 
It  was  probably  the  new  house;  six 
rooms  to  keep  up  without  a maid 
was  quite  a chore.  His  pale  eyes 
blinked.  He  had  a few  ideas  along 
that  line  too.  He  smiled  and  gave 
the  crate  a gentle  pat. 

CORINNE  WAS  at  the  station, 
and  she  had  brought  the  station 
wagon.  Lovegear  managed  to  get 
the  crate  to  the  stairs  of  the  coach 
where  he  consented  to  the  assist- 
ance of  a porter. 

“It’s  not  really  heavy,”  he  told 
Corinne  as  he  and  the  porter  wad- 


84 


RUSSELL  BURTON 


died  through  the  crowd.  “Actually 
only  57  pounds,  four  ounces.  Alumi- 
num casing,  you  know; . .” 

“No,  I didn’t.  . .”  began  Corinne. 

“But  it’s  delicate,”  he  continued. 
“If  I should  drop  this. . He  shud- 
dered. 

After  the  crate  had  been  placed 
lengthwise  in  the  rear  of  the  station 
wagon,  Corinne  watched  Ronald 
tuck  a blanket  around  it. 

“It’s  not  very  cold,  Ronald.” 

“I  don’t  want  it  to  get  bounced 
around,”  he  said.  “Now,  please, 
Corinne,  do  drive  carefully.”  Not 
until  she  had  driven  half  a block 
did  he  kiss  her  on  the  cheek.  Then 
he  glanced  anxiously  over  his  shoul- 
der at  the  rear  seat.  Once  he 
thought  Corinne  hit  a rut  that  could 
have  been  avoided. 

Long  after  Corinne  had  retired 
that  night  she  heard  Ronald  pound- 
ing with  a brass  hammer  down  in 
his  den.  At  first  she  had  insisted  he 
take  the  crate  out  to  his  workshop. 
He  looked  at  her  with  scientific 
aloofness  and  asked  if  she  had  the 
slightest  conception  of  what  “this 
is  worth?”  She  hadn’t,  and  she  went 
to  bed.  It  was  only  another  one  of 
his  gestures  which  was  responsible 
for  these  weird  dreams.  That  night 
she  dreamed  Ronald  brought  home 
a giant  octopus  which  insisted  on 
doing  the  dishes  for  her.  In  the 
morning  she  woke  up  feeling  un- 
wanted. 

Downstairs  Ronald  had  already 
put  on  the  coffee.  He  was  wearing 
his  robe  and  the  pinched  greyness 
of  his  face  told  Corinne  he  had 
been  up  half  the  night.  He  poured 
coffee  for  her,  smiling  wanly.  “If 
I have  any  commitments  today, 
Corinne,  will  you  please  see  that 


they  are  taken  care  of?” 

“But  you  were  supposed  to  get 
the  wallpaper  for  the  guest 
room.  . . .” 

“I  know,  I know,  dear.  But  time 
is  so  short.  They  might  want  Pascal 
back  any  day.  For  the  next  week  or 
two  I shall  want  to  devote  most  of 
my  time.  . .” 

“Pascal?” 

“Yes.  The  machine — the  com- 
puter.” He  smiled  at  her  ignorance. 
“We  usually  name  the  expensive 
jobs.  You  see,  a computer  of  this 
nature  is  really  the  heart  and  soul 
of  the  mechanical  man  we  will  con- 
struct.” 

Corinne  didn’t  see,  but  in  a few 
minutes  she  strolled  toward  the  den, 
balancing  her  coffee  in  both  hands. 
With  one  elbow  she  eased  the  door 
open.  There  it  was:  an  innocent 
polished  cabinet  reaching  up  to  her 
shoulders.  Ronald  had  removed  one 
of  the  plates  from  its  side  and  she 
peeped  into  the  section  where  the 
heart  and  soul  might  be  located. 
She  saw  only  an  unanatomical 
array  of  vacuum  tubes  and  elec- 
trical relays. 

She  felt  Ronald  at  her  back.  “It 
looks  like  the  inside  of  a juke  box,” 
she  said. 

He  beamed.  “The  same  relay 
systems  used  in  the  simple  juke  box 
are  incorporated  in  a computer.” 
He  placed  one  hand  lovingly  on 
the  top  of  the  cabinet. 

“But,  Ronald — it  doesn’t  even  re- 
semble a — a mechanical  man?” 

“That’s  because  it  doesn’t  have 
any  appendages  as  yet.  You  know, 
arms  and  legs.  That’s  a relatively 
simple  adjustment.”  He  winked  at 
Corinne  with  a great  air  of  com- 
plicity. “And  I have  some  excellent 


WEAK  ON  SQUARE  ROOTS 


85 


ideas  along  that  line.  Now,  run 
along,  because  I’ll  be  busy  most  of 
the  day.” 

CORINNE  RAN  along.  She 
spent  most  of  the  day  shopping 
for  week-end  necessities.  On  an  ir- 
rational last-minute  impulse — per- 
haps an  unconscious  surrender  to 
the  machine  age — she  dug  in  the 
grocery  deep  freeze  and  brought 
out  a couple  of  purple  steaks. 

That  evening  she  had  to  call 
Ronald  three  times  for  dinner,  and 
when  he  came  out  of  the  den  she 
noticed  that  he  closed  the  door  the 
way  one  does  upon  a small  child. 
He  chattered  about  inconsequential 
matters  all  through  dinner.  Corinne 
knew  that  his  work  was  going 
smoothly.  A few  minutes  later  she 
was  to  know  how  smoothly. 

It  started  when  she  began  to  put 
on  her  apron  to  do  the  dishes.  “Let 
that  go  for  now,  dear,”  Ronald  said, 
taking  the  apron  from  her.  He 
went  into  the  den,  returning  with 
a small  black  box  covered  with 
push  buttons.  “Now  observe  care- 
fully,” he  said,  his  voice  pitched 
high. 

He  pushed  one  of  the  buttons, 
waited  a second  with  his  ear  cocked 
toward  the  den,  then  pushed 
another. 

Corinne  heard  the  turning  of 
metal  against  metal,  and  she  slowly 
turned  her  head. 

“Oh!”  She  suppressed  a shriek, 
clutching  Ronald’s  arm  so  tightly 
he  almost  dropped  the  control  box. 

Pascal  was  walking  under  his  own 
effort,  considerably  taller  now  with 
the  round,  aluminum  legs  Ronald 
had  given  him.  Two  metal  arms 


also  hung  at  the  sides  of  the  cab- 
inet. One  of  these  raised  stiffly,  as 
though  for  balance.  Corinne’s 
mouth  opened  as  she  watched  the 
creature  jerk  awkwardly  across  the 
living  room. 

“Oh,  Ronald!  The  fishbowl!” 

Ronald  stabbed  knowingly  at 
several  buttons. 

Pascal  pivoted  toward  them,  but 
not  before  his  right  arm  swung 
out  and,  almost  contemptuously, 
brushed  the  fishbowl  to  the  floor. 

Corinne  closed  her  eyes  at  the 
crash.  Then  she  scooped  up  several 
little  golden  bodies  and  rushed  for 
the  kitchen.  When  she  returned 
Ronald  was  picking  up  pieces  of 
glass  and  dabbing  at  the  pool  of 
water  with  one  of  her  bathroom 
towels.  Pascal,  magnificently  aloof, 
was  standing  in  the  center  of  the 
mess. 

“I’m  sorry.”  Ronald  looked  up. 
“It  was  my  fault.  I got  confused 
on  the  buttons.” 

But  Corinne’s  glances  toward  the 
rigid  Pascal  held  no  indictment.  She 
was  only  mystified.  There  was  some- 
thing wrong  here. 

“But  Ronald,  he’s  so  ugly  with- 
out a head.  I thought  that  all 
robots — ” 

“Oh,  no,”  he  explained,  “we 
would  put  heads  on  them  for  dis- 
play purposes  only.  Admittedly  that 
captures  the  imagination  of  the 
public.  That  little  adapter  shaft  at 
the  top  could  be  the  neck,  of 
course.  . . .” 

He  waved  Corinne  aside  and  con- 
tinued his  experiments  with  the 
home-made  robot.  Pascal  moved  in 
controlled  spasms  around  the  living 
room.  Once,  he  walked  just  a little 
too  close  to  the  floor-length  win- 


86 

dow — and  Corinne  stood  up  nerv- 
ously. But  Ronald  apparently  had 
mastered  the  little  black  box. 

With  complete  confidence  Co- 
rinne went  into  the  kitchen  to  do 
the  dishes.  Not  until  she  was  elbow 
deep  in  suds  did  she  recall  her 
dreams  about  the  octopus.  She 
looked  over  her  shoulder,  and  the 
curious,  unwanted  feeling  came 
again. 

The  following  afternoon — 
after  Ronald  had  cancelled 
their  Sunday  drive  into  the  country 
— Pascal,  with  constant  exhorta- 
tions by  Ronald  at  the  black  box, 
succeeded  in  vacuum  cleaning  the 
entire  living  room.  Ronald  was  ec- 
static. 

“Now  do  you  understand?”  he 
asked  Corinne.  “A  mechanical  serv- 
ant! Think  of  it!  Of  course  mass 
production  may  be  years  away, 
but.  . .” 

“Everyone  will  have  Thursday 
nights  off,”  said  Corinne — but  Ron- 
ald was  already  jabbing  at  buttons 
as  Pascal  dragged  the  vacuum 
cleaner  back  to  its  niche  in  the 
closet. 

Later,  Corinne  persuaded  Ron- 
ald to  take  her  to  a movie,  but  not 
until  the  last  moment  was  she  cer- 
tain that  Pascal  wasn’t  going  to 
drag  along. 

Every  afternoon  of  the  following 
week  Ronald  Lovegear  called  from 
the  laboratory  in  New  York  to  ask 
how  Pascal  was  getting  along. 

“Just  fine,”  Corinne  told  him  on 
Thursday  afternoon,  “But  he  cer- 
tainly ruined  some  of  the  tomato 
plants  in  the  garden.  He  just  doesn’t 
seem  to  hoe  in  a straight  line.  Are 


RUSSELL  BURTON 

you  certain  it’s  the  green  button  I 
push?” 

“It’s  probably  one  of  the  pressure 
regulators,”  interrupted  Ronald. 
“I’ll  check  it  when  I get  home.” 
Corinne  suspected  by  his  lowered 
voice  that  Mr.  Hardwick  had 
walked  into  the  lab. 

That  night  Pascal  successfully 
washed  and  dried  the  dishes,  crack- 
ing only  one  cup  in  the  process. 
Corinne  spent  the  rest  of  the  eve- 
ning sitting  in  the  far  corner  of  the 
living  room,  thumbing  the  pages  of 
a magazine. 

On  the  following  afternoon — 
prompted  perhaps  by  that  perverse 
female  trait  which  demands  com- 
pletion of  all  projects  once  started 
— Corinne  lingered  for  several  min- 
utes in  the  vegetable  department  at 
the  grocery.  She  finally  picked  out 
a fresh,  round  and  blushing  pump- 
kin. 

Later  in  her  kitchen,  humming  a 
little  tune  under  her  breath,  Co- 
rinne deftly  maneuvered  a paring 
knife  to  transform  the  pumpkin  in- 
to a very  reasonable  facsimile  of  a 
man’s  head.  She  placed  the  pump- 
kin over  the  tiny  shaft  between  Pas- 
cal’s box-shaped  shoulders  and 
stepped  back. 

She  smiled  at  the  moon-faced 
idiot  grinning  back  at  her.  He  was 
complete,  and  not  bad-looking!  But 
just  before  she  touched  the  red  but- 
ton once  and  the  blue  button  twice 
— which  sent  Pascal  stumbling  out, 
to  the  backyard  to  finish  weeding 
the  circle  of  pansies  before  dinner 
— she  wondered  about  the  gash  that 
was  his  mouth.  She  distinctly  re- 
membered carving  it  so  that  the 
ends  curved  upward  into  a frozen 
and  quite  harmless  smile.  But  one 


WEAK  ON  SQUARE  ROOTS 

end  of  the  toothless  grin  seemed  to 
sag  a little,  like  the  cynical  smile  of 
one  who  knows  his  powers  have 
been  underestimated. 

Corinne  would  not  have  had  to 
worry  about  her  husband’s  reaction 
to  the  new  vegetable-topped  Pascal. 
Ronald  accepted  the  transforma- 
tion good-naturedly,  thinking  that 
a little  levity,  once  in  a while,  was 
a good  thing. 

“And  after  all,”  said  Corinne 
later  that  evening,  “I’m  the  one 
who  has  to  spend  all  day  in  the 
house  with.  . .”  She  lowered  her 
voice : “With  Pascal.” 

But  Ronald  wasn’t  listening.  He 
retired  to  his  den  to  finish  the  plans 
for  the  mass  production  of  com- 
petent mechanical  men.  One  for 
every  home  in  America.  . . He  fell 
asleep  with  the  thought. 

CORINNE  AND  PASCAL  spent 
the  next  two  weeks  going 
through  pretty  much  the  same  rou- 
tine. He,  methodically  jolting 
through  the  household  chores;  she, 
walking  aimlessly  from  room  to 
room,  smoking  too  many  cigarettes. 
She  began  to  think  of  Pascal  as  a 
boarder.  Strange — at  first  he  had 
been  responsible  for  that  unwanted 
feeling.  But  now  his  helpfulness 
around  the  house  had  lightened 
her  burden.  And  he  was  so  cheer- 
ful all  the  time!  After  living  with 
Ronald’s  preoccupied  frown  for 
seven  years.  . . 

After  luncheon  one  day,  when 
Pascal  neglected  to  shut  off  the  gar- 
den hose,  she  caught  herself  scold- 
ing him  as  if  he  were  human.  Was 
that  a shadow  from  the  curtain 


87 

waving  in  the  breeze,  or  did  she 
see  a hurt  look  flit  across  the  mouth 
of  the  pumpkin?  Corinne  put  out 
her  hand  and  patted  Pascal’s  cylin- 
drical wrist. 

It  was  warm — flesh  warm. 

She  hurried  upstairs  and  stood 
breathing  heavily  with  her  back  to 
the  door.  A little  later  she  thought 
she  heard  someone — someone  with 
a heavy  step — moving  around 
downstairs. 

“I  left  the  control  box  down 
there,”  she  thought.  “Of  course,  it’s 
absurd.  . . .” 

At  four  o’clock  she  went  slowly 
down  the  stairs  to  start  Ronald’s 
dinner.  Pascal  was  standing  by  the 
refrigerator,  exactly  where  she  had 
left  him.  Not  until  she  had  started 
to  peel  the  potatoes  did  she  notice 
the  little  bouquet  of  pansies  in  the 
center  of  the  table. 

Corinne  felt  she  needed  a strong 
cup  of  tea.  She  put  the  water  on 
and  placed  a cup  on  the  kitchen 
table.  Not  until  she  was  going  to 
sit  down  did  she  decide  that  per- 
haps Pascal  should  be  in  the  other 
room. 

She  pressed  the  red  button,  the 
one  which  should  turn  him  around, 
and  the  blue  button,  which  should 
make  him  walk  into  the  living 
room.  She  heard  the  little  buzz  of 
mechanical  life  as  Pascal  began  to 
move.  But  he  did  not  go  into  the 
other  room ! He  was  holding  a chair 
for  her,  and  she  sat  down  rather 
heavily.  A sudden  rush  of  pleasure 
reddened  her  cheeks.  Not  since  so- 
rority days.  . . 

Before  Pascal’s  arms  moved  away 
she  touched  his  wrist  again,  softly, 
only  this  time  her  hand  lingered. 
And  his  wrist  was  warm! 


88 


RUSSELL  BURTON 


"Xi^HEN  DO  THEY  want 
VV  Pascal  back  at  the  lab?” 
she  asked  Ronald  at  dinner  that 
evening,  trying  t<J  keep  her  voice 
casual. 

Ronald  smiled.  “I  think  I might 
have  him  indefinitely,  dear.  I’ve 
got  Hardwick  convinced  I’m  work- 
ing on  something  revolutionary.” 
He  stopped.  “Oh,  Corinne!  You’ve 
spilled  coffee  all  over  yourself.” 

The  following  night  Ronald  was 
late  in  getting  home  from  work.  It 
was  raining  outside  the  Newark 
station  and  the  cabs  deliberately 
evaded  him.  He  finally  caught  a 
bus,  which  deposited  him  one  block 
from  his  house.  He  cut  through  the 
back  alley,  hurrying  through  the 
rain.  Just  before  he  started  up  the 
stairs  he  glanced  through  the 
lighted  kitchen  window.  He 
stopped,  gripping  the  railing  for 
support. 

In  the  living  room  were  Pascal 
and  Corinne.  Pascal  was  reclining 
leisurely  in  the  fireside  chair;  Co- 
rinne was  standing  in  front  of  him. 
It  was  the  expression  on  -her  face 
which  stopped  Ronald  Lovegear. 
The  look  was  a compound  of  re- 
straint and  compulsion,  the  reflec- 
tion of  some  deep  struggle  in  Co- 
rinne’s  soul.  Then  she  suddenly 
leaned  forward  and  pressed  her  lips 
to  Pascal’s  full,  fleshy  pumpkin 
mouth.  Slowly,  one  of  Pascal’s  alu- 
minum arms  moved  up  and  encir- 
cled her  waist. 

Mr.  Lovegear  stepped  back  into 
the  rain.  He  stood  there  for  several 
minutes.  The  rain  curled  around 
the  brim  of  his  hat,  dropped  to 
his  face,  and  rolled  down  his  cheeks 


with  the  slow  agitation  of  tears. 

When,  finally,  he  walked  around 
to  the  front  and  stamped  heavily 
up  the  stairs,  Corinne  greeted  him 
with  a flush  in  her  cheeks.  Ronald 
told  her  that  he  didn’t  feel  “quite 
up  to  dinner.  Just  coffee,  please.” 
When  it  was  ready  he  sipped  slowly, 
watching  Corinne’s  figure  as  she 
moved  around  the  room.  She 
avoided  looking  at  the  aluminum 
figure  in  the  chair. 

Ronald  put  his  coffee  down, 
walked  over  to  Pascal,  and,  grip- 
ping him  behind  the  shoulders, 
dragged  him  into  the  den. 

Corinne  stood  looking  at  the 
closed  door  and  listened  to  the  furi- 
ous pounding. 

Ten  MINUTES  LATER  Ronald 
came  out  and  went  straight  to 
the  phone. 

“Yes!  Immediately!”  he  told  the 
man  at  the  freight  office.  While  he 
sat  there  waiting  Corinne  walked 
upstairs. 

Ronald  did  not  offer  to  help  the 
freight  men  drag  the  box  outside. 
When  they  had  gone  he  went  into 
the  den  and  came  back  with  the 
pumpkin.  He  opened  the  back  door 
and  hurled  it  out  into  the  rain.  It 
cleared  the  back  fence  and  rolled 
down  the  alley  stopping  in  a small 
puddle  in  the  cinders. 

After  a while  the  water  level 
reached  the  mouth  and  there  was  a 
soft  choking  sound.  The  boy  who 
found  it  the  next  morning  looked  at 
the  mouth  and  wondered  why  any- 
one would  carve  such,  a sad  Jack- 
O’-Lantern. 


THE  END 


One  Mysfeiy — Still  Unsolved 

OSMIG  RAYS— which  .con- 
sist of  protons,  positrons,  mes- 
ons and  heavy  nuclei — are  particles 
that  are  speeded  up  in  space  to 
velocities  that  almost  equal  the 
speed  of  light.  These  tiny  pieces 
hit  the  Earth  constantly  at  tre- 
mendous energies  that  are  millions 
of  times  greater  than  scientists  can 
obtain  with  even  the  most  modern 
types  of  equipment. 

Despite  the  consistent  and  con- 
centrated study  being  made  by 
scientists,  cosmic  rays  remain  a 
mystery.  How  they  accelerate  to 
their  tremendous  speeds — their  na- 
ture and  where  they  come  from 
and  their  purpose — these  are  still 
unknown. 

The  cosmic  rays  that  shoot  in 
from  space  are  called  primary  ra- 
diation, and  these  hardly  ever  pene- 
trate Earth’s  atmosphere  to  sea 
level.  They  usually  hit  atoms  of 
gases  that  make  up  the  air,  invari- 
ably smashing  the  atom  and  send- 
ing its  particles — which  are  called 
secondary  cosmic  rays — off  in  many 
different  directions. 

Actually,  in  order  to  make  a 
complete  study  of  the  primary  cos- 
mic rays  under  perfect  conditions, 


we  should  have  a laboratory  at  least 
23  miles  above  Earth.  That’s  about 
where  the  original  particles  can  be 
found.  But  since  that  isn’t  possible 
— at  this  time  anyway — Navy  sci- 
entists send  up  balloons  containing 
various  sensitive  equipment.  Then, 
the  primary  rays  shoot  into  the 
equipment  leaving  tracks  on  the 
photographic  plates  for  later  cor- 
relation by  the  scientists.  Other 
equipment  radios  data  to  the  men 
on  the  ground  when  a cosmic  ray 
is  detected. 

Rockets  which  can  be  sent  that 
distance  into  the  atmosphere  don’t 
serve  the  purpose  because  they 
can’t  stay  up  very  long,  and  this 
type  of  project  requires  high  alti- 
tudes for  hours.  Balloons,  JFor  this 
reason,  have  been  found  to  bring 
much  more  successful  results. 

With  continued  research  and 
study,  the  mystery  of  the  cosmic 
ray  will  undoubtedly  unfold  and 
science  will  be  able  to  build  the 
solution  into  another  advance  for 
the  good  of  humanity. 

We  Should  Have  Stayed 
Prehistoric 

A STUDY  MADE  of  domestic 
rats  and  wild  rats  of  the  same 
family  indicates  a definite  pattern 
of  physiological  and  behavior  dif- 
ferences between  the  two  types. 
Which  would  lead  to  the  idea  that 
these  same  types  of  differences  pos- 
sibly e.xist  between  early  prehistoric 
man  and  civilized  man  as  we  know 
him  today. 

Man  was  probably  made  much 
more  susceptible  to  various  diseases 
by  the  very  process  of  becoming 

89 


90 


SCIENCE  BRIEFS 


civilized.  Illnesses  like  certain  forms 
of  colitis,  asthma,  rheumatoid  ar- 
thritis, some  forms  of  cancer,  some 
types  of  mental  illnesses — all  these 
may  be  the  products  that  developed 
as  the  civilization  grew. 

Quite  possibly,  as  man  developed 
from  the  state  of  a hard-fighting 
primitive  to  that  of  a domestic  se- 
cure individual,  certain  changes 
happened  to  his  adrenal  glands  and 
his  sex  glands  which  could  have 
been  great  enough  to  make  him  an 
easier  victim  to  certain  types  of  ail- 
ments. 

Maybe  he  should  have  stayed  a 
healthy  prehistoric  . . . 

Youth  for  the  Old 

TWO  BRITISH  scientists  have 
recently  performed  some  ex- 
periments the  results  of  which  are 
worthy  of  noting.  They  removed 
some  skin  from  the  ear  of  a rabbit 
and  impregnated  it  with  glycerine. 
Then  they  froze  it  and  kept  it 
stored  for  four  months,  after 
which  time  they  transplanted  the 
skin  and  found  it  would  grow 
normally. 

According  to  the  two  scientists — 
Dr.  R.  Billingham  and  Prof.  I.  Bed- 
awar — it  is  not  too  far-fetched  to 
assume  that  these  pieces  of  skin 
would  have  remained  in  storage,  in 
perfect  condition,  for  a period 
much  longer  than  the  normal  ex- 
pected life  span  of  their  donor. 

If  this  is  so,  then  the  aches  and 
pains  of  old  age  v/ill  soon  be  over — 
the  possibility  of  perpetuating 
youth  is  probable.  A man  might 
store,  for  example,  some  pieces  of 
his  own  arteries  and  veins.  In  his 
old  age,  when  he  is  suffering  from 


hardening  of  the  arteries,  all  he’d 
have  to  do  would  be  to  replace 
some  of  his  hardened  arteries  with 
those  belonging  to  his  youth. 

And,  for  the  vain,  no  more 
wrinkled  skin!  Just  store  some  tis- 
sues when  you’re  20,  pick  them  up 
and  let  them  grow  again  with  you 
when  you’re  50. 

It’s  an  interesting  possibility. 

The  freeze  method,  incidentally, 
is  an  acknowledged  advantage  over 
the  fresh  bank  method  since  it  has 
been  found  that  freeze  grafts  heal 
faster  and  there  is  less  danger  of 
hemorrhaging.  The  frozen  graft 
retains  its  potency. 

Man  Makes  Himself  Deaf 

There  is  no  sound  in  nature 
that  will  do  any  damage  to  the 
ear  drums  of  a human.  But  man 
has  set  out  to  master  nature.  And 
in  his  efforts  to  do  so,  he  exposes 
the  human  ear  to  degrees  of  sound 
for  which  it  was  never  intended, 
and  against  which  it  has  no  pro- 
tection. 

In  industry,  the  excessive  noises 
of  the  machinery  with  which  the 
worker  is  associated  eight  hours  of 
the  day  create  an  injury  to  the 
hearing  organ.  The  explosions  of 
grenades  and  gunfire,  the  violent 
sounds  made  by  airplane  motors 
and  jet  engines  and  all  the  other 
instruments  of  warfare,  all  contrib- 
ute their  share.  Even  day-to-day 
city  life  as  we  know  it  contains  an 
unnatural  amount  of  loud  and 
violent  noise. 

In  his  effort  to  become  master, 
man  is  slowly  destroying  bits  of 
himself.  — Peter  Dakin 


The  line  between  noble  dreams  and  madness  is 
thin,  and  loneliness  can  push  men  past  it ... . 


the  lonely  ones 

By  Edward  W,  Ludwig 

Illustrated  by  PAUL  ORBAN 


ONWARD  SPED  the  Wanderer, 
onward  through  cold,  silent  in- 
finity, on  and  on,  an  insignificant 
pencil  of  silver  lost  in  the  terrible, 
brooding  blackness. 

But  even  more  awful  than  the 
blackness  was  the  loneliness  of  the 
six  men  who  inhabited  the  silver 
rocket.  They  moved  in  loneliness  as 
fish  move  in  water.  Their  lives  re- 
volved in  loneliness  as  planets  re- 
volve in  space  and  time.  They  bore 
their  loneliness  like  a shroud,  and 
it  was  as  much  a part  of  them  as 
sight  in  their  eyes.  Loneliness  was 
both  their  brother  and  their  god. 

Yet,  like  a tiny  flame  in  the  dark- 
ness, there  was  hope,  a savage,  des- 
perate hope  that  grew  with  the 
passing  of  each  day,  each  month, 
and  each  year. 

And  at  last . . , 

“Lord,”  breathed  Captain  Sam 
Wiley. 

Lieutenant  Gunderson  nodded. 
“It’s  a big  one,  isn’t  it?” 


“It’s  a big  one,”  repeated  Cap- 
tain Wiley. 

They  stared  at  the  image  in  the 
Wanderedi  forward  visi-screen,  at 
the  great,  shining  gray  ball.  They 
stared  hard,  for  it  w'as  like  an  en- 
chanted, God-given  fruit  handed 
them  on  a star-flecked  platter  of 
midnight.  It  was  like  the  answer  to 
a^  thousand  prayers,  a shining  sym- 
bol of  hope  which  could  mean  the 
end  of  loneliness. 

“It’s  ten  times  as  big  as  Earth,” 
mused  Lieutenant  Gunderson.  “Do 
you  think  this’ll  be  it.  Captain?” 

“I’m  afraid  to  think.”  < 

A thoughtful  silence. 

“Captain.” 

“Yes?” 

“Do  you  hear  my  heart  pound- 
ing?” 

Captain  Wiley  smiled.  “No.  No, 
of  course  not.” 

“It  seems  like  everybody  should 
be  hearing  it.  But  we  shouldn’t  get 
excited,  should  we?  We  mustn’t 


THE  LONELY  ONES 


93 


hope  too  hard.”  He  bit  his  lip. 
“But  there  should  be  life  there, 
don’t  you  think,  Captain?” 

“There  may  be.” 

“Nine  years,  Captain.  Think  of 
it.  It’s  taken  us  nine  years  to  get 
here.  There’s  got  to  be  life.” 

“Prepare  for  deceleration,  Lieu- 
tenant.” 

Lieutenant  Gunderson’s  tall, 
slim  body  sagged  for  an  instant. 
Then  his  eyes  brightened. 

“Yes,  sir!” 

APT  AIN  SAM  WILEY  contin- 
ued to  stare  at  the  beautiful  gray 
globe  in  the  visi-screen.  He  was  not 
like  Gunderson,  with  boyish  eager- 
ness and  anxiety  flowing  out  of  him 
in  a ceaseless  babble.  His  emotion 
was  as  great,  or  greater,  but  it  was 
imprisoned  within  him,  like  swirl- 
ing, foaming  liquid  inside  a corked 
jug. 

It  wouldn’t  do  to  encourage  the 
men  too  much.  Because,  if  they 
were  disappointed  . . . 

He  shook  his  silver-thatched 
head.  There  it  was,  he  thought.  A 
new  world.  A world  that,  perhaps, 
held  life. 

Life.  It  was  a word  uttered  only 
with  reverence,  for  throughout  the 
Solar  System,  with  the  exception 
of  on  Earth,  there  had  been  only 
death. 

First  it  was  the  Moon,  airless  and 
lifeless.  That  had  been  expected,  of 
course. 

But  Mars.  For  centuries  men  had 
dreamed  of  Mars  and  written  of 
Mars  with  its  canals  and  dead 
cities,  with  its  ancient  men  and 
strange  animals.  Everyone  knew 
there  was  or  had  been  life  on  Mars. 


The  flaming  rockets  reached 
Mars,  and  the  canals  became  vol- 
canic crevices,  and  the  dead  cities 
became  jagged  peaks  of  red  stone, 
and  the  endless  sands  were  smooth, 
smooth,  smooth,  untouched  by  feet 
of  living  creatures.  There  was 
plant-life,  a species  of  green-red 
lichen  in  the  Polar  regions.  But  no- 
where was  there  real  life. 

Then  Venus,  with  its  dust  and 
wind.  No  life  there.  Not  even  the 
stars  to  make  one  think  of  home. 
Only  the  dust  and  wind,  a dark  veil 
of  death  screaming  eternally  over 
hot  dry  land. 

And  Jupiter,  with  its  seas  of  ice; 
and  hot  Mercury,  a cracked,  with- 
ered mummy  of  a planet,  baked  as 
hard  and  dry  as  an  ancient  walnut 
in  a furnace. 

Next,  the  airless,  rocky  asteroids, 
and  frozen  Saturn  with  its  swirling 
ammonia  snows.  And  last,  the 
white,  silent  worlds,  Uranus,  Nep- 
tune, and  Pluto. 

World  after  world,  all  dead, 
with  no  sign  of  life,  no  reminder  of 
life,  and  no  promise  of  life. 

Thus  the  loneliness  had  grown.  It 
was  not  a child  of  Earth.  It  was 
not  born  in  the  hearts  of  those  who 
scurried  along  city  pavements  or  of 
those  in  the  green  fields  or  of  those 
in  the  cool,  clean  houses. 

It  was  a child  of  the  incredible 
distances,  of  the  infinite  night,  of 
emptiness  and  silence.  It  was  born 
in  the  hearts  of  the  slit-eyed  men, 
the  oldish  young  men,  tlie  space- 
men. 

For  without  life  on  other  worlds, 
where  was  the  sky’s  challenge?  Why 
go  on  and  on  to  discover  only 
worlds  of  death? 

The  dream  of  the  spacemen 


94 

turned  from  the  planets  to  the  stars. 
Somewhere  in  the  galaxy  or  in 
other  galaxies  there  had  to  be  life. 
Life  was  a wonderful  and  precious 
thing.  It  wasn’t  right  that  it  should 
be  confined  to  a single,  tiny  planet. 
If  it  were,  then  life  would  seem 
meaningless.  Mankind  would  be  a 
freak,  a cosmic  accident. 

And  now  the  Wanderer  was  on 
the  first  interstellar  flight,  hurtling 
through  the  dark  spaces  to  Proxima 
Centauri.  Moving  silently,  as  if  mo- 
tionless, yet  at  a speed  of  160,000 
miles  a second.  And  ahead  loomed 
the  great,  gray  planet,  the  only 
planet  of  the  sun,  growing  larger, 
larger,  each  instant. . . . 

A GENTLE,  murmuring  hum 
filled  the  ship.  The  indicator 
lights  on  the  control  panel  glowed 
like  a swarm  of  pink  eyes. 

“Deceleration  compensator  ad- 
justed for  12  G’s,  sir,”  reported 
Lieutenant  Gunderson. 

Captain  Wiley  nodded,  still 
studying  the  image  of  the  planet. 

“There — there’s  something  else. 
Captain.” 

“Yes?” 

“It’s  Brown,  sir.  He’s  drunk.” 
Captain  Wiley  turned,  a scowl 
on  his  hard,  lined  face.  “Drunk? 
Where’d  he  get  the  stuff?” 

“He  saved  it,  sir,  saved  it  for 
nine  years.  Said  he  was  going  to 
drink  it  when  we  discovered  life.” 
“We  haven’t  discovered  life  yet.” 
“I  know.  He  said  he  wouldn’t  set 
foot  on  the  planet  if  he  was  sober. 
Said  if  there  isn’t  life  there,  he 
couldn’t  take  it — unless  he  was 
drunk.” 


EDWARD  W.  LUDWIG 

Captain  Wiley  grunted.  “All 
right.” 

They  looked  at  the  world. 

“Wouldn’t  it  be  wonderful.  Cap- 
tain? Just  think — to  meet  another 
race.  It  wouldn’t  matter  what  they 
were  like,  would  it?  If  they  were 
primitive,  we  could  teach  them 
things.  If  they  were  ahead  of  us, 
they  could  teach  us.  You  know 
what  I’d  like?  To  have  someone 
meet  us,  to  gather  around  us.  It 
wouldn’t  matter  if  they  were  afraid 
of  us  or  even  if  they  tried  to  kill  us. 
We’d  know  that  we  aren’t  alone.” 

“I  know  what  you  mean,”  said 
Captain  Wiley.  Some  of  his  emo- 
tion overflowed  the  prison  of  his 
body.  “There’s  no  thrill  in  landing 
on  dead  worlds.  If  no  one’s  there  to 
see  you,  you  don’t  feel  like  a hero.” 

“That’s  it.  Captain!  That’s  why 
I came  on  this  crazy  trip.  I guess 
that’s  why  we  all  came.  I . . .” 

Captain  Wiley  cleared  his  throat. 
“Lieutenant,  commence  deceler- 
ation. 6 G’s.” 

“Yes,  sir!” 

The  planet  grew  bigger,  filling 
the  entire  visi-screen. 

Someone  coughed  behind  Cap- 
tain Wiley. 

“Sir,  the  men  would  like  to  look 
at  the  screen.  They  can’t  see  the 
planet  out  of  the  ports  yet.”  The 
speaker  was  Doyle,  the  ship’s  En- 
gineer, a dry,  tight-skinned  little 
man. 

“Sure.”  Captain  Wiley  stepped 
aside. 

Doyle  looked,  then  Parker  and 
Fong.  Just  three  of  them,  for  Wat- 
kins had  sliced  his  wrists  the  fourth 
year  out.  And  Brown  was  drunk. 

As  they  looked,  a realization 
came  to  Captain  Wiley.  The  men 


THE  LONELY  ONES 


95 


were  getting  old.  The  years  had 
passed  so  gradually  that  he’d  never 
really  noticed  it  before.  Lieutenant 
Gunderson  had  been  a kid  just  out 
of  Space  Academy.  Parker  and 
Doyle  and  Fong,  too,  had  been  in 
their  twenties.  They  had  been  boys. 
And  now  something  was  gone — 
the  sharp  eyes  and  sure  movements 
of  youth,  the  smooth  skin  and  thick, 
soft  hair. 

Now  they  had  become  men.  And 
yet  for  a few  moments,  as  they 
gazed  at  the  screen,  they  seemed 
like  happy,  expectant  children. 

“I  wish  Brown  could  see  this,” 
Doyle  murmured.  “He  says  now  he 
isn’t  going  to  get  off  his  couch  till 
we  land  and  discover  life.  Says  he 
won’t  dare  look  for  himself.” 

“The  planet’s  right  for  life,”  said 
Fong,  the  dark-faced  astro-physi- 
cist. “Atmosphere  forty  per  cent 
oxygen,  lots  of  water  vapor.  No 
poisonous  gases,  according  to  spec- 
troscopic analyses.  It  should  be 
ideal  for  life.” 

“There  is  life  there,”  said  Parker, 
the  radarman.  “You  know  why? 
Because  we’ve  given  up  eighteen 
years  of  our  lives.  Nine  years  to  get 
here,  nine  to  get  back.  I’m  thirty 
now.  I was  twenty-one  when  we  left 
Earth.  I gave  up  all  those  good 
years.  They  say  that  you  can  have 
something  if  you  pay  enough  for  it. 
Well,  we’ve  paid  for  this.  There  has 
to  be  3i — a sort  of  universal  justice. 
That’s  why  I know  there’s  life  here, 
life  that  moves  and  thinks — maybe 
even  life  we  can  talk  to.” 

“You  need  a drink,”  said  Fong. 

“It’s  getting  bigger,”  murmured 
Lieutenant  Gunderson. 

“The  Centaurians,”  mused 
Doyle,  half  to  himself.  “What’ll 


they  be  like?  Monsters  or  men?  If 
Parker’s  right  about  universal  jus- 
tice, they’ll  be  men.” 

“Hey,  where  there’s  men,  there’s 
women!”  yelled  Parker.  “A  Cen- 
taurian  woman!  Say!” 

“Look  at  those  clouds!”  ex- 
claimed Doyle.  “Damn  it,  we  can’t 
see  the  surface.” 

“Hey,  there!  Look  there,  to  the 
right!  See  it?  It’s  silver,  down  in  a 
hole  in  the  clouds.  It’s  like  a city!” 
“Maybe  it’s  just  water.” 

“No,  it’s  a city!” 

“Bring  ’er  down.  Captain.  God, 
Captain,  bring  ’er  down  fast!” 
“Drag  Brown  in  here!  He  ought 
to  see  this!” 

“Canlt  you  bring  ’er  down  faster. 
Captain?” 

“Damn  it,  it  « a city!” 

“Why  doesn’t  someone  get 
Brown?” 

“Take  to  your  couches,  men,” 
said  Captain  Wiley.  “Landing’s  apt 
to  be  a bit  bumpy.  Better  strap 
yourselves  in.” 

Down  went  the  rocket,  more 

slowly  now,  great  plumes  of 
scarlet  thundering  from  its  forward 
braking  jets.  Down,  down  into  soft, 
cotton-like  clouds,  the  whiteness 
sliding  silently  past  the  ports. 
Suddenly,  a droning  voice : 

“To  those  in  the  ship  from  the 
planet  called  Earth:  Please  refrain 
from  landing  at  this  moment.  You 
will  await  landing  instructions.” 
Parker  leaped  off  his  couch, 
grasping  a stanchion  for  support. 
“That  voice!  It  was  human!” 
Captain  Wiley’s  trembling  hand 
moved  over  the  jet-control  panel. 
The  ship  slowed  in  its  descent.  The 


96 


EDWARD  W.  LUDWIG 


clouds  outside  the  portholes  be- 
came motionless,  a milky  whiteness 
pressed  against  the  ship. 

“The  voice!”  Parker  cried  again. 
“Am  I crazy?  Did  everyone  hear 
it?” 

Captain  Wiley  turned  away  from 
the  panel.  “We  heard  it,  Parker.  It 
was  in  our  minds.  Telepathy.” 

He  smiled.  “Yes,  the  planet  is  in- 
habited. There  are  intelligent  be- 
ings on  it.  Perhaps  they’re  more  in- 
telligent than  we  are.” 

It  was  strange.  The  men  had 
hoped,  dreamed,  prayed  for  this 
moment.  Now  they  sat  stunned,  un- 
able to  comprehend,  their  tongues 
frozen. 

“We’ll  see  them  very  soon,”  said 
Captain  Wiley,  his  voice  quivering. 
“We’ll  wait  for  their  directions.” 

Breathlessly,  they  waited. 

Captain  Wiley’s  fingers  drummed 
nervously  on  the  base  of  the  con- 
trol panel.  Lieutenant  Gunderson 
rose  from  his  couch,  stood  in  the 
center  of  the  cabin,  then  returned 
to  his  couch. 

Silence,  save  for  the  constant, 
rumbling  roar  of  the  jets  which 
held  the  ship  aloft. 

“I  wonder  how  long  it’ll  be,” 
murmured  Fong  at  last. 

“It  seems  like  a long  time!”  burst 
Parker. 

“We’ve  waited  nine  years,”  said 
Captain  Wiley.  “We  can  wait  a 
few  more  minutes.” 

They  waited. 

“Good  Lord!”  said  Parker. 
“How  long  is  it  going  to  be?  What 
time  is  it?  We’ve  been  waiting  an 
hour ! What  kind  of  people  are  they 
down  there?” 

“Maybe  they’ve  forgotten  about 
us,”  said  Fong. 


“That’s  it!”  cried  Parker. 
“They’ve  forgotten  about  us!  Hey, 
you!  Down  there — you  that  talked 
to  us!  We’re  still  here,  damn  it!  We 
want  to  land!” 

“Parker,”  said  Captain  Wiley,  • 
sternly. 

Parker  sat  down  on  his  couch,  his 
lips  quivering. 

Then  came  the  voice: 

“We  regret  that  a landing  is  im- 
possible at  this  moment.  Our  field 
is  overcrowded,  and  your  vessel  is 
without  priority.  You  must  wait 
your  turn.” 

Captain  Wiley  stared  forward  at 
nothing.  “Whoever  you  are,”  he 
whispered,  “please  understand  that 
we  have  come  a long  way  to  reach 
your  planet.  Our  trip  . . .” 

“We  do  not  wish  to  discuss  your 
trip.  You  will  be  notified  when 
landing  space  is  available.” 

Captain  Wiley’s  body  shook. 
“Wait,  tell  us  who  you  are.  What 
do  you  look  like?  Tell  us  . . .” 
“Talking  to  you  is  quite  difficult. 
We  must  form  our  thoughts  so  as 
to  form  word-patterns  in  your 
minds.  You  will  be  notified.” 

“Wait  a minute!”  called  Captain 
Wiley. 

No  answer. 

Captain  Wiley  straightened  in  an 
effort  to  maintain  dignity. 

They  waited. . . . 


T WAS  NIGHT. 

The  darkness  was  an  impene- 
trable blanket,  a solid  thing,  like 
thick  black  velvet  glued  over  the 
ports.  It  was  worse  than  the  dark- 
ness of  space. 

Captain  Wiley  sat  before  the 
control  panel,  slowly  beating  his 


THE  LONELY  ONES 


97 


fists  against  the  arms  of  his  chair,  a 
human  metronome  ticking  off  the 
slow  seconds. 

Parker  stood  before  a porthole. 

“Hey,  look.  Captain!  There’s  a 
streak  of  red,  like  a meteor.  And 
there’s  another!” 

Captain  Wiley  rose,  looked  out. 
“They’re  rockets.  They’re  going  to 
land.  These  people  are  highly  ad- 
vanced.” 

His  face  became  grim.  Below 
them  lay  a planet,  an  intelligent 
race  hidden  beneath  clouds  and 
darkness.  What  manner  of  creatures 
were  they?  How  great  was  their 
civilization?  What  marvelous  se- 
crets had  their  scientists  discovered? 
What  was  their  food  like,  their 
women,  their  whiskey? 

The  questions  darted  endlessly 
through  his  mind  like  teasing 
needle-points.  All  these  wondrous 
things  lay  below  them,  and  here 
they  sat,  like  starving  men,  their 
hands  tied,  gazing  upon  a steaming 
but  unobtainable  dinner.  So  near 
and  yet  so  far. 

He  trembled.  The  emotion  grew 
within  him  until  it  burst  out  as  wa- 
ter bursts  through  the  cracked  wall 
of  a dam.  He  became  like  Parker. 

“Why  should  we  wait?”  he 
yelled.  “Why  must  we  land  in  their 
field?  Parker!  Prepare  to  release 
flares!  We’re  going  down!  We’ll 
land  anywhere — in  a street,  in  the 
country.  We  don’t  have  to  wait  for 
orders!” 

Parker  bounced  off  his  couch. 
Someone  called,  “Brown,  we’re  go- 
ing to  landl” 

A scurrying  of  feet,  the  rush  of 
taut-muscled  bodies,  the  babble  of 
excited  voices. 

“We’re  going  down!” 


'‘We’re  going  down!” 

The  grumble  of  the  Wanderer’s 
jets  loudened,  softened,  spluttered, 
loudened  again.  Vibration  filled  the 
ship  as  it  sank  downward. 

Suddenly  it  lurched  upward,  like 
a child’s  ball  caught  in  a stream  of 
rising  water.  The  jolt  staggered  the 
men.  They  seized  stanchions  and 
bulkhead  railings  to  keep  their  bal- 
ance. 

“What  the  hell?” 

Abruptly,  the  strange  movement 
ceased.  The  ship  seemed  motionless. 
There  was  no  vibration. 

“Captain,”  said  Lieutenant  Gun- 
derson. “There’s  no  change  in  alti- 
tude. We’re  still  at  35,000  feet,  no 
more,  no  less.” 

“We  must  be  going  down,”  said 
Captain  Wiley,  puzzled.  “Kill  jets 
4 and  6.” 

The  Lieutenant’s  hands  flicked 
off  two  switches.  A moment  later: 
“There’s  no  change.  Captain.” 
Then  came  the  voice: 

“To  those  in  the  vessel  from  the 
planet  Earth ; Please  do  not  oppose 
orders  of  the  Landing  Council.  You 
are  the  first  visitors  in  the  history  of 
our  world  whom  we  have  had  to 
restrain  with  physical  force.  You 
will  be  notified  when  landing  space 
is  available.” 


ORNING. 

The  warm  sunlight  streamed 
into  the  clouds,  washing  away  the 
last  shadows  and  filtering  through 
the  portholes. 

The  men  breakfasted,  bathed, 
shaved,  smoked,  sat,  twisted  their 
fingers,  looked  out  the  ports.  They 
were  silent  men,  with  dark  shadows 
about  their  eyes  and  with  tight. 


98 


EDWARD  W.  LUDWJG 


white-lipped  mouths. 

Frequently,  the  clouds  near  them 
were  cut  by  swift,  dark  shapes 
swooping  downward.  The  shapes 
were  indistinct  in  the  cotton-like 
whiteness,  but  obviously  they  were 
huge,  like  a dozen  Wanderers  made 
into  one. 

“Those  ships  are  big,”  someone 
murmured,  without  enthusiasm. 

“It’s  a busy  spaceport,”  grumbled 
Captain  Wiley. 

Thoughts,  words,  movements 
came  so  slowly  it  was  like  walking 
under  water.  Enthusiasm  was  dead. 
The  men  were  automatons,  sitting, 
waiting,  eating,  sitting,  waiting. 

A day  passed,  and  a night. 

“Maybe  they’ve  forgotten  us,” 
said  Fong. 

No  one  answered.  The  thought 
had  been  voiced  before,  a hun- 
dred times. 

Then,  at  last,  the  droning  words; 

“To  those  in  the  vessel  from  the 
planet  Earth:  You  will  now  land. 
We  will  carry  you  directly  over  the 
field.  Then  you  will  descend 
straight  down.  The  atmosphere  is 
suitable  to  your  type  of  life  and  is 
free  of  germs.  You  will  not  need 
protection.” 

The  men  stared  at  one  another. 

“Hey,”  Doyle  said,  “did  you  hear 
that?  He  says  we  can  go  down.” 

The  men  blinked.  Captain  Wiley 
swallowed  hard.  He  rose  with  a 
stiff,  slow,  nervous  hesitancy. 

“We’re  going  down,”  he  mum- 
bled, as  if  repeating  the  words  over 
and  over  in  his  mind  and  trying  to 
believe  them. 

The  men  stirred  as  realization 
sprouted  and  grew.  They  stirred 
like  lethargic  animals  aroused  from 


the  long,  dreamless  sleep  of  hiber- 
nation. 

“We’re  going  to  land,”  breathed 
Parker,  unbelievingly. 

The  Wanderer  moved  as  though 
caught  in  the  grip  of  a giant,  in- 
visible hand. 

The  voice  said : 

“You  may  now  descend.” 

Captain  Wiley  moved  to  the  jet- 
control  panel.  “Lieutenant!”  he 
snapped.  “Wake  up.  Let’s  go!” 

The  ship  sank  downward  through 
the  thick  sea  of  clouds.  The  men 
walked  to  the  ports.  A tenseness,  an 
excitement  grew  in  their  faces,  like 
dying  flame  being  fanned  into  its 
former  brilliancy. 

Out  of  the  clouds  loomed  mon- 
strous, shining,  silver  spires  and 
towers,  Cyclopean  bridges,  gigantic 
lake-like  mirrors,  immense  golden 
spheres.  It  was  a nightmare  world, 
a j'ungle  of  fantastic  shape  and 
color. 

The  men  gasped,  whispered, 
murmured,  the  flame  of  their  ex- 
citement growing,  growing. 

“The  whole  planet  is  a city!” 
breathed  Parker. 


HUMP! 

The  Wanderer  came  to  rest 
on  a broad  landing  field  of  light 
blue  stone.  The  jets  coughed,  splut- 
tered, died.  The  ship  quivered,  then 
lay  still,  its  interior  charged  with 
an  electric,  pregnant  silence. 

“You  first.  Captain.”  Lieutenant 
Gunderson’s  voice  cracked,  and  his 
face  was  flushed.  “You  be  the  first 
to  go  outside.” 

Captain  Wiley  stepped  through 
the  airlock,  his  heart  pounding.  It 
was  over  now — ^all  the  bewilder- 


THE  LONELY  ONES 


99 


ment,  the  numbness. 

And  his  eyes  were  shining.  He’d 
waited  so  long  that  it  was  hard  to 
believe  the  waiting  was  over.  But  it 
was,  he  told  himself.  The  journey 
was  over,  and  the  waiting,  and  now 
the  loneliness  would  soon  be  over. 
Mankind  was  not  alone.  It  was  a 
good  universe  after  all! 

He  stepped  outside,  followed  by 
Lieutenant  Gunderson,  then  by 
Parker,  Doyle  and  Fong. 

He  rubbed  his  eyes.  This  couldn’t 
be!  A world  like  this  couldn’t  exist! 
He  shook  his  head,  blinked  furious- 
ly- 

“It — it  can’t  be  true,”  he  mum- 
bled to  Lieutenant  Gunderson. 
“We’re  still  on  the  ship — dream- 
ing.” 

The  landing  field  was  huge,  per- 
haps ten  miles  across,  and  its  sides 
were  lined  with  incredible  ships, 
the  smallest  of  which  seemed  forty 
times  as  large  as  the  Wanderer. 
There  were  silver  ships,  golden 
ships,  black  ships,  round  ships, 
transparent  ships,  cigar-shaped 
ships,  flat-topped  ships. 

And  scattered  over  the  field  were 
— creatures. 

A few  were  the  size  of  men,  but 
most  were  giants  by  comparison. 
Some  were  humanoid,  some  reptil- 
ian. Some  were  naked,  some  clad 
in  helmeted  suits,  some  enveloped 
with  a shimmering,  water-like  lu- 
minescence. The  creatures  walked, 
slithered,  floated,  crawled. 

Beyond  the  ships  and  the  field  lay 
the  great  city,  its  web-work  of  tow- 
ers, minarets,  spheres  and  bridges 
like  the  peaks  of  an  enormous 
mountain  range  stretching  up  into 
space  itself.  The  structures  were 
like  the  colors  of  a rainbow  mixed 


in  a cosmic  paint  pot,  molded  and 
solidified  into  fantastic  shapes  by  a 
mad  god. 

“I — I’m  going  back  to  the  ship,” 
stammered  Parker.  The  whiteness 
of  death  was  in  his  face.  “I’m  go- 
ing to  stay  with  Brown.” 

He  turned,  and  then  he 
screamed. 

“Captain,  the  ship’s  moving!” 
Silently,  the  Wanderer  was  drift- 
ing to  the  side  of  the  field. 

The  toneless  voice  said: 

“We  are  removing  your  vessel  so 
that  other  descending  ships  will  not 
damage  it.” 

Captain  Wiley  shouted  into  the 
air.  “Wait!  Don’t  go  away!  Help 
us!  Where  can  we  see  you?” 

The  voice  seemed  to  hesitate.  “It 
is  difficult  for  us  to  speak  In 
thoughts  that  you  understand.” 


ILENCE. 

Captain  Wiley  studied  the 
faces  of  his  men.  They  were  not 
faces  of  conquerors  or  of  trium- 
phant spacemen.  They  were  the 
faces  of  dazed,  frightened  children 
who  had  caught  a glimpse  of  Hell. 
He  attempted,  feebly,  to  smile. 

“All  right,”  he  said  loudly,  “so 
it  isn’t  like  we  expected.  So  no  one 
came  to  meet  us  with  brass  bands 
and  ten  cent  flags.  We’ve  still  suc- 
ceeded, haven’t  we?  We’ve  found 
life  that’s  intelligent  beyond  our 
comprehension.  What  if  our  own 
civilization  is  insignificant  by  com- 
parison? Look  at  those  beings. 
Think  of  what  we  can  learn  from 
them.  Why,  their  ships  might  have 
exceeded  the  speed  of  ligjfit.  They 
might  be  from  other  galaxies!” 
“Let’s  find  out,”  said  Parker. 


100 


EDWARD  W.  LUDWIG 


They  strode  to  the  nearest  ship, 
an  immense,  smooth,  bluish  sphere. 
Two  creatures  stood  before  it, 
shaped  like  men  and  yet  twice  the 
size  of  men.  They  wore  white,  skin- 
tight garments  that  revealed  mus- 
cular bodies  like  those  of  gods. 

The  looked  at  Captain  Wiley 
and  smiled. 

One  of  them  pointed  toward  the 
Wanderer.  Their  smiles  widened 
and  then  they  laughed. 

They  laughed  gently,  under- 
standingly,  but  they  laughed. 

And  then  they  turned  away. 

“Talk  to  them,”  Parker  urged. 

“How?”  Beads  of  perspiration 
shone  on  Captain  Wiley’s  face. 

“Any  way.  Go  ahead.” 

Captain  Wiley  wiped  his  fore- 
head. “We  are  from  Earth,  the 
third  planet  . . . .” 

The  two  god-like  men  seemed  an- 
noyed. They  walked  away,  ignor- 
ing the  Earthmen. 

Captain  Wiley  spat.  “All  right,  so 
they  won’t  talk  to  us.  Look  at  that 
city!  Think  of  the  things  we  can  see 
there  and  tell  the  folks  on  Earth 
about!  Why,  we’ll  be  heroes!” 

“Let’s  go,”  said  Parker,  his  voice 
quavering  around  the  edges. 

They  walked  toward  a large,  oval 
opening  in  a side  of  the  field,  a 
hole  between  mountainous,  conical 
structures  that  seemed  like  the  en- 
trance to  a street. 

Suddenly  breath  exploded  from 
Captain  Wiley’s  lungs.  His  body 
jerked  back.  He  fell  to  the  blue 
stone  pavement. 

Then  he  scrambled  erect,  scowl- 
ing, his  hands  outstretched.  He  felt 
a soft,  rubbery,  invisible  substance. 

“It’s  a wall!”  he  exclaimed. 

The  voice  droned: 


“To  those  of  Earth:  Beings  un- 
der the  4th  stage  of  Galactic  De- 
velopment are  restricted  to  the  area 
of  the  landing  field.  We  are  sorry. 
In  your  primitive  stage  it  would  be 
unwise  for  you  to  learn  the  nature 
of  our  civilization.  Knowledge  of 
our  science  would  be  abused  by 
your  people,  and  used  for  the  thing 
you  call  war.  We  hope  that  you 
have  been  inspired  by  what  you 
have  seen.  However,  neither  we  nor 
the  other  visitors  to  our  planet  are 
permitted  to  hold  contact  with  you. 
It  is  suggested  that  you  and  your 
vessel  depart.” 

“Listen,  you!”  screamed  Parker. 
“We’ve  been  nine  years  getting 
here!  By  Heaven,  we  won’t  leave 
now!  We’re  . . .” 

“We  have  no  time  to  discuss  the 
matter.  Beings  under  the  4th  stage 
of  Galactic  . . .” 

“Never  mind!”  spat  Captain 
Wiley. 

Madness  flamed  in  Parker’s 
eyes.  “We  won’t  go!  I tell  you,  we 
won’t,  we  won’t!” 

His  fists  streaked  through  the  air 
as  if  at  an  invisible  enemy.  He  ran 
toward  the  wall. 

He  collided  with  a jolt  that  sent 
him  staggering  backward,  crying, 
sobbing,  screaming,  all  at  once. 

Captain  Wiley  stepped  forward, 
struck  him  on  the  chin.  Parker 
crumpled. 

They  stood  looking  at  his  body, 
which  lay  motionless  except  for  the 
slow  rising  and  falling  of  his  chest. 

“What  now,  Captain?”  asked 
Lieutenant  Gunderson. 

Captain  Wiley  thought  for  a few 
seconds. 

Then  he  said,  “We’re  ignorant 
country  bumpkins,  Lieutenant,  rid- 


THE  LONELY  ONES 


101 


ing  into  the  city  in  a chugging  ja- 
lopy. We’re  stupid  savages,  trying 
to  discuss  the  making  of  fire  with 
the  creators  of  atomic  energy.  We’re 
children  racing  a paper  glider 
against  an  atomic-powered  jet. 
We’re  too  ridiculous  to  be  noticed. 
We’re  tolerated  — but  nothing 
more.” 

“Shall  we  go  home?”  asked 
Fong,  a weariness  in  his  voice. 

Lieutenant  Gunderson  scratched 
his  neck.  “I  don’t  think  I’d  want  to 
go  home  now.  Gould  you  bear  to 
tell  the  truth  about  what  hap- 
pened?” 

Fong  looked  wistfully  at  the  shin- 
ing city.  “If  we  told  the  truth,  they 
probably  wouldn’t  believe  us. 
We’ve  failed.  It  sounds  crazy.  We 
reached  Proxima  Gentauri  and 
found  life,  and  yet  somehow  we 
failed.  No,  I wouldn’t  like  to  go 
home.” 

“Still,  we  learned  something,” 
said  Doyle.  “We  know  now  that 
there  is  life  on  worlds  beside  our 
own.  Somewhere  there  must  be 
other  races  like  ours.” 

They  looked  at  each  other, 
strangely,  for  a long,  long  moment. 

At  last  Lieutenant  Gunderson 
asked,  “How  far  is  Alpha  Cen- 
tauri?” 

Captain  Wiley  frowned.  “Alpha 
Gentauri?”  Through  his  mind 
swirled  chaotic  visions  of  colossal 
distances,  eternal  night,  and  lonely 


years.  He  sought  hard  to  find  a 
seed  of  hope  in  his  mind,  and  yet 
there  was  no  seed.  There  were  only 
a coldness  and  an  emptiness. 
Suddenly,  the  voice: 

“Yes,  Men  of  Earth,  we  suggest 
that  you  try  Alpha  Gentauri.” 

The  men  stood  silent  and  numb, 
like  bewildered  children,  as  the  im- 
plication of  those  incredible  words 
sifted  into  their  consciousness. 

Finally  Fong  said,  “Did — did  you 
hear  that?  He  said  . . .” 

Captain  Sam  Wiley  nodded,  very 
slowly.  “Yes.  Alpha  Gentauri. 
Alpha  Gentauri.” 

His  eyes  began  to  twinkle,  and 
then  he  smiled.  . . . 

ONWARD  sped  the  Wanderer, 
onward  through  cold,  silent  in- 
finity, on  and  on,  an  insignificant 
pencil  of  silver  lost  in  the  terrible, 
brooding  blackness. 

Yet  even  greater  than  the  black- 
ness was  the  flaming  hope  in  the 
six  men  who  inhabited  the  silver 
rocket.  They  moved  in  hope  as  fish 
move  in  water.  Their  lives  revolved 
in  hope  as  planets  revolve  in  space 
and  time.  They  bore  their  hope 
like  a jeweled  crown,  and  it  was  as 
much  a part  of  them  as  sight  in 
their  eyes.  Hope  was  both  their 
brother  and  their  god. 

And  there  was  no  loneliness. 


THE  END 


Progress  is  relative;  Senator  O’Noonans  idea  of  it  was  not 
particularly  scientific.  Which  would  be  too  bad,  if  he  had 
the  last  word! 


Progress  Report 

By  Mark  Clifton  and  Alex  Apostoiides 

Illustrated  by  PAUL  ORBAN 


IT  SEEMED  to  Colonel  Jennings 
that  the  air  conditioning  unit 
merely  washed  the  hot  air  around 
him  without  lowering  the  tempera- 
ture from  that  outside.  He  knew  it 
was  partly  psychosomatic,  com- 
pounded of  the  view  of  the  silvery 
spire  of  the  test  ship  through  the 
heatwaves  of  the  Nevada  landscape 
and  the  knowledge  that  this  was 
the  day,  the  hour,  and  the  minutes. 

The  final  test  was  at  hand.  The 
instrument  ship  was  to  be  sent  out 
into  space,  controlled  from  this 
sunken  concrete  bunker,  to  find  out 
if  the  flimsy  bodies  of  men  could 
endure  there. 

Jennings  visualized  other  bunk- 
ers scattered  through  the  area,  ob- 
servation posts,  and  farther  away 
the  field  headquarters  with  open 
telephone  lines  to  tlie  Pentagon,  and 
beyond  that  a world  waiting  for 
news  of  the  test — and  not  everyone 
wishing  it  well. 

The  monotonous  buzz  of  the  field 


phone  pulled  him  away  from  his 
fascinated  gaze  at  the  periscope 
slit.  He  glanced  at  his  two  assistants. 
Professor  Stein  and  Major  Eddy. 
They  were  seated  in  front  of  their 
control  boards,  staring  at  .the  blank 
eyes  of  their  radar  screens,  patient- 
ly enduring  the  beads  of  sweat  on 
their  faces  and  necks  and  hands, 
the  odor  of  it  .arising  from  their 
bodies.  They  too  were  feeling  the 
moment.  He  picked  up  the  phone. 

“Jennings,”  .he  said  crisply. 

“Zero  minus  one  half  hour, 
Colonel.  We  start  alert  count  in 
fifteen  minutes.” 

“Right,”  Colonel  Jennings  spoke 
softly,  showing  none  of  the  e.xcite- 
ment  he  felt.  He  replaced  the  field 
phone  on  its  hook  and  spoke  to  the 
two  men  in  front  of  him. 

“This  is  it.  Apparently  this  time 
we’ll  go  through  with  it.” 

Major  Eddy’s  shoulders  hunched 
a trifle,  as  if  he  were  getting  set  to 
have  a load  placed  upon  them. 


104 


MARK  CLIFTON  and  ALEX  APOSTOLIDES 


Professor  Stein  gave  no  indication 
that  he  had  heard.  His  thin  body 
was  stooped  over  his  instrument 
bank,  intense,  alert,  as  if  he  were  a 
runner  crouched  at  the  starting 
mark,  as  if  he  were  young  again. 

Colonel  Jennings  walked  over  to 
the  periscope  slit  again  and  peered 
through  the  shimmer  of  heat  to 
where  the  silvery  ship  lay  arrowed 
in  her  cradle.  The  last  few  mo- 
ments of  waiting,  with  a brassy 
taste  in  his  mouth,  with  the  vision 
of  the  test  ship  before  him;  these 
were  the  worst. 

Everything  had  been  done, 
checked  and  rechecked  hours  and 
days  ago.  He  found  himself  wish- 
ing there  were  some  little  thing, 
some  desperate  little  error  which 
must  be  corrected  hurriedly,  just 
something  to  break  the  tension  of 
waiting. 

“You’re  all  right,  Sam,  Prof?”  he 
asked  the  major  and  professor  un- 
necessarily. 

“A  little  nervous,”  Major  Eddy 
answered  without  moving. 

“Of  course,”  Professor  Stein 
said.  There  was  a too  heavy  stress 
on  the  silibant  sound,  as  if  the  last 
traces  of  accent  had  not  yet  been 
removed. 

“I  expect  everyone  is  nervous, 
not  just  the  hundreds  involved  in 
this,  but  everywhere,”  Jennings 
commented.  And  then  ruefully, 
“Except  Professor  Stein  there.  I 
thought  surely  I’d  see  some  nerves 
at  this  point,  Prof.”  He  was  at- 
tempting to  make  light  conversa- 
tion, something  to  break  the  strain 
of  mounting  buck  fever. 

“If  I let  even  one  nerve  tendril 
slack,  Colonel,  I would  go  to  pieces 
entirely,”  Stein  said  precisely,  in  the 


way  a man  speaks  who  has  learned 
the  language  from  text  books.  “So 
I do  not  think  of  our  ship  at  all.  I 
think  of  mankind.  I wonder  if  man- 
kind is  as  ready  as  our  ship.  I won- 
der if  man  will  do  any  better  on 
the  planets  than  he  has  done  here.” 
“Well,  of  course,”  Colonel  Jen- 
nings answered  with  sympathy  in 
his  voice,  “under  Hitler  and  all  the 
things  you  went  through,  I don’t 
blame  you  for  being  a little  bitter. 
But  not  all  mankind  is  like  that,  you 
know.  As  long  as  you’ve  been  in 
our  country,  Professor,  you’ve  nev- 
er looked  around  you.  You’ve  been 
working  on  this,  never  lifting  your 
head ” 


He  jerked  in  annoyance  as  a 
red  light  blinked  over  the  emer- 
gency circuit,  and  a buzzing,  sharp 
and  repeated,  broke  into  this  mo- 
ment when  he  felt  he  was  actually 
reaching,  touching  Stein,  as  no  one 
had  before. 

He  dragged  the  phone  toward 
him  and  began  speaking  angrily 
into  its  mouthpiece  before  he  had 
brought  it  to  his  lips. 

“What  the  hell’s  the  matter  now? 
They’re  not  going  to  call  it  off 
again!  Three  times  now,  and  . . .” 
He  broke  off  and  frowned  as  the 
crackling  voice  came  through  the 
receiver,  the  vein  on  his  temple 
pulsing  in  his  stress. 

“I  beg  your  pardon.  General,”  he 
said,  much  more  quietly. 

The  two  men  turned  from  their 
radar  scopes  and  watched  him 
questioningly.  He  shrugged  his 
shoulders,  an  indication  to  them  of 
his  helplessness. 

“You’re  not  going  to  like  this, 


PROGRESS  REPORT 


105 


Jim,”  the  general  was  saying.  “But . 
it’s  orders  from  Pentagon.  Are  you 
familiar  with  Senator  O’Noonan?” 
“Vaguely,”  Jennings  answered, 
“You’ll  be  more  familiar  with 
him,  Jim.  He’s  been  newly  ap- 
pointed chairman  of  the  appropria- 
tions committee  covering  our  work. 
And  he’s  fought  it  bitterly  from  the 
beginning.  He’s  tried  every  way  he 
could  to  scrap  the  entire  project. 
When  we’ve  finished  this  test,  Jim, 
we’ll  have  used  up  our  appropria- 
tions to  date.  Whether  we  get  any 
more  depends  on  him.” 

“Yes,  sir?”  Jennings  spoke  ques- 
tioningly.  Political  maneuvering  was 
not  his  problem,  that  was  between 
Pentagon  and  Congress. 

“We  must  have  his  support,  Jim,” 
the  general  explained.  “Pentagon 
hasn’t  been  able  to  win  him  over. 
He’s  stubborn  and  violent  in  his  re- 
actions. The  fact  it  keeps  him  in 
the  headlines — ^well,  of  course  that 
wouldn’t  have  any  bearing.  So 
Pentagon  invited  him  to  come  to 
the  field  here  to  watch  the  test,  hop- 
ing that  would  win  him  over.”  The 
general  hesitated,  then  continued. 

“I’ve  gone  a step  farther.  I felt 
if  he  was  actually  at  the  center  of 
control,  your  operation,  he  might 
be  won  over,  if  he  could  actually 
participate,  press  the  activating  key 
or  something,  if  the  headlines  could 
show  he  was  working  with  us,  actu- 
ally sent  the  test  ship  on  its 
flight.  . .” 

“General,  you  can’t,”  Jennings 
moaned.  He  forgot  rank,  every- 
thing. 

‘Tve  already  done  it,  Jim,”  the 
general  chose  to  ignore  the  out- 
burst. “He’s  due  there  now.  I’ll  look 


to  you  to  handle  it.  He’s  got  to  be 
won  over.  Colonel.  It’s  your  pro- 
ject.” Considering  the  years  that  he 
and  the  general  had  worked  to- 
gether, the  warm  accord  and  in- 
formality between  them,  the  use  of 
Jennings’  title  made  it  an  order. 

“Yes,  sir,”  he  said. 

“Over,”  said  the  general  for- 
mally. 

“Out,”  whispered  Jennings. 

The  two  men  looked  at  him  ques- 
tioningly. 

“It  seems,”  he  answered  their 
look,  “we  are  to  have  an  observer. 
Senator  O’Noonan.” 

“Even  in  Germany,”  Professor 
Stein  said  quietly,  “they  knew 
enough  to  leave  us  alone  at  a criti- 
cal moment.” 

“He  can’t  do  it,  Jim,”  Major 
Eddy  looked  at  Jennings  with 
pleading  eyes. 

“Oh,  but  he  can,”  Jennings  an- 
swered bitterly.  “Orders.  And  you 
know  what  orders  are,  don’t  you, 
Major?” 

“Yes,  sir,”  Major  Eddy  said 
stiffly. 

Professor  Stein  smiled  ruefully. 

Both  of  them  turned  back  to  their 
instrum.ent  boards,  their  radar 
screens,  to  the  protective  obscurity 
of  subordinates  carrying  out  an  as- 
signment. They  were  no  longer 
three  men  coming  close  together, 
almost  understanding  one  another 
in  this  moment  of  waiting,  when  the 
world  and  all  in  it  had  been  shut 
away,  and  nothing  real  existed  ex- 
cept the  silvery  spire  out  there  on 
the  desert  and  the  life  of  it  in  the 
controls  at  their  fingertips. 

“Beep,  minus  fifteen  minutes!” 
the  first  time  signal  sounded. 


106 


MARK  CLIFTON  and  ALEX  APOSTOLIDES 


“ftOLONEL  JENNINGS,  sir!” 
U The  senator  appeared  in  the 
low  doorway  and  extended  a fleshy 
hand.  His  voice  was  hearty,  but 
there  was  no  warmth  behind  his 
tones.  He  paused  on  the  threshold, 
bulky,  impressive,  as  if  he  were 
about  to  deliver  an  address.  But 
Jennings,  while  shaking  hands,  drew 
him  into  the  bunker,  pointedly, 
causing  the  senator  to  raise  bushy 
eyebrows  and  stare  at  him  specu- 
latively. 

“At  this  point  everything  runs  on 
a split  second  basis,  Senator,”  he 
said  crisply.  “Ceremony  comes  after 
the  test.”  His  implication  was  that 
when  the  work  was  done,  the  sena- 
tor could  have  his  turn  in  the  lime- 
light, take  all  the  credit,  turn  it 
into  political  fodder  to  be  thrown 
to  the  people.  But  because  the  man 
was  chairman  of  the  appropriations 
committee,  he  softened  his  abrupt- 
ness. “If  the  timing  is  off  even  a 
small  fraction.  Senator,  we  would 
have  to  scrap  the  flight  and  start  all 
over.” 

“At  additional  expense,  no 
doubt.”  The  senator  could  also  be 
crisp.  “Surprises  me  that  the  mili- 
tary should  think  of  that,  however.” 

The  closing  of  the  heavy  doors 
behind  him  punctuated  his  remark 
and  caused  him  to  step  to  the  center 
of  the  bunker.  Where  there  had 
seemed  adequate  room  before,  now 
the  feeling  was  one  of  oppressive 
overcrowding. 

Unconsciously,  Major  Eddy 
squared  his  elbows  as  if  to  clear 
the  space  around  him  for  the  ma- 
nipulation of  his  controls.  Professor 
Stein  sat  at  his  radar  screen,  quiet, 
immobile,  a part  of  the  mechan- 
isms. He  was  accustomed  to  over- 


bearing authority  whatever  politi- 
cal tag  it  might  wear  at  the  mo- 
ment. 

“Beep.  Eleven  minutes,”  the  sig- 
nal sounded. 

“Perhaps  you’ll  be  good  enough 
to  brief  me  on  just  what  you’re  do- 
ing here?”  the  senator  asked,  and 
implied  by  the  tone  of  his  voice 
that  it  couldn’t  be  very  much.  “In 
layman’s  language,  Colonel.  Don’t 
try  to  make  it  impressive  with  tech- 
nical obscurities.  I want  my  pro- 
gress report  on  this  project  to  be 
understandable  to  everyone.” 

Jennings  looked  at  him  in  dis- 
may. Was  the  man  kidding  him? 
Explain  the  zenith  of  science,  the 
culmination  of  the  dreams  of  man 
in  twenty  simple  words  or  less!  And 
about  ten  minutes  to  win  over  a 
man  which  the  Pentagon  had  failed 
to  win. 

“Perhaps  you’d  like  to  sit  here. 
Senator,”  be  said  courteously. 
“When  we  learned  you  were  com- 
ing, we  felt  yours  should  be  the 
honor.  At  zero  time,  you  press  this 
key — here.  It  will  be  your  hand 
which  sends  the  test  ship  out  into 
space.” 

Apparently  they  were  safe.  The 
senator  knew  so  little,  he  did  not 
realize  the  automatic  switch  would 
close  with  the  zero  time  signal,  that 
no  hand  could  be  trusted  to  press 
the  key  at  precisely  the  right  time, 
that  the  senator’s  key  was  a dummy. 

“Beep,  ten,”  the  signal  came 
through. 

Jennings  went  back  over  to  the 
periscope  and  peered  through  the 
slit.  He  felt  strangely  surprised  to 
see  the  silver  column  of  the  ship 
still  there.  The  calm,  the  scientific 
detachment,  the  warm  thrill  of  co- 


PROGRESS  REPORT 


107 


ordinated  effort,  all  were  gone.  He 
felt  as  if  the  test  flight  itself  was 
secondary  to  what  the  senator 
thought  about  it,  what  he  would 
say  in  his  progress  report. 

He  wondered  if  the  senator’s  pro- 
gress report  would  compare  in  any 
particular  with  the  one  on  the  ship. 
That  was  a chart,  representing  as 
far  as  they  could  tell,  the  minimum 
and  maximum  tolerances  of  human 
life.  If  the  multiple  needles,  tracing 
their  continuous  lines,  went  over  the 
black  boundaries  of  tolerances,  hu- 
man beings  would  die  at  that  point. 
Such  a progress  report,  showing  the 
life-sustaining  conditions  at  each 
point  throughout  the  ship’s  flight, 
would  have  some  meaning.  He  won- 
dered what  meaning  the  senator’s 
progress  report  would  have. 

He  felt  himself  being  pushed 
aside  from  the  periscope.  There  was 
no  ungentleness  in  the  push,  simply 
the  determined  pressure  of  an  ar- 
rogant man  who  was  accustomed  to 
being  in  the  center  of  things,  and 
thinking  nothing  of  shoving  to  get 
there.  The  senator  gave  him  the 
briefest  of  explanatory  looks,  and 
placed  his  own  eye  at  the  periscope 
slit. 

“Beep,  nine,”  the  signal  sounded. 

“So  that’s  what  represents  two 
billion  dollars,”  the  senator  said 
contemptuously.  “That  little  sliver 
of  metal.” 

“The  two  billion  dollar  atomic 
bomb  was  even  smaller,”  Jennings 
said  quietly. 

The  senator  took  his  eye 
away  from  the  periscope  briefly 
and  looked  at  Jennings  specu- 
latively. 


“The  story  of  where  all  that 
money  went  still  hasn’t  been  told, 
he  said  pointedly.  “But  the  story  of 
who  got  away  with  this  tw'o  billion 
will  be  different.” 

Colonel  Jennings  said  nothing. 
The  white  hot  rage  mounting  with- 
in him  made  it  impossible  for  him 
to  speak. 

The  senator  straightened  up  and 
walked  back  over  to  his  chair.  He 
waved  a hand  in  the  direction  of 
Major  Eddy. 

“What  does  that  man  do?”  he 
asked,  as  if  the  major  were  not  pres- 
ent, or  was  unable  to  comprehend. 

“Major  Eddy,”  Jennings  found 
control  of  his  voice,  “operates  re- 
mote control.”  He  was  trying  to  re- 
duce the  vast  complexity  of  the  op- 
eration to  the  simplest  possible  lan- 
guage. 

“Beep,  eight,”  the  signal  inter- 
rupted him. 

“He  will  guide  the  ship  through- 
out its  entire  flight,  just  as  if  he 
were  sitting  in  it.” 

“Why  isn’t  he  sitting  in  it?”  the 
senator  asked. 

“That’s  what  the  test  is  for.  Sena- 
tor.” Jennings  felt  his  voice  becom- 
ing icy.  “We  don’t  know  if  space 
will  permit  human  life.  We  don’t 
know  what’s  out  there.” 

“Best  way  to  find  out  is  for  a man 
to  go  out  there  and  see,”  the  senator 
commented  shortly.  “I  want  to  find 
out  something,  I go  look  at  it  my- 
self. I don’t  depend  on  charts  and 
graphs,  and  folderol.” 

The  major  did  not  even  hunch 
his  broad  shoulders,  a characteris- 
tic gesture,  to  show  that  he  had 
heard,  to  show  that  he  wished  the 
senator  was  out  there  in  untested 
space. 


108 


MARK  CLIFTON  and  ALEX  APOSTOLIDES 


“What  about  him?  He’s  not  even 
in  uniform!” 

“Professor  Stein  maintains  sight 
contact  on  the  scope  and  transmits 
the  IFF  pulse.” 

The  senator’s  eyes  flashed  again 
beneath  heavy  brows.  His  lips  in- 
dicated what  he  thought  of  profes- 
sors and  projects  who  used  them. 

“What’s  IFF?”  he  asked. 

The  colonel  looked  at  him  in- 
credulously. It  was  on  the  tip  of 
his  tongue  to  ask  where  the  man 
had  been  during  the  war.  He  de- 
cided he’d  better  not  ask  it.  He 
might  learn. 

“It  stands  for  Identification — 
Friend  or  Foe,  Senator.  It’s  army 
jargon.” 

“Beep,  seven.” 

Seven  minutes,  Jennings  thought, 
and  here  1 am  trying  to  explain  the 
culmination  of  the  entire  science  of 
all  mankind  to  a lardbrain  in  sim- 
ple kindergarten  words.  Well,  he’d 
wished  there  was  something  to 
break  the  tension  of  the  last  half 
hour,  keep  him  occupied.  He  had 
it. 

“You  mean  the  army  wouldn’t 
know,  after  the  ship  got  up,  wheth- 
er it  was  ours  or  the  enemy’s?”  the 
senator  asked  incredulously. 

“There  are  meteors  in  space. 
Senator,”  Jennings  said  carefully. 
“Radar  contact  is  all  we’ll  have  out 
there.  The  IFF  mechanism  recon- 
verts our  beam  to  a predetermined 
pulse,  and  it  bounces  back  to  us  in 
a different  pattern.  That’s  the  only 
way  we’d  know  if  we  were  still  on 
the  ship,  or  have  by  chance  fas- 
tened on  to  a meteor.” 

“What  has  that  got  to  do  with 
the  enemy?”  O’Noonan  asked  un- 
comprehendingly. 


Jennings  sighed,  almost  audibly. 
“The  mechanism  was  developed 
during  the  war,  when  we  didn’t 
know  which  planes  were  ours  and 
which  the  enemy’s.  We’ve  simply 
adapted  it  to  this  use — to  save 
money.  Senator.” 

“Humph!”  the  senator  expressed 
his  disbelief.  “Top  complicated. 
The  world  has  grown  too  compli- 
cated.” 

“Beep,  six.” 

The  senator  glanced  irritably  at 
the  time  speaker.  It  had  interrupt- 
ed his  speech.  But  he  chose  to  ig- 
nore the  interruption,  that  was  the 
way  to  handle  heckling. 

“I  am  a simple  man.  I come 
from  simple  parentage.  I represent 
the  simple  people,  the  common 
people,  the  people  with  their  feet 
on  the  ground.  And  the  whole 
world  needs  to  get  back  to  the  sim- 
ple truths  and  honesties  . . . .” 
Jennings  headed  off  the  cam- 
paign speech  which  might  appeal 
to  the  mountaineers  of  the  sena- 
tor’s home  state,  where  a man’s  ac- 
complishments were  judged  by 
how  far  he  could  spit  tobacco 
juice;  it  had  little  application  in 
this  bunker  where  the  final  test  be- 
fore the  flight  of  man  to  the  stars 
was  being  tried. 

“To  us.  Senator,”  he  said  gently, 
“this  ship  represents  simple  truths 
and  honesties.  We  are,  at  this  mo- 
ment, testing  the  truths  of  all  that 
mankind  has  ever  thought  of,  the- 
orized about,  believed  of  the  space 
which  surrounds  the  Earth.  A farm- 
er may  hear  about  new  methods  of 
growing  crops,  but  the  only  way  he 
knows  whether  they’re  practical  or 
not  is  to  try  them  on  his  own  land.” 
The  senator  looked  at  him  im- 


PROGRESS  REPORT 


109 


passively.  Jennings  didn’t  know 
whether  he  was  going  over  or  not. 
But  he  was  trying. 

“All  that  ship,  and  all  the  instru- 
ments it  contains;  those  represent 
the  utmost  honesties  of  the  men 
who  worked  on  them.  Nobody  tried 
to  bluff,  to  get  by  with  shoddy 
workmanship,  cover  up  ignorance. 
A farmer  does  not  try  to  bluff  his 
land,  for  the  crops  he  gets  tells  the 
final  story.  Scientists,  too,  have  sim- 
ple honesty.  They  have  to  have, 
Senator,  for  the  results  will  show 
them  up  if  they  don’t.” 

The  senator  looked  at  him 

speculatively,  and  with  a grow- 
ing respect.  Not  a bad  speech,  that. 
Not  a bad  speech  at  all.  If  this  tom- 
foolery actually  worked,  and  it 
might,  that  could  be  the  approach 
in  selling  it  to  his  constituents.  By 
implication,  he  could  take  full 
credit,  put  over  the  impression  that 
it  was  he  who  had  stood  over  the 
scientists  making  sure  they  were  as 
honest  and  simple  as  the  mountain 
farmers.  Many  a man  has  gone  into 
the  White  House  with  less. 

“Beep,  five.” 

Five  more  minutes.  The  sudden 
thought  occurred  to  O’Noonan: 
what  if  he  refused  to  press  the 
dummy  key?  Refused  to  take  part 
in  this  project  he  called  tomfool- 
ery? Perhaps  they  thought  they 
were  being  clever  in  having  him 
take  part  in  the  ship’s  launching, 
and  were  by  that  act  committing 
him  to  something  .... 

“This  is  the  final  test,  Senator. 
After  this  one,  if  it  is  right,  man 
leaps  to  the  stars!”  It  was  Jen- 
nings’ plea,  his  final  attempt  to 


catch  the  senator  up  in  the  fire  and 
the  dream. 

“And  then  more  yapping  colon- 
ists wanting  statehood,”  the  senator 
said  dryly.  “Upsetting  the  balance 
of  power.  Changing  things.” 

Jennings  was  silent. 

“Beep,  four.” 

“More  imports  trying  to  get  into 
our  country  duty-free,”  O’Noonan 
went  on.  “Upsetting  our  economy.” 

His  vision  was  of  lobbyists  threat- 
ening to  cut  off  contributions  if 
their  own  industries  were  not  kept 
in  a favorable  position.  Of  grim- 
jawed  industrialists  who  could  easily 
put  a more  tractable  candidate  up 
in  his  place  to  be  elected  by  the 
free  and  thinking  people  of  his 
state.  All  the  best  catch  phrases,  the 
semantically-loaded  promises,  the 
advertising  appropriations  being 
used  by  his  opponent. 

It  was  a dilemma.  Should  he 
jump  on  the  bandwagon  of  ad- 
vancement to  the  stars,  hoping  to 
catch  the  imagination  of  the  voters 
by  it?  Were  the  voters  really  in 
favor  of  progress?  What  could  this 
space  flight  put  in  the  dinner  pails 
of  the  Smiths,  the  Browns,  the 
Johnsons?  It  was  all  very  well  to 
talk  about  the  progress  of  mankind, 
but  that  was  the  only  measure  to 
be  considered.  Any  politician  knew 
that.  And  apparently  no  scientist 
knew  it.  Man  advances  only  when 
he  sees  how  it  will  help  him  stuff 
his  gut. 

“Beep,  three.”  For  a full  minute, 
the  senator  had  sat  lost  in  specula- 
tion. 

And  what  could  he  personally 
gain?  A plan,  full-formed,  sprang 
into  his  mind.  This  whole  ded 
could  be  taken  out  of  the  hands  of 


no 


MARK  CLIFTON  and  ALEX  APOSTOLIDES- 


the  military  on  charges  of  waste 
and  corruption.  It  could  be  brought 
back  into  the  control  of  private  in- 
dustry, where  it  belonged.  He 
thought  of  vast  tracts  of  land  in  his 
own  state,  tracts  he  could  buy 
cheap,  through  dummy  companies, 
places  which  could  be  made  very 
suitable  for  the  giant  factories 
necessary  to  manufacture  space- 
ships. 

As  chairman  of  the  appropria- 
tions committee,  it  wouldn’t  be 
difficult  to  sway  the  choice  of  site. 
And  all  that  extra  employment  for 
the  people  of  his  own  state.  The 
voters  couldn’t  forget  plain,  simple, 
honest  O’Noonan  after  that! 

“Beep,  two.” 

JENNINGS  FELT  the  sweat 
beads  increase  on  his  forehead. 
His  collar  was  already  soaking  wet. 
He  had  been  watching  the  senator 
through  two  long  minutes,  terrible 
eon-consuming  minutes,  the  impas- 
sive face  showing  only  what  the 
senator  wanted  it  to  show.  He  saw 
the  face  now  soften  into  something 
approaching  benignity,  nobility. 
The  head  came  up,  the  silvery  hair 
tossed  back. 

“Son,”  he  said  with  a ringing 
thrill  in  his  voice.  “Mankind  much 
reach  the  stars!  We  must  allow 
nothing  to  stop  that!  No  personal 
consideration,  no  personal  belief, 
nothing  must  stand  in  the  way  of 
mankind’s  greatest  dream!” 

His  eyes  were  shrewdly  watching 
the  effect  upon  Jennings’  face, 

; measuring  through  him  the  effect 
such  a speech  would  have  upon  the 
voters.  He  saw  the  relief  spread 
over  Jennings’  face,  the  glow.  Yes, 


it  might  work. 

“Now,  son,”  he  said  with  kindly 
tolerance,  “tell  me  what  you  want 
me  to  do  about  pressing  this  key 
when  the  time  comes.” 

“Beep,  one.” 

And  then  the  continuous  drone 
while  the  seconds  were  being  count- 
ed off  aloud. 

“Fifty-nine,  fifty-eight,  fifty- 
seven — ” 

The  droning  went  on  while  Jen- 
nings showed  the  senator  just  how 
to  press  the  dummy  key  down,  ex- 
plaining it  in  careful  detail,  and 
just  when. 

“Thirty-seven,  thirty-six,  thirty- 
five — ” 

“Major!”  Jennings  called  ques- 
tioningly. 

“Ready,  sir.” 

“Professor!” 

“Ready,  sir.” 

“Three,  two,  one,  ZERO!” 

“Press  it.  Senator!”  Jennings 
called  frantically. 

Already  the  automatic  firing 
stud  had  taken  over.  The  bellow- 
ing, roaring  flames  reached  down 
with  giant  strength,  nudging  the 
ship  upward,  seeming  to  hang  sus- 
pended, waiting. 

“Press  it!” 

The  senator’s  hand  pressed  the 
dummy  key.  He  was  committed. 

As  if  the  ship  had  really  been 
waiting,  it  lifted,  faster  and  faster. 

“Major?” 

“I  have  it,  sir.”  The  major’s 
hands  were  flying  over  his  bank  of 
controls,  correcting  the  slight  un- 
balance of  thrusts,  holding  the  ship 
as  steady  as  if  he  were  in  it. 

Already  the  ship  was  beyond 
visual  sight,  picking  up  speed.  But 
the  pip  on  the  radar  screens  was 


PROGRESS  REPORT 


111 


strong  and  clear.  The  drone  of  the 
IFF  returning  signal  was  equally 
strong. 

The  senator  sat  and  waited.  He 
had  done  his  job.  He  felt  it  per- 
haps would  have  been  better  to 
have  had  the  photographers  on  the 
spot,  but  realized  the  carefully  di- 
rected and  rehearsed  pictures  to  be 
taken  later  would  make  better  vote 
fodder. 

“It’s  already  out  in  space  now, 
Senator,”  Jennings  found  a second 
of  time  to  call  it  to  the  senator. 

The  pips  and  the  signals  were 
bright  and  clear,  coming  through 
the  ionosphere,  the  Heaviside  layer 
as  they  had  been  designed  to  do. 
Jennings  wondered  if  the  senator 
could  ever  be  made  to  understand 
the  simple  honesty  of  scientists  who 
had  worked  that  out  so  well  and 
true.  Bright  and  strong  and  clear. 

And  then  there  was  nothing!  The 
screens  were  blank.  The  sounds 
were  gone. 

ENNINGS  STOOD  in  stupefied 

silence. 

“It  shut!  It  shut  off!”  Major 
Eddy’s  voice  was  shrill  in  amaze- 
ment. 

“It  cut  right  out.  Colonel.  No 
fade,  no  dying  signal,  just  out!”  It 
was  the  first  time  Jennings  had  ever 
heard  a note  of  excitement  in  Pro- 
fessor Stein’s  voice. 

The  phone  began  to  ring,  loud 
and  shrill.  That  would  be  from  the 
General’s  observation  post,  where 
he,  too,  must  have  lost  the  signal. 

The  excitement  penetrated  the 
senator’s  rosy  dream  of  vast  acre- 
ages being  sold  at  a huge  profit, 
giant  walls  of  factories  going  up 


under  his  remote-control  owner- 
ship. “What’s  wrong?”  he  asked. 

Jennings  did  not  answer  him. 
“What  was  the  altitude?”  he  asked. 
The  phone  continued  to  ring,  but 
he  was  not  yet  ready  to  answer  it. 

“Hundred  fifty  miles,  maybe  a 
little  more,”  Major  Eddy  answered 
in  a dull  voice.  “And  then,  noth- 
ing,” he  repeated  incredulously. 
“Nothing.” 

The  phone  was  one  long  ring 
now,  taken  off  of  automatic  signal 
and  rung  with  a hand  key  pressed 
down  and  held  there.  In  a daze, 
Jennings  picked  up  the  phone. 

“Yes,  General,”  he  answered  as 
though  he  were  no  more  than  a 
robot.  He  hardly  listened  to  the 
general’s  questions,  did  not  need 
the  report  that  every  radarscope 
throughout  the  area  had  lost  con- 
tact at  the  same  instant.  Somehow 
he  had  known  that  would  be  true, 
that  it  wasn’t  just  his  own  mechan- 
isms failing.  One  question  did 
penetrate  his  stunned  mind. 

“How  is  the  senator  taking  it?” 
the  general  asked  finally. 

“Uncomprehending,  as  yet,”  Jen- 
nings answered  cryptically.  “But 
even  there  it  will  penetrate  sooner 
or  later.  We’ll  have  to  face  it  then.” 
“Yes,”  the  general  sighed.  “What 
about  safety?  What  if  it  fell  on  a 
big  city,  for  example?” 

“It  had  escape  velocity,”  Jen- 
nings answered.  “It  would  simply 
follow  its  trajectory  indefinitely — 
which  was  away  from  Earth.” 
“What’s  happening  now?”  the 
senator  asked  arrogantly.  He  had 
been  out  of  the  limelight  long 
enough,  longer  than  was  usual  or 
necessary.  He  didn’t  like  it  when 
people  went  about  their  business  as 


112 


MARK  CLIFTON  and  ALEX  APOSTOLIDES 


if  he  were  not  present. 

“Quiet  during  the  test,  Senator,” 
Jennings  took  his  mouth  from  the 
phone  long  enough  to  reprove  the 
man  gently.  Apparently  he  got 
away  with  it,  for  the  senator  put 
his  finger  to  his  lips  knowingly  and 
sat  back  again. 

“The  senator’s  starting  to  ask 
questions?”  the  general  asked  into 
the  phone. 

“Yes,  sir.  It  won’t  be  long  now.” 

“I  hate  to  contemplate  it,  Jim,” 
the  general  said  in  apprehension. 
“There’s  only  one  way  he’ll  trans- 
late it.  Two  billion  dollars  shot  up 
into  the  air  and  lost.”  Then  sharply. 
“There  must  be  something  you’ve 
done.  Colonel.  Some  mistake  you’ve 
made.” 

The  implied  accusation  struck 
at  Jennings’  stomach,  a heavy 
blow. 

“That’s  the  way  it’s  going  to  be?” 
he  stated  the  question,  knowing  its 
answer. 

“For  the  good  of  the  service,”  the 
general  answered  with  a stock 
phrase.  “If  it  is  the  fault  of  one 
officer  and  his  men,  we  may  be 
given  another  chance.  If  it  is  the 
failure  of  science  itself,  we  won’t.” 
“I  see,”  the  colonel  answered. 
“You  won’t  be  the  first  soldier, 
Colonel,  to  be  unjustly  punished  to 
maintain  public  faith  in  the  serv- 
ice.” 

“Yes,  sir,”  Jennings  answered  as 
formally  as  if  he  were  already  fac- 
ing court  martial. 

“It’s  back!”  Major  Eddy  shout- 
ed in  his  excitement.  “It’s  back, 
Colonel!” 

The  pip,  truly,  showed  startlingly 


clear  and  sharp  on  the  radarscope, 
the  correct  signals  were  coming  in 
sure  and  strong.  As  suddenly  as  the 
ship  had  cut  out,  it  was  back. 

“It’s  back,  General,”  Colonel 
Jennings  shouted  into  the  phone, 
his  eyes  fixed  upon  his  own  radar- 
scope.  He  dropped  the  phone  with- 
out waiting  for  the  general’s  an- 
swer. 

“Good,”  exclaimed  the  senator. 
“I  was  getting  a little  bored  with 
nothing  happening.” 

“Have  you  got  control?”  Jen- 
nings called  to  the  major. 

“Can’t  tell  yet.  It’s  coming  in  too 
fast.  I’m  trying  to  slow  it.  ’We’ll 
know  in  a minute.” 

“You  have  it  now,”  Professor 
Stein  spoke  up  quietly.  “It’s  slow- 
ing. It  will  be  in  the  atmosphere 
soon.  Slow  it  as  much  as  you  can.” 

As  surely  as  if  he  were  sitting  in 
its  control  room,  Eddy  slowed  the 
ship,  easing  it  down  into  the  atmos- 
phere. The  instruments  recorded 
the  results  of  his  playing  upon  the 
bank  of  controls,  as  sound  pouring 
from  a musical  instrument. 

“At  the  take-off  point?”  Jen- 
nings asked.  “Can  you  land  it 
there?” 

“Close  to  it,”  Major  Eddy  an- 
swered. “As  close  as  I can.” 

Now  the  ship  was  in  visual  sight 
again,  and  they  watched  its  nose 
turn  in  the  air,  turn  from  a bullet 
hurtling  earthward  to  a ship  set- 
tling to  the  ground  on  its  belly. 
Major  Eddy  was  playing  his  instru- 
ment bank  as  if  he  were  the  soloist 
in  a vast  orchestra  at  the  height  of 
a crescendo  forte. 

Jennings  grabbed  up  the  phone 
again. 

“Transportation!”  he  shouted. 


PROGRESS  REPORT 


113 


“Already  dispatched,  sir,”  the 
operator  at  the  other  end  respond- 
ed. 

^ Through  the  periscope  slit,  Jen- 
nings watched  the  ship  settle  light- 
ly downward  to  the  ground,  as 
though  it  were  a breezeborne 
feather  instead  of  its  tons  of  metal. 
It  seemed  to  settle  itself,  still,  and 
become  inanimate  again.  Major 
Eddy  dropped  his  hands  away  from 
his  instrument  bank,  an  exhausted 
virtuoso. 

“My  congratulations!”  the  sena- 
tor included  all  three  men  in  his 
sweeping  glance.  “It  was  remark- 
able how  you  all  had  control  at  ev- 
ery instance.  My  progress  report 
will  certainly  bear  that  notation.” 

The  three  men  looked  at  him, 
and  realized  there  was  no  irony  in 
his  words,  no  sarcasm,  no  realiza- 
tion at  all  of  what  had  truly  hap- 
pened. 

“I  can  see  a va-a-ast  fleet  of 
no-o-ble  ships . . . the  senator  be- 
gan to  orate. 

But  the  roar  of  the  arriving  jeep 
outside  took  his  audience  away 
from  him.  They  made  a dash  for 
the  bunker  door,  no  longer  inter- 
ested in  the  senator  and  his  progress 
report.  It  was  the  progress  report 
as  revealed  by  the  instruments  on 
the  ship  which  interested  them 
more. 

The  senator  was  close  behind 
them  as  they  piled  out  of  the  bunk- 
er door,  and  into  the  jeep,  with 
Jennings  unceremoniously  pulling 
the  driver  from  the  wheel  and  tak- 
ing his  place. 

Over  the  rough  dirt  road  toward 
the  launching  site  where  the  ship 
had  come  to  rest,  their  minds  were 
bemused  and  feverish,  as  they  pro- 


jected ahead,  trying  to  read  in  ad- 
vance what  the  instruments  would 
reveal  of  that  blank  period. 

The  senator’s  mind  projected 
even  farther  ahead  to  the  fleet  of 
space  ships  he  would  own  and  con- 
trol. And  he  had  been  worried 
about  some  ignorant  stupid  voters! 
Stupid  animals!  How  he  despised 
them!  What  would  he  care  about 
voters  when  he  could  be  master  of 
the  spaceways  to  the  stars? 

Jennings  swerved  the  jeep  off 
the  dirt  road  and  took  out  across 
the  hummocks  of  sagebrush  to  the 
ship  a few  rods  away.  He  hardly 
slacked  speed,  and  in  a swirl  of 
dust  pulled  up  to  the  side  of  the 
ship.  Before  it  had  even  stopped, 
the  men  were  piling  out  of  the  jeep, 
running  toward  the  side  of  the  ship. 

And  stopped  short. 


UNABLE  TO  BELIEVE  their 
eyes,  to  absorb  the  incredible, 
they  stared  at  the  swinging  open 
door  in  the  side  of  the  ship.  Slowly 
they  realized  the  iridescent  purple 
glow  around  the  doorframe,  the 
rotted  metal,  disintegrating  and 
falling  to  the  dirt  below.  The  im- 
plications of  the  tampering  with 
the  door  held  them  unmoving. 
Only  the  senator  had  not  caught  it 
yet.  Slower  than  they,  now  he  was 
chugging  up  'to  where  they  had 
stopped,  an  elephantine  amble. 

“Well,  well,  what’s  holding  us 
up?”  he  panted  irritably. 

Cautiously  then,  Jennings  moved 
toward  the  open  door.  And  as  cau- 
tiously, Major  Eddy  and  Professor 
Stein  followed  him.  O’Noonan  hung 
behind,  sensing  the  caution,  but  not 
knowing  the  reason  behind  it. 


114 


MARK  CLIFTON  and  ALEX  APOSTOLIDES 


They  entered  the  ship,  wary  of 
what  might  be  lurking  inside,  what 
had  burned  open  the  door  out 
there  in  space,  what  had  been  able 
to  capture  the  ship,  cut  it  off  from 
its  contact  with  controls,  stop  it  in 
its  headlong  flight  out  into  space, 
turn  it,  return  it  to  their  controls  at 
precisely  the  same  point  and  alti- 
tude. Wary,  but  they  entered. 

At  first  glance,  nothing  seemed 
disturbed.  The  bulkhead  leading  to 
the  power  plant  was  still  whole. 
But  farther  down  the  passage,  the 
door  leading  to  the  control  room 
where  the  instruments  were  housed 
also  swung  open.  It,  too,  showed 
the  iridescent  purple  disintegration 
of  its  metal  frame. 

They  hardly  recognized  the  con- 
trol room.  They  had  known  it  in- 
timately, had  helped  to  build  and 
fit  it.  They  knew  each  weld,  each 
nut  and  bolt. 

“The  instruments  are  gone,”  the 
professor  gasped  in  awe. 

It  was  true.  As  they  crowded 
there  in  the  doorway,  they  saw  the 
gaping  holes  along  the  walls  where 
the  instruments  had  been  inserted, 


one  by  one,  each  to  tell  its  own 
story  of  conditions  in  space. 

The  senator  pushed  himself  into 
the  room  and  looked  about  him. 
Even  he  could  tell  the  room  had 
been  dismantled. 

“What  kind  of  sabotage  is  this?” 
he  exclaimed,  and  turned  in  anger 
toward  Jennings.  No  one  answered 
him.  Jennings  did  not  even  bother 
to  meet  the  accusing  eyes. 

They  walked  down  the  narrow 
passage  between  the  twisted  frames 
where  the  instruments  should  have 
been.  They  came  to  the  spot  where 
the  master  integrator  should  have 
stood,  the  one  which  should  have 
co-ordinated  all  the  results  of  life- 
sustenance  measurements,  the  one 
which  was  to  give  them  their  prog- 
ress report. 

There,  too,  was  a gaping  hole — 
but  not  without  its  message.  Etched 
in  the  metal  frame,  in  the  same 
iridescent  purple  glow,  were  two 
words.  Two  enigmatic  words  to  re- 
verberate throughout  the  world, 
burned  in  by  some  watcher — some 
keeper — some  warden. 

“Not  yet” 


THE  END 


THE  NEXT  ISSUE  will  contain  another  exceptionally  fine  line-up  of 
stories.  In  addition  to  A CASE  OF  CONSCIENCE  by  James  Blish,  you’ll 
find  THY  ROCKS  AND  RILLS  by  Robert  E.  Gilbert.  It’s  a vision  of  the 
Manly  Age  in  Earth’s  not-too-distant  future,  complete  with  legal  duels, 
destructive  “thrill  parties”,  subjugated  women,  and  such  pleasant  diver- 
sions as  bullfights — but  what  happens  when  an  intelligent  mutant  bull  en- 
ters the  picture  is  moderately  world-shaking.  W.  W.  Skupeldyckle  presents 
a new  approach  to  science  fiction  in  THE  ROMANTIC  ANALOGUE; 
James  McKimmey,  Jr.,  [the  find  of  ’53)  tells  about  a PLANET  OF 
DREAMS;  and  there  will  be  top-notch  stories  by  Jerome  Bixby,  Philip  K. 
Dick,  and  others. 


On  earth  and  in  space.  Humanity  was  the  bene- 
ficiary of  DornoTs  great  experiments,  for  it  sup- 
plied— 


The  GUINEA  PIGS 

By  S.  A.  Lombino 


ND  WHICH  two  shall  be  the 
guinea  pigs  this  time?”  Krai 
asked,  a touch  of  bitterness,  tinging 
his  voice. 

Dornal  smiled  a crooked  smile, 
and  stroked  the  carefully  trimmed 
beard  that  clung  to  his  fine  jaw.  His 
right  eyebrow  lifted  ever  so  slightly, 
and  his  blue  eyes  twinkled  with 
faint  puzzlement. 

“Surely  you’re  not  concerned?” 
he  asked  Krai. 

“Excuse  me,”  Krai  said  sarcas- 
tically, “I  lost  my  head.” 

He  turned  on  his  heel,  presenting 
the  broad  back  of  his  yellow  tunic 
to  Dornal,  strode  rapidly  toward 
the  .plasteel  door  at  the  far  end  of 
the  chamber. 

“Just  a moment!”  Dornal’s  voice 
cracked  like  a whip. 

Krai  turned  to  face  his  superior 
officer.  “Yes?”  he  asked. 

“I’m  not  sure  I like  your  atti- 
tude,” Dornal  said.  The  smile  had 
vanished  from  his  lips.  He  stood 
now,  tall,  proud,  regal.  The  black- 
ness of  his  thick,  flowing  hair  and 


his  short  beard  framed  the  perfect 
oval  of  his  face.  His  brows  were 
knitted  in  consternation,  and  the 
eyes  that  examined  Krai  were  cold 
— and  a little  cruel. 

Krai  met  Dornal’s  eyes  with  his 
own  and  slowly  said,  “And  I’m  not 
sure  I like  yours  either.” 

Dornal’s  hand  dropped  auto- 
matically to  the  stun  gun  hanging 
in  the  plastic  holster  at  his  waist. 
He  seemed  to  think  better  of  it, 
looped  his  thumb  into  his  belt  in- 
stead. Again,  he  smiled  charmingly, 
his  teeth  flashing  in  a white,  even 
grin. 

“Krai,”  he  said,  “don’t  be  a 
fool.” 

“Damnit,  I’m  not  being  a fool!” 
Krai  shouted.  “I’m  just  getting  fed 
up.  God,  how  much  longer  is  this 
going  to  go  on,  this  indiscriminate 
use  of  human  beings  as — ” 

“You’re  upset,”  Dornal  said,  not 
unkindly.  “Borrow  a ship,  take  a 
hop  to  the  Moon.  It’ll  do  you  good. 
Spend  a little  . . .” 

“I  don’t  need  a pleasure  cruise 


115 


116 


S.  A.  LOMBINO 


to  the  Moon.  It’d  only  remind  me 
of  the  guinea  pigs  who  made  that 
trip  possible.” 

“All  right  then,  Krai,  what  do 
you  want?” 

“I  want  to  resign,”  Krai  said 
evenly.  “I  want  to  resign  from  your 
service.  You  can  get  a ne.w  assistant. 
I want  to  leave  your  whole  stinking 
government  to  you.  You  alone.  I 
want  you  to  handle  all  of  your  own 
rotten  experiments.  I want  to  . . 

“That’s  enough!”  Dornal’s  stun 
gun  was  in  his  hand  now.  With  a 
quick  motion  of  his  other  hand, 
Domal  flicked  the  potency  lever  on 
the  gun.  Krai  knew  it  was  up  full 
now,  and  Dornal  would  shoot  to 
kill. 

“Go  on,”  he  said.  “Squeeze  the 
trigger.” 

“I  hope  you’re  not  daring  me. 
Krai.”  Dornal’s  voice  was  cold. 

Krai  suddenly  spread  his  arms  in 
despair.  “Dornal,  look,  there  are 
other  ways.  Man  had  other  ways 
before  you  . . . before  we  began  to 
tamper.  Science  was  beginning  to 
solve  its  own  problems.  It  was  just 
a matter  of  ...” 

“It  was  a matter  of  decadence,” 
Dornal  interrupted.  “Before  I be- 
came Chief,  science  was  floundering 
about  in  its  own  offal.  Who  cured 
cancer?  Who  defeated  polio?  Who 
reached  the  Moon?  And  Mars? 
Venus?  Who,  Krai,  who?” 

“Do  you  think  you  did?  Do  you 
think  for  one  minute  it  was  you, 
Dornal?” 

“Yes,”  Dornal  answered  proudly. 
“It  was.  Krai.  It  was  I who  made 
these  things  possible.  Before  me, 
there  was  stupidity  and  blind  senti- 
ment. They  depended  on  volun- 
teers, and  when  they  had  no 


volunteers  they  had  to  fumble 
around  with  animals.  By  conscrip- 
tion of  human  beings  these  wonder- 
ful things  have  been  made  possible. 
Now,  when  we  are  on  the  verge  of 
another  great  experiment,  you  show 
your  chicken  heart!” 

“Another  experiment  that  will 
kill  more  people,”  Krai  added. 

“Perhaps,”  Dornal  admitted. 
“Perhaps.  It  doesn’t  matter.  Per- 
haps they’ll  be  successful  the  first 
time,  and  then  no  one  would  be 
lost.” 

Krai  spat  in  disgust.  “Did  they 
cure  cancer  the  first  time?  How 
many  humans  did  you  murder  to 
discover  the  cause  of  cancer?” 
“And  how  many  did  we  save  by 
discovering  the  cause  and  bringing 
about  a cure?” 

“Don’t  say  ‘we’;  It  was  all  your 
doing.” 

“On  the  contrary,”  Dornal  said. 
“It  was  our  doing.” 

“How  many  space  ships  did  you 
send  out  into  the  blackness  before 
we  reached  the  Moon?”  Krai  per- 
sisted. “And  then  Mars  and  Venus? 
How  many  lives  did  you  throw 
away?” 

“I  must  remind  you,”  Dornal 
said  softly,  “that  I rule  this  uni- 
verse. You  are  only  my  assistant,  a 
position  granted  by  my  grace.  I do 
what  is  best  for  the  population.” 
“And  I help,”  Krai  said. 

“Yes.  You  help.” 

“Who  are  you  to  say  that  so 
many  people  must  die  to  make 
things  easier  for  those  who  survive 
them?  No  one  has  that  power,  Dor- 
nal. No  one  but  . . .” 

“God,”  Dornal  finished.  “No  one 
but  God.” 

Krai’s  lips  tightened  across  his 


THE  GUINEA  PIGS 


117 


face.  He  turned  to  go. 

“I  wasn’t  aware  I’d  dismissed 
you,”  Dornal  snapped. 

Krai  turned  to  face  Domal. 
“Sir?”  he  asked. 

“The  new  ship  leaves  tomorrow 
at  oh-two-hundred.  I’ll  need  only 
two  men  to  man  her.  Good  men, 
Krai.  This  isn’t  going  to  be  the 
usual  hop.  We’re  reaching  for  the 
stars  this  time — ^we’re  going  to  ex- 
plore a new  universe.  Once  we 
break  the  chains  that  bind  us  to  our 
own  solar  system,  nothing  can  stop 
us.  Nothing!” 

“You’ll  have  your  two  men,  sir,” 
Krai  said.  “Will  that  be  all,  sir?” 

“Dismissed,”  Dornal  said.  He 
slipped  his  stun  gun  back  into  its 
holster  as  Krai  opened  the  plasteel 
door  and  left  the  chamber. 


The  enormous  ship  stood 

on  spidery  legs,  nose  pointed 
skyward.  The  sand  spread  out  be- 
neath it,  bathed  in  the  bluish  light 
of  the  stars.  Domal  glanced  up- 
wards, his  eyes  darting  from  one 
pinpoint  of  light  to  the  next.  The 
slow  smile  crossed  his  face  again, 
and  his  fingers  ran  smoothly 
through  his  short,  immaculate 
beard. 

Impatiently,  he  glanced  at  his 
wrist-chron.  The  ship  was  set  for 
blastoff  at  oh-two-hundred.  It  was 
now  oh-one-fifty  and  there  was  still 
no  sign  of  Krai. 

From  the  control  tower,  a loud- 
speaker blared,  “Red  minus  five. 
Red  minus  five.” 

The  ground  car  screeched  onto 
the  desert  sand,  and  Krai  stepped 
out,  waiting  for  the  two  young  men 
to  follow  him.  Together,  they  took 


long  strides  across  the  sand  to  where 
Domal  was  standing. 

“I  knew  you  wouldn’t  fail  me,” 
he  said  to  Krai. 

“Two  more  or  less,”  Krai 
shrugged.  “What’s  the  difference 
now?” 

“Exactly,”  Domal  agreed.  “Two 
more  or  less.” 

“Red  minus  three”  the  speaker 
blared.  “Red  minus  three.” 

“We’d  better  get  aboard  and 
show  the  men  the  ship,  sir,”  Krai 
said.  “They’ll  be  blasting  off  in 
eight  minutes.” 

“Yes,  yes,”  Dornal  said.  He 
glanced  upwards  at  the  stars  as  he 
mounted  the  ladder  to  the  nose 
turret.  Krai  followed  Dornal,  but 
not  too  closely.  Behind  him  were 
the  two  chosen  men.  They  were 
strangely  silent,  a little  pale. 

“Red  minus  one”  the  speaker 
announced. 

With  a powerful  backward 
thrust,  Krai  kicked  the  man  behind 
him.  There  was  a short  grunt  of 
surprise,  as  the  first  man  tumbled 
backwards,  down  the  ladder,  carry- 
ing the  second  man  with  him.  They 
rolled  over  in  the  sand  as  Krai  raced 
up  the  remaining  rungs  and  into 
the  turret. 

“Red  condition,”  the  speaker 
warned.  “Green  minus  five.” 

Krai  snapped  the  hatch  shut  and 
twisted  the  lock  wheel.  Dornal  was 
peering  up  out  of  the  blister,  his 
back  to  Krai.  “Soon  it  will  all  be 
mine,”  he  said,  scanning  the  uni- 
vcrs6. 

“Yes,”  Krai  agreed. 

Somewhere  below,  the  powerful 
turbo-jets  hummed  into  action, 
building  power.  The  sound  jostled 
Dornal.  He  turned  to  face  Krai. 


118 


5.  A.  LOMBINO 


“Green  minus  three”  the  speaker 
announced. 

Krai  felt  the  ship  tremble  with 
the  increasing  power  of  the  jets.  In 
less  than  three  minutes,  the  ship 
would  be  hurled  into  space,  hurled 
into  unknown  universes.  A look  of 
surprise  crossed  Dornal’s  face  as  he 
stared  around  the  cabin.  “Where 
are  the  pilots?  What’s . . 

He  noticed  the  strained  look  on 
Krai’s  face  then. 

“Green  minus  two.  Standby  for 
blastoff.” 

“What  are  you  . . . ?” 

“What’s  two  more  or  less?”  Krai 


shouted.  Dornal  reached  for  the 
space  lock,  fear  marking  his  face. 

The  desert  sands  began  to  glow 
red  and  yellow  as  the  jets  spewed 
flame  into  the  darkness. 

“Green  minus  one.” 

Dornal  clawed  at  the  lock  wheel 
frantically.  Krai  smashed  his  fist 
into  Dornal’s  hysterical  features, 
and  the  other  man  crumpled  to  the 
deck. 

In  another  second,  the  force  of 
acceleration  threw  Krai  down  un- 
conscious beside  the  other  man.  Si- 
lently, the  ship  streaked  for  the 
stars. 


THE  END 


IRRESISTIB.LE  WEAPON 

(Continued  from  page  31 ) 


accuracy,  the  colonel  put  the  ship 
into  subspace  drive. 

Korman  leaned  back  at  the  con- 
clusion of  the  brief  activity  on  his 
control  board,  and  met  Gibson’s 
pop-eyed  stare. 

“Interesting,  the  things  worth 
knowing,”  he  commented.  “How  to 
make  a weapon,  for  instance,  or 
whether  your  enemy  has  it  yet.” 

He  almost  smiled  at  his  prison- 
er’s expression. 

“Or  even  better:  knowing  ex- 
actly how  far  your  enemy  has  pro- 
gressed and  how  fast  he  can  con- 
tinue, whether  to  stop  him  im- 
mediately or  whether  you  can  re- 
main a step  ahead.” 

“B-but — if  both  sides  are  irre- 
sistible . . .”  Gibson  stammered. 

Korman  examined  him  con- 
temptuously. 


“No  irresistible  weapon  exists,  or 
ever  will!”  he  declared.  “Only  an 
irresistible  process — the  transmis- 
sion of  secrets!  You  are  living  proof 
that  no  safeguards  can  defend 
against  that.” 

He  savored  Gibson’s  silent  dis- 
comfort. 

“I  am  sure  you  know  how  far 
and  how  fast  the  Centaurian  scien- 
tists will  go,  Gibson,  since  I guided 
you  to  every  laboratory  in  that 
plant.  Your  memory  may  require 
some  painful  jogging  when  we 
reach  the  Solar  System;  but  re- 
member you  shall!” 

“But  you — you  were  ordered 
to  . . .” 

“You  didn’t  think  I was  a Cen- 
taurian, did  you?”  sneered  Kor- 
man. “After  I just  explained  to  you 
what  is  really  irresistible?” 


THE  END 


I I 

I COMETH  I 

iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiuiiiiiiiiuiiiiiiiiiiiiuiiiiiiuiiiiiiiiiiu 

TO  BE  OR  NOT  TO  BE 
Dear  Friends: 

I was  introduced  to  IP  with  the 
January  1953  issue  and  was  very 
pleasantly  surprised.  I am  tempted 
to  give  IF  the  edge  over 
ASTOUNDING  for  the  highest 
level  of  intelligence  in  the  science 
fiction  field,  but  you  realize  how 
unfair  this  would  be  to  John 
Campbell  and/or  the  publishers  of 
ASTOUNDING,  inasmuch  as  my 
judgment  would  be  based  on  only 
one  issue  of  IF.  I must  read  at 
least  60  or  70  issues  of  IF,  before 
I come  to  so  momentous  a decision. 
Well,  at  least  two  or  three  issues, 
anyway. 

My  favorite  story  in  the  January 
issue  was  Walter  Miller’s  CHECK 
AND  CHECKMATE.  Not  only 
was  it  a good  story  with  an  un- 
usual twist,  but  I think  it  took 
courage  to  write  and  courage  to 
publish  it.  I admire  and  respect  all 
concerned  for  it. 

I also  liked  Rog  Phillips’  YE  OF 
LITTLE  FAITH,  but  was  left 
somewhat  baffled  as  to  what  Rog 
was  trying  to  tell.  Is  he  “fer  or 
agin”  belief  (faith)  ? The  title  and 

1 


the  structure  of  the  story  seem  to 
imply  that  he’s  “fer,”  but  I got  the 
distinct  impression  that  he  is  a 
whopping  logician  with  his  tongue 
in  his  cheek. 

Although  Rog  does  not  elabo- 
rate on  Martin  Grant’s  theory,  I 
think  I know  one  answer  (and  I 
imagine  there  is  room  for  more)  to 
the  enigmatic  disappearances.  To 
me,  it  is  a very  “obvious  further 
step”  in  logic,  as  Rog  makes  Grant 
suspect  there  “must”  be. 

Martin  Grant’s  theory  “contains 
within  itself  the  proof  that  the  uni- 
verse must,  by  logical  necessity,  be 
constructed  according  to  said 

theory.  But  observation  and  experi- 
ence say  this  is  not  true.”  Martin 
Grant  conjectures,  “Either  the  uni- 
verse is  not  constructed  acording 
to  logical  necessity,  or,  the  observ- 
able universe  is  not  the  universe.” 

Now,  assuming  that  Grant’s 
theory  was  that  the  universe  is 
an  illusion,  it  follows  (if  I ac- 
cept this  theory)  that  MY 

OWN  EXISTENCE  is  part  of 
that  very  same  illusion!  Illu- 

sion and  existence  become  syn- 
onymous. The  moment  “I”  become 
“aware”  of  this  “fact,”  pop  goes 
the  illusion  AND,  therefore,  my  ex- 
istence. The  “logical  necessity”  is, 
logically,  the  simultaneity  of  the 
illusion-existence  of  universe  and 
self.  To  be  or  not  to  be  applies  to 
the  sum  total.  It  is  indivisible. 
Simple. 

Grant’s  statement,  “observation 
and  experience  says  this  is  not  true” 
was  correct  prior  to  his  own  disap- 
pearance, but  to  him  alone.  It  re- 
mained correct  to  each  individual 
only  to  the  point  of  the  individual’s 

19 


120 


THE  POSTMAN  COMETH 


disappearance.  Naturally,  Grant’s 
conjectures  are  meaningless. 

— George  Fedak 
Uniondale,  N.  Y. 

We  like  you,  Mr.  Fedak,  and  want 
you  to  read  at  least  60  or  70  issues 
of  IF.  Please  don’t  get  too  involved 
in  this  puzzle  and  disappear  your- 
self! 

THE  PLANETS,  YES 
Dear  Editor: 

You  state  that  space  travel  will 
not  appear  before  the  year  2000. 
That’s  all  well  and  good,  but  then 
you  go  on  to  say  that  man  has  to 
have  the  driving  force  of  animal 
survival  before  he  leaves  the  earth. 
You  then  state  that  there  is  still 
millions  of  inhabitable  miles  be- 
fore the  earth  will  be  overcrowded. 
By  your  own  reasoning  you  seem 
to  think  the  only  motivation  for 
man  to  leave  earth,  is  that  of  his 
own  survival.  You  are  absolutely 
wrong. 

An  overcrowded  America  was 
not  the  reason  that  explorers  went 
into  the  deepest  parts  of  Africa, 
into  the  unexplored  sections  of  the 
Amazon,  into  forbidden  Tibet. 

The  three  basic  motives  that  will 
make  man  venture  into  space  are 
Adventure,  Curiosity  and  a Chal- 
lenge. Adventure  and  Curiosity  are 
self  explanatory.  I’ll  explain  the 
third  and  most  important  motive,  a 
Challenge. 

The  challenge  of  going  where 
no  other  human  has  ever  been  be- 
fore, the  challenge  of  standing  on 
an  alien  planet  where  no  other  hu- 
man foot  has  ever  trod,  the  chal- 


lenge of  meeting  and  establishing 
contact  with  alien  life  forms,  these 
challenges  and  many  more  will 
drive  man  on  to  the  planets  and 
finally  to  the  stars. 

Adventure,  Curiosity,  and  the 
Challenge  will  send  man  out  into 
space,  not  survival. 

— Lyle  Kessler 
Philadelphia,  Pa. 

A nice,  idealistic  concept — and  the 
sort  of  idea  that  makes  science  fic- 
tion possible,  for  which  we’re 
thankful!  But  some  challenges  do 
go  unanswered.  Africa,  the  Ama- 
zon, Tibet  presented  purely  practi- 
cal motives  too,  and  besides  could 
be  attacked  by  individuals;  space 
is  going  to  take  organization  and 
an  awful  lot  of  money.  But  we’ll 
make  it  yet! 

LOST:  FIVE  YEARS 

Dear  Mr.  Quinn: 

YE  QF  LITTLE  FAITH  by 
Rog  Phillips  was  tops. 

However,  his  factual  research 
was  lacking.  On  page  50,  Rog 
(Curt)  states,  “Your  father  can’t 
be  declared  legally,  ah,  departed 
for  two  years.”  (The  underscore  is 
mine.)  Being  an  ex-insurance 
man  for  many  long  years,  indirect- 
ly connected  with  legal  adjustments 
and  actuarial  departments,  I am 
positive  that  vanished  persons  are 
not  declared  legally  dead  until  sev- 
en years  have  passed. 

This  factual  error  might  detract 
reader  interest  with  many  fantasy 
fans  and  this,  I know,  Rog  Phillips 
would  not  want  done. 

— Elmer  R.  Kirk 


VENUS  is  covered  by  a heavy  blanket  af  clouds  which  obscures  the  planet's 
surface,  making  conditions  there  a matter  for  speculation.  No  water  vapar 
or  oxygen  can  be  detected  in  Venus'  atmosphere,  but  there  is  an  abun- 
dance of  carbon  dioxide.  The  spaceship  shown  is  traveling  in  a power-off 
attitude,  but  will  make  a tail-first  landing  under  power — if  it  finds  anything 
to  land  on!  (Drawings  by  Ed  Valigursky) 


L